Operation Manual
TMC470
Marking System Controller
(for Single-Pin Pneumatic Markers)
This document contains operating instructions for the Telesis® TMC470
Controller and its marking system software. This document should be
used along with the marker-specific Operation Supplement that provides
information on the marking system hardware and its usage.
Document No. 34700 Rev. D
Telesis Technologies, Inc.
28181 River Drive
P.O. Box 1000
Circleville, Ohio 43113
TMC470 Controller Operation
Foreword
Telesis Technologies, Inc. (hereinafter referred to as Telesis) reserves the right to change the information and
specifications contained in this document without prior notice. The reader should consult Telesis to determine
whether such changes have been made.
In no event shall Telesis be liable for any incidental, indirect, special, or consequential damages whatsoever,
including but not limited to lost profits, arising out of, or relating to this document or the information it contains, even
if Telesis has been advised, has knowledge, or should have knowledge of the possibility of such damages.
Telesis expressly warrants the equipment it manufactures as set forth in the Standard Terms and Conditions of Sale.
Telesis makes no other warranties, expressed or implied, including and without limitation, warranties as to
merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose.
The information contained in this document is confidential and is proprietary to Telesis or its licensors.
Trademarks
Telesis, Merlin, and PS-OCR are registered trademarks of Telesis Technologies, Inc.
MicroPin is a registered trademark of Telesis Technologies, Inc.
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
© 2008 – 2009 Telesis Technologies, Incorporated – All Rights Reserved
34700D.DOC
i
TMC470 Controller Operation
License Agreement for Telesis Software
THE SUBJECT PROGRAMS ARE LICENSED BY TELESIS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. TO ENDUSERS FOR THEIR USE ONLY ON THE TERMS BELOW. ACCEPTING AND USING THESE
PROGRAMS INDICATES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS. THIS IS A LEGAL
AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU, THE END USER, AND TELESIS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
1)
GRANT OF LICENSE. Telesis Technologies, Inc. (Telesis) agrees to grant to you a non-exclusive license to use the
Telesis software/firmware program (the program) subject to the terms and conditions of this license agreement.
2)
DEFINITION OF TERMS. The term software refers to a computer program stored on electronic media that must be
loaded into computer memory to be executed. The term firmware refers to a computer program stored in
semiconductor memory (ROM, PROM, EPROM, EEPROM, NVRAM, etc.) that is an integral part of the computer
memory. Together, these forms of computer programs are referred to as the program.
3)
COPYRIGHT. The program(s) and documentation is owned by Telesis and is protected by United States copyright
laws and international treaty provisions. The program(s) contain trade secrets and proprietary property of Telesis.
You may make one copy of the program(s) solely for backup or archival purposes provided that the copy clearly
displays the Telesis copyright notice. Additional copies may be made when authorized to do so in writing by
Telesis. In addition to any other right of Telesis, Telesis has the right to terminate this license if the terms of the
license are violated.
4)
RESTRICTION ON USE AND TRANSFER. The single-processor version(s) of the program(s) and documentation are
to be used on one computer or embedded system at any one time. The multi-processor version(s) of the
program(s) and documentation may be used over a network provided that the number of computers accessing the
network simultaneously shall not exceed the number authorized by Telesis or for which you paid the corresponding
multi-processor fee. You may not distribute the programs or documentation to a third party. You may transfer the
license and complete package (retaining nothing) if the transferee agrees to the terms of this License Agreement.
Neither the program(s) nor the documentation may be changed or translated without express written permission of
Telesis. You may not reverse engineer, decompile or disassemble the program(s).
5)
WARRANTY for the subject program(s) is covered under the Telesis Standard Terms and Conditions of Sale.
6)
TERM. The license is effective until terminated. It will be terminated if you fail to comply with any term or
condition of this License Agreement. You may terminate this License Agreement at any time. In the event of
termination, you agree to destroy the program(s) and documentation together with all copies and related material.
7)
YOUR USE OF THIS PROGRAM(S) acknowledges that you have read this License Agreement and agree to its terms.
This agreement is complete and supersedes any other agreement that may have related to the subject matter of
this agreement.
ii
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
Telesis Customer Support
Telesis Customer Support offers the following assistance.
Phone Support
Telesis Customer Support offers free phone support to answer questions during normal business hours.
On-Site Service
Telesis can send Customer Support professionals to your facility to perform equipment startup, repair, maintenance, and training.
Service Contracts As part of your Service Contract, you receive periodic maintenance and quick on-site
customer support if a problem should occur.
Factory Service
Telesis Customer Support can repair defective parts in our factory to save you money.
Contact us for more information on any of these services. If you need parts for the marking system, be sure to specify
the marker model number and serial number when ordering. You may contact Telesis at any of the following locations:
United States
Telesis Technologies, Inc.
Corporate Headquarters
28181 River Drive
P.O. Box 1000
Circleville, Ohio, USA 43113
+1 (740) 477 5000
+1 (800) 654 5696 (U.S. and Canada)
+1 (800) 867 8670 (after hours)
+1 (740) 477 5001 (fax)
email: sales@telesistech.com
email: technical_services@telesistech.com
web: www.telesis.com
Telesis Technologies, Inc.
Great Lakes Office
740 Welch Road
Commerce Township, Michigan, USA 48390
+1 (248) 624 4249
+1 (248) 624 4431 (fax)
email: inquires.telesistech.com
web: www.telesis.com/greatlakes.htm
Europe
Telesis Europe B.V.
Innsruckweg 104
3047 AH Rotterdam
The Netherlands
+31 10 462 21 36
+31 10 462 38 63 (fax)
email: sales-europe@telesistech.com
web: www.telesis.com/europebv.htm
Telesis Systèmes de Marquage
Parc International d'Entreprises Arlington
4 Boulevard Michael Faraday
77 716 Marne la Vallee Cedex 4
+33 1 60 42 88 19
+33 1 60 42 87 80 (fax)
email: inquiries.telesistech.com
web: www.telesis.com/france.htm
TelesisEagle
Dolphin Street
Colyton, Devon, UK EX24 6LU
+44 1297 551313
+44 1297 551319 (fax)
email: uksales@telesistech.com
web: uk.telesis.com
Telesis MarkierSysteme GmbH
Wülfingstrasse 6
D-42477 Radevormwald
Germany
+49 2191 60 90 80
+49 2191 60 90 88 (fax)
email: info@telesistech.com
web: www.telesis.com/german.htm
Asia
Telesis China
Building #1, First Floor
180 Zhangheng Road
Zhangjiang Hi-Tech Park
Pudong New District
Shanghai 201204, China
+86-021-33933851
+86-021-33933852 (fax)
email: sales.china@telesischina.com
web: www.telesischina.com
Telesis Taiwan
1F, No 175, Dexiang Road
Nanzi District
Kaohiung City 811, Taiwan
+886 (7) 3686678
+886 (7) 3680289 (fax)
email: sales.taiwan@telesistech.com
web: www.telesischina.com
34700D.DOC
iii
TMC470 Controller Operation
Safety Summary
The TMC470 Controller uses high voltage power supplies. The marking head and its optional accessories inherently
move and reposition during system operations. Accordingly, there is some danger when working with, and near,
marking machines. The following safety precautions should be observed at all times.
Never use the system in any manner or for any purpose other than that for which it was designed.
Do not connect or disconnect components while power is applied to the system.
Do not remove or defeat the safety features or protective guards.
Always wear eye protection when operating the marking system.
Ear protection may be required when working with or near an operating marking system.
Keep all body parts, jewelry, and clothing clear of the marking system while it is operating.
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes may be placed throughout this document to alert you to important information. These
messages have the following significance.
Warnings contain information that is essential to the personal safety of the user.
Cautions contain information that is essential to avoid damage to the equipment.
Notes call attention to information of special importance at specific points within the text.
iv
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
The following Warnings and Cautions are contained in this document.
WARNING
Stay clear of the marking system when placing the machine online to avoid contact with the
moving equipment.
Stay clear of the marking system when jogging the machine to avoid contact with the
moving equipment.
When the Park command is issued, the marking system equipment will automatically move
to its Park position. Stay clear of the marking system when parking the machine to avoid
contact with the moving equipment.
When the Pre-Position command is issued, the marking system equipment will automatically
move to the anchor location of the first field in the pattern. Stay clear of the marking system
when pre-positioning the machine to avoid contact with the moving equipment.
When the Exercise Test is performed, the marking system equipment will automatically move
around the entire perimeter of the marking window. Stay clear of the marking system when
running the Exercise Test to avoid contact with the moving equipment.
Certain procedures may require testing electrical circuits while power is applied to the
marking system. To avoid personal injury, only experienced maintenance personnel should
perform these tests. Regardless of experience, caution should always be used when working
with energized electrical circuits.
CAUTION
If the Over Temp signal is ON (⌧), it indicates the controller temperature has exceeded 65°C
(149°F). This is a very serious condition. The software will not allow any machine movement.
If the Over Temp signal is ON, shut down the controller immediately and contact Telesis
Customer Support.
Certain procedures allow the system parameters to be reset to their factory–default settings.
If reset, all parameters that have been specifically configured for your system will be lost and
unrecoverable.
Never position the limit switch (on the optional Z-axis tool stand) below the level of the
carriage. Damage to the limit switch and carriage will result if so positioned.
Resetting the Date Code lookup table or the Shift Code lookup table or the Omni SN
parameters will reset all User parameter settings (Date, Shift, and Omni SN) to their factory
default settings. All parameters that have been specifically configured for your system will
be overwritten with the default values
Certain tests are available at the Supervisor level to check the operation of the circuit boards
installed in the TMC470 Controller. The tests require special test equipment. Accordingly,
these tests are intended for use by Telesis-authorized technicians only. Telesis strongly
recommends that you do not run these tests without the appropriate test equipment or
without the consent of Telesis Technologies, Inc.
34700D.DOC
v
TMC470 Controller Operation
Table of Contents
TOPIC
PAGE
Foreword............................................................................................................................................
i
Trademarks ........................................................................................................................................
i
License Agreement for Telesis Software .................................................................................................
ii
Telesis Customer Support.....................................................................................................................
iii
Safety Summary .................................................................................................................................
iv
Chapter 1 – Controller Operation
1.1
Overview ..................................................................................................................................
1-1
1.2
Using the Marking System ..........................................................................................................
1-1
1.3
Using the Controller ...................................................................................................................
1-1
1.3.1
Power On / Software Startup.........................................................................................
1-2
1.3.2
Modes of Operation ......................................................................................................
1-2
1.3.3
Navigation Keys...........................................................................................................
1-3
1.3.4
Function Keys..............................................................................................................
1-4
1.3.5
Marker Operation Keys .................................................................................................
1-5
1.3.6
Edit Keys ....................................................................................................................
1-6
1.3.7
Special Keys................................................................................................................
1-7
Diacritics ............................................................................................................................................
1-7
Control Characters ..............................................................................................................................
1-7
1.4
Open a Pattern File ....................................................................................................................
1-8
1.5
Place Machine Online..................................................................................................................
1-9
1.6
Park the Machine .......................................................................................................................
1-10
1.7
Pre-Position the Machine.............................................................................................................
1-11
1.8
Enter Data Into Patterns .............................................................................................................
1-12
1.8.1
Enter User Text ...........................................................................................................
1-12
1.8.2
Enter Query Text .........................................................................................................
1-13
1.9
Simulate Printing (Dryrun) ..........................................................................................................
1-14
1.10
Print Patterns ............................................................................................................................
1-14
1.11
Stop the Print Cycle ...................................................................................................................
1-14
1.12
Jog the Machine.........................................................................................................................
1-15
1.13
Display System Information ........................................................................................................
1-18
1.14
Display Print Cycle Time .............................................................................................................
1-18
1.15
Using the Merlin III InterFace ......................................................................................................
1-19
1.15.1
Summary of Features ...................................................................................................
1-19
1.15.2
Initiating Merlin Control ................................................................................................
1-20
1.15.3
Resuming TMC470 Control ............................................................................................
1-20
1.15.4
Recovering from Unintentional Disconnection....................................................................
1-20
Software Exit / Power Off............................................................................................................
1-20
1.16
vi
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
Table of Contents
TOPIC
PAGE
Chapter 2 – Pattern Design & Management
2.1
Overview ..................................................................................................................................
2-1
2.2
Design Considerations ................................................................................................................
2-1
2.2.1
Marking Window Size ...................................................................................................
2-2
2.2.2
Placement of Objects ...................................................................................................
2-2
2.2.3
Character Dimensions ..................................................................................................
2-4
2.2.4
Font Selection .............................................................................................................
2-4
2.2.5
Printing Order .............................................................................................................
2-5
2.2.6
Print Modes.................................................................................................................
2-5
2.2.7
Pin Return Rate ...........................................................................................................
2-5
2.2.8
Codes and Real-time Data ............................................................................................
2-6
Operator-Supplied Text .......................................................................................................................
2-7
Serial Numbers ...................................................................................................................................
2-7
Time and Date Insertion ......................................................................................................................
2-8
Coded Information ..............................................................................................................................
2-8
Error Checking....................................................................................................................................
2-8
2.3
Access Designer Mode ................................................................................................................
2-9
2.4
Create New Patterns ..................................................................................................................
2-10
2.4.1
Using the Pattern Wizard ..............................................................................................
2-10
2.4.2
Using the Pattern Editor ...............................................................................................
2-12
2.4.3
Downloading Patterns from Merlin .................................................................................
2-12
2.5
Save/Name/Copy Patterns ..........................................................................................................
2-13
2.6
Define Objects in Patterns ..........................................................................................................
2-14
2.6.1
Text...........................................................................................................................
2-14
2.6.2
2D Matrix Symbol ........................................................................................................
2-20
2.6.3
QR Code Symbol .........................................................................................................
2-30
2.6.4
MicroQR Code Symbol ..................................................................................................
2-41
2.6.5
Arc (Radius Method) ....................................................................................................
2-52
2.6.6
Arc 3P (3-point Method) ...............................................................................................
2-55
2.6.7
ArcText (Radius Method) ..............................................................................................
2-58
2.6.8
ArcText 3P (3-point Method) .........................................................................................
2-66
2.6.9
Line (Start Method) .....................................................................................................
2-72
2.6.10
Line 2P (Start/End Method) ..........................................................................................
2-75
2.6.11
Box............................................................................................................................
2-78
2.6.12
Circle .........................................................................................................................
2-81
2.6.13
Ellipse (Radius Method) ................................................................................................
2-84
2.6.14
Ellipse 3P (3-point Method)...........................................................................................
2-88
2.6.15
Block Objects ..............................................................................................................
2-92
2.6.16
GoTo Command ..........................................................................................................
2-96
2.6.17
Pause Command .........................................................................................................
2-98
2.6.18
Input Command .......................................................................................................... 2-100
2.6.19
Output Command ........................................................................................................ 2-104
34700D.DOC
vii
TMC470 Controller Operation
Table of Contents
TOPIC
PAGE
Chapter 2 – Pattern Design & Management
(continued)
2.6.20
Serial Command .......................................................................................................... 2-105
2.6.21
Machine Command....................................................................................................... 2-108
2.7
Test Patterns............................................................................................................................. 2-112
2.8
Edit Patterns ............................................................................................................................. 2-113
2.8.1
Change Pattern Parameters........................................................................................... 2-113
2.8.2
Change Field Parameters .............................................................................................. 2-113
2.8.3
Copy Fields ................................................................................................................. 2-113
2.8.4
Delete Fields ............................................................................................................... 2-114
2.8.5
Move Fields (Change Print Order) ................................................................................. 2-115
2.8.6
Adjusting the Pattern Anchor......................................................................................... 2-116
2.9
Configure Pattern Properties........................................................................................................ 2-118
2.9.1
Pattern Serial Number .................................................................................................. 2-118
2.9.2
Pattern Park Position .................................................................................................... 2-121
2.9.3
Default Text Settings.................................................................................................... 2-122
2.9.4
Default Pin Parameters ................................................................................................. 2-124
2.9.5
Pattern Instructions ..................................................................................................... 2-126
2.9.6
X/Y-axis Speed Parameters ........................................................................................... 2-127
2.9.7
Theta-axis Parameters ................................................................................................. 2-128
Theta-axis Part Diameter ..................................................................................................................... 2-128
Theta-axis Speed ................................................................................................................................ 2-129
Theta-axis Mounting Angle ................................................................................................................... 2-129
2.9.8
2.10
Z-axis Speed Parameters .............................................................................................. 2-130
Remote Pattern Selection............................................................................................................ 2-131
2.10.1
Reserved Pattern Names............................................................................................... 2-131
2.10.2
Parameter Configuration ............................................................................................... 2-131
2.11
Manage the Controller Library ..................................................................................................... 2-132
2.11.1
View Library Files......................................................................................................... 2-132
2.11.2
Delete Library Files ...................................................................................................... 2-133
Chapter 3 – System Configuration & Management
viii
3.1
Access System Parameters .........................................................................................................
3-1
3.2
System Passwords .....................................................................................................................
3-2
3.3
Marker Properties ......................................................................................................................
3-3
3.4
Query Text Properties.................................................................................................................
3-6
3.5
Date Code Properties..................................................................................................................
3-7
3.6
Shift Code Properties..................................................................................................................
3-9
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
Table of Contents
TOPIC
PAGE
Chapter 3 – System Configuration & Management
(continued)
3.7
Omni Serial Number Properties ...................................................................................................
3-11
3.8
Downloading System Parameters from Merlin................................................................................
3-13
3.9
Startup Properties .....................................................................................................................
3-14
3.10
Host Communication Properties ...................................................................................................
3-18
3.10.1
Primary Communication Parameters ..............................................................................
3-18
3.10.2
Programmable Protocol Parameters ...............................................................................
3-19
3.10.3
Programmable Protocol Examples ..................................................................................
3-22
Data Defined By Terminator .................................................................................................................
3-22
Data Defined By Length .......................................................................................................................
3-23
Message Type Defined By Host .............................................................................................................
3-24
3.10.4
Extended Protocol Parameters.......................................................................................
3-26
3.10.5
Extended Protocol Examples ........................................................................................
3-27
Message Format .................................................................................................................................
3-27
Response Format ................................................................................................................................
3-28
Message Types ...................................................................................................................................
3-29
Block Check Code ...............................................................................................................................
3-33
3.11
Serial2 Communication Properties ...............................................................................................
3-34
3.12
Ethernet/MERLIN Communication Properties .................................................................................
3-37
3.13
Clock and Calendar Properties .....................................................................................................
3-40
3.14
Units of Measure .......................................................................................................................
3-41
3.15
Enable / Disable Impact Pin ........................................................................................................
3-42
3.16
Z-axis Properties .......................................................................................................................
3-43
3.16.1
Overview ....................................................................................................................
3-43
3.16.2
Enable / Disable the Z-axis ...........................................................................................
3-43
3.16.3
Adjust the Limit Switch ................................................................................................
3-44
3.16.4
Define the Zero Offset..................................................................................................
3-45
3.16.5
Adjust the Z-axis Speed ...............................................................................................
3-47
3.17
Theta-axis Properties .................................................................................................................
3-48
Overview ....................................................................................................................
3-48
3.17.2
Enable / Disable the Theta-axis .....................................................................................
3-48
3.17.3
Define the Part Diameter ..............................................................................................
3-49
3.17.4
Define the Theta-axis Speed .........................................................................................
3-49
3.17.5
Define the Mounting Angle............................................................................................
3-50
3.18
Reset System Parameters ...........................................................................................................
3-52
3.19
3.17.1
Backup & Restore Patterns, Fonts, Parameters ..............................................................................
3-53
3.19.1
Access Files ................................................................................................................
3-53
3.19.2
Choose Files to be Displayed .........................................................................................
3-53
34700D.DOC
ix
TMC470 Controller Operation
Table of Contents
TOPIC
PAGE
Chapter 3 – System Configuration & Management
(continued)
3.19.3
Change Directory on USB Drive .....................................................................................
3-54
3.19.4
Display File Size ..........................................................................................................
3-54
3.19.5
Display File Timestamp.................................................................................................
3-54
3.19.6
Backup a Single File .....................................................................................................
3-54
3.19.7
Backup Multiple Files ....................................................................................................
3-55
3.19.8
Restore a Single File ....................................................................................................
3-55
3.19.9
Restore Multiple Files ...................................................................................................
3-55
3.19.10
Delete a Single File ......................................................................................................
3-56
3.19.11
Delete Multiple Files .....................................................................................................
3-56
3.19.12
Delete a Directory on USB Drive ....................................................................................
3-56
3.19.13
Create a Directory on USB Drive ....................................................................................
3-56
3.19.14
Exit the Backup/Restore Screen.....................................................................................
3-56
Maintenance Tasks.....................................................................................................................
3-57
3.20.1
Test Output Signals......................................................................................................
3-57
3.20.2
Test Input Signals........................................................................................................
3-58
3.20.3
Test Solenoids .............................................................................................................
3-59
3.20.4
Test Machine Movement ...............................................................................................
3-60
3.20.5
Verify Marker Position ..................................................................................................
3-62
3.20
Chapter 4 – System Messages
x
2D Matrix Encode Error! .......................................................................................................................
4-1
Character Index, Must Be 90/270 Degs!.................................................................................................
4-1
Delete Parameter(s) Is Not Allowed .......................................................................................................
4-1
Denied On an Empty Pattern! ...............................................................................................................
4-1
Denied! Marker Is Offline! ...................................................................................................................
4-1
Device Is Not Formatted ......................................................................................................................
4-1
Device Is Not Mounted .........................................................................................................................
4-1
Error: 7 Bits / No Parity Is Not Supported! ............................................................................................
4-1
Error: Alpha SN Range Warning! (A-Z)..................................................................................................
4-1
Error: An Edit Field Needs Selected ......................................................................................................
4-2
Error: Cannot Copy an Empty Field.......................................................................................................
4-2
Error: Cannot Cut an Empty Field .........................................................................................................
4-2
Error: Cannot Save, Flash Disk Is Full ...................................................................................................
4-2
Error: ChDir Failed .............................................................................................................................
4-2
Error: Copy Failed ..............................................................................................................................
4-2
Error: Copying Unknown Parameter File ................................................................................................
4-2
Error: Delete Failed ............................................................................................................................
4-2
Error: in Deleting the Pattern!..............................................................................................................
4-2
Error: In Homing the Theta-axis...........................................................................................................
4-2
Error: In Homing the Z-axis.................................................................................................................
4-2
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
Table of Contents
TOPIC
PAGE
Chapter 4 – System Messages
(continued)
Error: in Loading Pattern! ...................................................................................................................
4-2
Error: in Saving Pattern! .....................................................................................................................
4-3
Error: Invalid Source ..........................................................................................................................
4-3
Error: MkDir Failed .............................................................................................................................
4-3
Error: Over Temperature Fault Detected ...............................................................................................
4-3
Error: Paste Buffer Is Empty................................................................................................................
4-3
Error: Pixel Is Out of Marker's Range....................................................................................................
4-3
Error: Quiet Area Violation! .................................................................................................................
4-3
Error: Serial Number Range Warning!...................................................................................................
4-3
Error: UNTITLED Is a Reserved Name!..................................................................................................
4-3
Field (nn) - User Font Error! .................................................................................................................
4-3
F-Ram Error ... Initializing F-Ram..........................................................................................................
4-4
Home Limit Error in X-axis ...................................................................................................................
4-4
Home Limit Error in Y-axis ...................................................................................................................
4-4
I2C Error with F-Ram ..........................................................................................................................
4-4
I2C Error with RT Clock .......................................................................................................................
4-4
I2C Interface Failed to Initialize! ...........................................................................................................
4-4
I2C RT Clock Low Battery Warning! .......................................................................................................
4-4
Marker Aborted!..................................................................................................................................
4-4
Marker Aborted! Over Temperature Fault ..............................................................................................
4-4
No Pattern Loaded! Pre-position What? .................................................................................................
4-4
Memory Allocation Error.......................................................................................................................
4-5
Micro QR Code Encode Error.................................................................................................................
4-5
Parameter Error! Defaults Loaded! .......................................................................................................
4-5
Password Error! **Access Denied** .....................................................................................................
4-5
Pattern Pixel Range Error! Field (nn) ....................................................................................................
4-5
QR Code Encode Error .........................................................................................................................
4-5
Serial Tool is Not Enabled ....................................................................................................................
4-5
Timeout... Cannot Find Home Position! ..................................................................................................
4-5
Variable Text Field Not Found ...............................................................................................................
4-5
Appendix A – Standard Telesis Fonts
5x7 Font Character Set ........................................................................................................................
A-1
OCR Font Character Set .......................................................................................................................
A-1
11x16 Font Character Set ....................................................................................................................
A-2
Appendix B – ASCII Character Cross Reference
Standard ASCII Characters ..................................................................................................................
B-1
Extended ASCII Characters ..................................................................................................................
B-2
34700D.DOC
xi
TMC470 Controller Operation
This page intentionally left blank.
xii
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
Chapter 1
Controller Operation
1.1 OVERVIEW
This manual documents the use of the TMC470 Controller to operate your Telesis marking system. The information in
this manual describes the use of the marking system controller and software to operate the marker and to design,
print, and maintain a library of patterns.
This manual should be used along with the Operation Supplement for your marking system. The supplement contains
vital, marker-specific information about the marking system hardware and equipment operation.
1.2 USING THE MARKING SYSTEM
The marking system is designed to permanently print messages into a variety of materials such as steel, aluminum,
and plastic. The shape, size, and location of the marked message are programmed by the pattern designer using the
system software. Marking is accomplished as a hardened pin accelerates to indent the target surface. The software
moves the pin cartridge to precise locations within the marking window and automatically controls pin extension and
retraction to mark the message.
1.3 USING THE CONTROLLER
The controller runs the marking system software and generates commands to control the marker.
NOTICE
The TMC470 Controller is capable of operating several Telesis markers. While most software features
are universally employed in the various systems, some features are unique to specific markers.
Accordingly, some features documented in this manual may not apply to your specific system. Where
variations do exist, they will be clearly identified within the text to inform you of the differences.
The front of the controller provides an 8-line liquid crystal display (LCD), a standard keyboard, and special keys for
operating the marker. It is the primary user interface to the marking system, allowing you to select options and
execute commands displayed by the software. The back panel of the controller includes a power on/off switch and
various ports to connect the marker and additional, optional equipment.
34700D.DOC
1-1
TMC470 Controller Operation
1.3.1 Power On / Software Startup
Locate the power switch on the back panel of the controller (next to the power cable).
Position the switch to ON (I).
The controller will automatically start and electrical power will be available to all equipment connected to the controller.
The marking system software will automatically start and display the Main Screen (shown below). The system software
is permanently installed in the controller. It produces the user interface screens that are displayed to the operator. Its
pre-programmed commands, combined with operator selections and inputs, are used to control the marker. The
software also contains a library for storing user-defined pattern files for printing.
Main Menu
Operational Mode
Operational Status
List of Fields in Pattern
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER –Offline– Pattern:UNTITLED
:000
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
]
]
]
]
]
No. of Fields in Pattern
Pattern File Name
Operator Mode – Main Screen at Startup
1.3.2 Modes of Operation
The system provides three operating modes: Operator, Designer, and Supervisor.
•
Operator
Operator mode allows you to open patterns, enter data, print patterns, and jog the machine.
Operator mode features are documented in this chapter.
•
Designer
Designer mode allows you to perform all tasks available to the operator, plus allows you to design
and edit patterns, configure pattern parameters, and change some system parameters. Access to
the this mode may be password protected to prevent usage by unauthorized persons. Most
Designer mode features are documented in Chapter 2.
•
Supervisor
Supervisor mode allows you to perform all tasks available to the operator and designer, plus allows
you to configure system operating parameters and check system performance. Access to the this
mode may be password protected to prevent usage by unauthorized persons. Most Supervisor
mode features are documented in Chapter 3.
•
M3
(Merlin®III) Optionally, the TMC470 may be connected to a computer running the Merlin III Visual
Design Software. When in this mode, operational control of the marking system is provided through
the system computer and the Merlin III software. Refer to Using the Merlin III Interface for details.
1-2
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
1.3.3 Navigation Keys
Use these keys to move the cursor and to select objects on the display screen.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER
–Offline– Pattern:UNTITLED
:000
F1:OPEN
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
]
]
]
]
]
Cursor (flashing)
The Cursor is positioned on the name of the currently loaded pattern when the Main Screen is
displayed. It can be repositioned to select one of the fields in the pattern. See TAB, below.
When a function key (F1… F5) is pressed, the cursor moves to the selected item on the Main Menu.
The cursor remains on the Main Menu item to indicate which drop-down menu is displayed.
When an Editor Screen is displayed, the cursor indicates which parameter is currently selected.
The Pointer indicates which menu choice is currently selected. Use the ARROW UP and ARROW
DOWN keys to reposition the pointer.
TAB moves the cursor to the next field (displayed on the Main Screen) or to the next parameter
(displayed on an Editor Screen).
+
BACK TAB moves the cursor to the previous field (displayed on the Main Screen) or to the previous
parameter (displayed on an Editor Screen).
ARROW DOWN moves the cursor to the next field (displayed on the Main Screen) or to the next
parameter (displayed on an Editor Screen). It also moves the pointer to the next menu selection.
ARROW UP moves the cursor to the previous field (displayed on the Main Screen) or to the
previous parameter (displayed on an Editor Screen). It also moves the pointer to the previous menu
selection.
ARROW LEFT
When the cursor is positioned in box that can be edited, this key moves the cursor to the left,
allowing you to select where to edit, insert, or delete data.
When the cursor is on a parameter with selectable options, or when the pointer is on a menu line
containing selectable options, this key toggles the selection to the previous option.
ARROW RIGHT
When the cursor is positioned in box that can be edited, this key moves the cursor to the right,
allowing you to select where to edit, insert, or delete data.
When the cursor is on a parameter with selectable options, or when the pointer is on a menu line
containing selectable options, this key toggles the selection to the next option.
PAGE DOWN displays the next page of the current screen if more than one page exists.
PAGE UP displays the previous page of the current screen if more than one page exists.
ESCAPE cancels the current activity and returns to the Main Screen.
34700D.DOC
1-3
TMC470 Controller Operation
1.3.4 Function Keys
Function keys (F1 through F8) are used to display the various menus and to execute selections from those menus.
From the Main Menu
Use the function keys to display the desired menu.
File. Displays the File Menu to open pattern files for printing.
In Designer and Supervisor mode, this menu allows you to create new pattern files, edit pattern
properties, and manage the pattern file library.
Edit. This menu is not available in Operator mode. It provides commands to add, delete, and edit
objects in the pattern.
Machine. Displays the Machine Menu to perform specific marker tasks (Park, Print, etc.).
Marker. In Operator mode, this allows the user to display the software item number and version.
In Designer mode, this permits the user to enable or disable the marking pin.
In Supervisor mode, this allows the user to perform various maintenance tasks, including USB backup
and restore of pattern, font, and parameter files.
Setup. Displays the Setup Menu to change operational modes and to edit the Query Text buffers.
In Designer and Supervisor mode, this menu allows you to configure system parameters and perform
system tasks.
From Drop-Down Menus
When a drop-down menu is displayed, the function keys become context sensitive. That is, they perform different
tasks depending on the current menu displayed.
For example, in the screen shown here, the F1 key was pressed to display the File menu.
With the File menu displayed, pressing F1 (again) will execute the Open command to select and load a pattern file.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER
–Offline– Pattern:UNTITLED
:000
F1:OPEN
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
1-4
]
]
]
]
]
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
1.3.5 Marker Operation Keys
Use these keys to perform specific marker operations.
PRINT initiates a print cycle to mark the currently loaded pattern. Note that this key is
available only from the Main Screen and only if the machine is online and a pattern is loaded.
STOP PRINT stops the marker and places it offline. If a print cycle is in process, the marker
will immediately stop printing. If the marker is in motion, it will immediately stop traveling.
Note that this key is available regardless of the screen displayed on the controller.
JOG displays the Jog Screen to interactively position the machine using the system software.
Note that this key is available only from certain screens displayed on the controller.
34700D.DOC
1-5
TMC470 Controller Operation
1.3.6 Edit Keys
Use these keys to edit data in the boxes where input is permitted. Note that several of these keys perform additional
tasks when the system is placed in Designer or Supervisor mode.
INSERT toggles the keyboard between insert or overstrike mode when the cursor is positioned in boxes
that accepts data input.
Insert mode adds characters at the cursor location as you type.
Overstrike mode replaces existing characters as you type.
Key Point…
If the cursor is positioned on the first character in the box, all characters will be deleted from
the box when you begin typing new characters if the box is already full or if the keyboard is in
overstrike mode.
DELETE erases the character at the cursor location when the cursor is positioned in boxes that accepts
data input. In Designer or Supervisor Mode, this key may be used to remove a field from the selected
pattern location.
BACKSPACE deletes the first character to the left of the cursor location.
If the keyboard is in insert mode, characters to the right of the cursor will move to the left as the
cursor moves.
If the keyboard is in overstrike mode, characters to the right of the cursor will remain in place and
deleted characters will be replaced with spaces.
+
SCROLL RIGHT scrolls the content of the box one box-width to the right.
+
SCROLL LEFT scrolls the content of the box one box-width to the left.
CAPS LOCK toggles and locks the keyboard in uppercase or lowercase mode for alphabetic characters.
Note: The system sounds a short beep when placed in lowercase mode and a long beep when placed
in uppercase mode.
SHIFT, while depressed, places the keyboard in uppercase mode for alphabetic characters. Also allows
data entry of upper characters on keys that display more than one symbol.
ENTER, in Operator Mode, opens the User Text Editor Screen when a variable text tool is selected.
In Designer or Supervisor Mode, ENTER is used to choose or input parameter values. If the cursor is
positioned on a parameter in enclosed in braces < >, pressing ENTER will toggle through the available
choices. If the cursor is positioned on a parameter that is enclosed in brackets [ ], pressing ENTER
will input the user-supplied parameter value and move the cursor to the next parameter.
1-6
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
1.3.7 Special Keys
Use these keys to enter special characters into text strings.
Diacritics
Special keystrokes allow you to add diacritics (phonetic symbols) above characters commonly used in foreign
languages. Please note that these symbols are not available for all alphabetic characters.
CIRCUMFLEX adds a circumflex ( ˆ ) above the next character you type.
(available characters: â, ê, î, ô, û)
A-RING adds an a-ring ( ° ) above the next character you type.
(available characters: Å)
+
GRAVE ACCENT adds a grave accent ( ` ) above the next character you type.
(available characters: à, è, ì, ò, ù)
ACUTE ACCENT adds an acute accent ( ´ ) above the next character you type.
(available characters: á, É, é, í, ó, ú)
+
UMLAUT adds an umlaut ( ¨ ) above the next character you type.
(available characters: Ä, ä, ë, ï, Ö, ö, Ü, ü)
TILDE adds a tilde ( ˜ ) above the next character you type.
(available characters: Ã, ã, Õ, õ, Ñ, ñ)
+
Control Characters
Special keystrokes allow you to include certain control characters in the text strings. These characters are often
encoded into data matrix symbols.
or
or
+G
adds a GS control character to the text string, represented in text as a bold G .
or
or
+R
adds a RS control character to the text string, represented in text as a bold R .
or
or
+T
adds an EOT control character to the text string, represented in text as a bold E .
34700D.DOC
1-7
TMC470 Controller Operation
1.4 OPEN A PATTERN FILE
The system software allows Designer and Supervisor mode users to save instructions that tell the marking system what
to print, how to print, and where to print. These instructions are called patterns. Patterns are made up of one or more
tools – also called fields. Each field defines a single object in the pattern. Fields define objects that are to be printed or
define commands the marker will execute while processing the pattern.
Pattern files are stored in memory in the controller. The actual number that can be stored is dependent on the content
and complexity of the patterns themselves. Once stored, the patterns can quickly and easily be recalled (opened) and
printed.
You must open (or load) an existing pattern before you can print.
From the Main Screen, press F1 (FILE).
The system will display the File menu.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER –Offline– Pattern:UNTITLED
:000
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
From the File menu, press F1 (OPEN).
The system will display the Open Pattern Screen.
]
]
]
]
]
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER
–Offline– Pattern:UNTITLED
:000
F1:OPEN
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
Do one of the following:
•
OPEN PATTERN
Pattern: [
In the Pattern text box, type the name of the
pattern file you wish to open (e.g., SAMPLE_02)
then press ENTER.
From the list provided, find the name of the pattern
you wish to open, then press the function key that
corresponds with the desired pattern. In this
example, press F2 to open pattern SAMPLE_02.
Note: If the pattern name you wish to open is
not shown, press PAGE DOWN to display
more pattern names.
The system will return to the Main Screen with the
selected pattern loaded (e.g., SAMPLE_02).
This pattern has two text fields (noted in the upper right
corner) and shown in the list of fields as *001 and 002.
The asterisk (*) indicates text field 001 permits usersupplied text. You may edit this field to provide data for
printing.
1-8
Total:006 Page: 01 of
02
]
F1–SAMPLE_01
F2–SAMPLE_02
F3–SAMPLE_03
F4–SAMPLE_04
F5–SAMPLE_05
or
•
]
]
]
]
]
34700D.DOC
OPEN PATTERN
Pattern: [
Total:006 Page: 01 of
02
]
F1–SAMPLE_01
F2–SAMPLE_02
F3–SAMPLE_03
F4–SAMPLE_04
F5–SAMPLE_05
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
003:[
004:[
005:[
]
]
]
]
]
TMC470 Controller Operation
1.5 PLACE MACHINE ONLINE
The machine may be placed online or offline.
Online, the machine is operationally enabled. The machine must be online to print patterns, to simulate printing,
and to interactively position the equipment using the marking system software.
Offline, the machine is operationally disabled. All print, park, and position commands will be ignored. While offline,
Operator-level users may still open patterns, supply user-text, and edit Query Text buffers. Designer and
Supervisor mode users may still create and edit patterns, change parameters, and change system settings.
When the machine is placed online, the marking system equipment will automatically move to its Home position. This
allows the allows the marker to reset and re-establish its position relative to the marking window and any optional
auxiliary axes.
WARNING
Stay clear of the marking system when placing the machine online to avoid
contact with the moving equipment.
The current machine status (Offline or Online) is
displayed on the second line of the Main Screen.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
003:[
004:[
005:[
]
]
]
]
]
To change the machine status:
From the Main Screen, press F3 (MACHINE).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
The system will display the Machine menu.
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
003:[
004:[
005:[
Press F7 to toggle the ON/OFF selection to the
desired status (Online or Offline).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
F1:ON/OFF F7:<ONLINE
>
F2:PARK
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
F3:PREPOSITION
002:[TEXT: Fixed FText:
ABCDE
4:GO
003:[
F5:DRYRUN
004:[
005:[
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
When the desired status is displayed, press F1.
The system will set the machine to the selected
status and return to the Main Screen.
If the machine was placed online, the system will move
each available axis to its Home position in this order:
Z (vertical), then Theta (rotational), then X/Y (lateral).
34700D.DOC
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
F1:ON/OFF F7:<ONLINE
>
F2:PARK
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
F3:PREPOSITION
002:[TEXT: Fixed FText:
ABCDE
4:GO
003:[
F5:DRYRUN
004:[
005:[
]
]
]
]
]
1-9
TMC470 Controller Operation
1.6 PARK THE MACHINE
The Park position is where the machine moves when the system finishes printing a pattern or when a Park command is
issued by the operator. It is often defined to move the marking pin out of the way so that you can easily remove and
secure the parts being marked. The Park position is pattern-specific and may be redefined by the pattern designer.
Therefore, the Park position could be a different location for each pattern you open.
WARNING
When the Park command is issued, the marking system equipment will
automatically move to its Park position. Stay clear of the marking system
when parking the machine to avoid contact with the moving equipment.
To park the machine:
Ensure the machine is online. (see procedure)
From the Main Screen, press F3 (MACHINE).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
The system will display the Machine menu.
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
003:[
004:[
005:[
]
]
]
]
]
Press F2 (PARK).
The system will park the machine and return to the
Main Screen.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
F1:ON/OFF F7:<ONLINE
>
F2:PARK
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
F3:PREPOSITION
002:[TEXT: Fixed FText:
ABCDE
4:GO
003:[
F5:DRYRUN
004:[
005:[
]
]
]
]
]
Note: If an optional, auxiliary axis is installed and enabled, it will also move to its Park position. The system follows a
specific sequence when it parks a machine using an auxiliary axis.
Upward Movement. When the Park command requires upward movement, the system moves each axis to its
respective Park position in the following sequence: Z (vertical), Theta (rotational), then X/Y (lateral).
Downward Movement. When the Park command requires downward movement, the system moves each axis
to its respective Park position in the following sequence: X/Y (lateral), Theta (rotational), then Z (vertical).
1-10
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
1.7 PRE-POSITION THE MACHINE
The Pre-position command moves the pin cartridge to the location of the first printable object in the pattern. This
feature is typically used to position the marking head for part alignment before printing. The Pre-position coordinates
may be located anywhere in the marking window since the first printable object may be different for each pattern.
WARNING
When the Pre-Position command is issued, the marking system equipment
will automatically move to the anchor location of the first field in the
pattern. Stay clear of the marking system when parking the machine to
avoid contact with the moving equipment.
To pre-position the machine:
Ensure the machine is online. (see procedure)
From the Main Screen, press F3 (MACHINE).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
The system will display the Machine menu.
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
003:[
004:[
005:[
Press F3 (PREPOSITION).
The system will position the machine to mark the
first field of the pattern and return to the Main
Screen.
34700D.DOC
]
]
]
]
]
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
F1:ON/OFF F7:<ONLINE
>
F2:PARK
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
F3:PREPOSITION
002:[TEXT: Fixed FText:
ABCDE
4:GO
003:[
F5:DRYRUN
004:[
005:[
]
]
]
]
]
1-11
TMC470 Controller Operation
1.8 ENTER DATA INTO PATTERNS
The pattern designer may define text-based fields that allow you to enter data into the pattern while the system is in
Operator mode. The two types of data that can be entered are User Text and Query Text.
User Text
User text is data that you enter directly into the text string. The user text is used for that field only.
Fields that can accept user text are identified on the Main Screen with an asterisk (*).
Query Text
Query text is data that you enter into the Query Text lookup table. The system uses the table to
insert data into the appropriate text string(s) in the pattern as defined by the pattern designer. This
feature allows you to supply data to multiple text-based fields from a single location.
Note: Fields that accept Query Text are not identified on the Main Screen.
Each method for entering data into the pattern is explained in the following paragraphs.
1.8.1 Enter User Text
To enter user text into a field of the pattern:
Ensure the pattern is open. (see procedure)
From the Main Screen, press the DOWN ARROW key.
The cursor will move to the first field in the list.
Notice the first field is identified with an asterisk
(*001). This field accepts user text input.
Note: If the field you wish to edit is somewhere
else in the list, press the DOWN or UP
ARROW key until the field is selected. If
the field you wish to edit is not shown on
the screen, press PAGE DOWN or PAGE UP
to display more fields in the pattern (if
available).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
003:[
004:[
005:[
]
]
]
]
]
With the field selected, press ENTER.
The system will open the User Text Editor Screen.
Type the data in the box [
] (e.g., 12345)
The pattern designer defines the maximum
number of characters you may enter. Optionally, a
label may be defined beside the box (e.g., PART
NUMBER) to help identify what type of data to
enter.
After entering the data, press F1 (ACCEPT).
User Text Editor For Field #001
PART NUMBER
[12345 ]
F1 ACCEPT
The system will return to the Main Screen.
The data you entered will be displayed in the text
string.
Note: The pattern designer may define the field to
either retain or clear the user text after each
print cycle.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
If defined to clear after print, the system will
prompt you to re-enter data before it allows the
next print cycle to begin.
If defined to retain data, the pattern will keep
the text you enter and continue to mark it on
subsequent print cycles (provided the controller
is not powered down between printings).
1-12
34700D.DOC
*001:[TEXT: User Text: 12345
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
003:[
004:[
005:[
]
]
]
]
]
TMC470 Controller Operation
1.8.2 Enter Query Text
Query text is data you enter into the Query Text lookup table. The system uses the table to insert data into the
appropriate text string(s) in the pattern as defined by the pattern designer. This feature allows you to supply data to
multiple text-based fields from a single location.
To enter query text into the Query Text lookup table:
Note: A pattern does not have to be open to edit the Query Text lookup table. In our example, we’ve opened a
pattern named SAMPLE_03 just to show how data in the lookup table is mapped to fields in the pattern.
From the Main Screen, press F5 (SETUP)
The system will display the Setup Menu.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_03
:004
001:[TEXT:
002:[TEXT:
003:[TEXT:
004:[TEXT:
005:[
From the Setup Menu, press F2 (QUERY TEXT)
The Query Text lookup table has 20 buffers. There
are five buffers listed on each page. The first page
defines the contents of buffers 1 through 5. The
"| |" indicator on the top line shows which buffers
are currently displayed. Press PAGE DOWN or
PAGE UP to display the other buffers.
Buffer titles (e.g., 1,2,3,4,5 on the left side) can
be edited only by Designer or Supervisor mode
users. Titles help identify what type of data to
enter into each buffer.
Buffer text (on the right side) is where Operator
mode users may enter data into the query text
buffers.
Type data into the first available slot (e.g., ONE).
Press the DOWN ARROW key.
Text
Text
Text
Text
Slot
Slot
Slot
Slot
#
#
#
#
1:
2:
1:
3:
]
]
]
]
]
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER –Online F
–1:LEVEL
Pattern:SAMPLE_03
:004
F6:<DESIGNER>
The system will display the Query Text lookup
table.
Query
Query
Query
Query
001:[TEXT:
002:[TEXT:
003:[TEXT:
004:[TEXT:
005:[
QUERY TEXT:
1
2
3
4
5
F1 SAVE
F2:QUERY
Query Text
Query Text
Query Text
Query Text
1-5
TEXT
Slot
Slot
Slot
Slot
6-10
#
#
#
#
1:
2:
1:
3:
11-15
]
]
]
]
]
16-20
:[
:[
:[
:[
:[
]
]
]
]
]
The cursor will move to the next buffer.
Type data into the second slot (e.g., TWO).
Press the DOWN ARROW key.
Type data into the third slot (e.g., THREE).
After entering the data, press F1 (SAVE).
QUERY TEXT:
1
2
3
4
5
F1 SAVE
1-5
6-10
11-15
16-20
:[ONE
:[TWO
:[THREE
:[
:[
]
]
]
]
]
Note: Pressing ESC will abandon any changes
you’ve made.
The system will return to the Main Screen and
display the data you entered in the appropriate
text string(s).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_03
:004
Notice in this example the data from "Slot #1" has been
inserted twice – once in field 001 and again in field 003.
Fields 001 and 003 were both defined to pull data from
the first slot in the Query Text lookup table; field 002
from the second slot; field 004 from the third slot.
34700D.DOC
001:[TEXT:
002:[TEXT:
003:[TEXT:
004:[TEXT:
005:[
Query
Query
Query
Query
Text
Text
Text
Text
Slot
Slot
Slot
Slot
#
#
#
#
1:
2:
1:
3:
ONE
TWO
ONE
THREE
]
]
]
]
]
1-13
TMC470 Controller Operation
1.9 SIMULATE PRINTING (DRYRUN)
You can simulate printing the current pattern without actually firing the marking pin. A dry run allows you to run the
machine through the mechanical motions required to print the objects in the pattern without actually marking. This
feature also allows you to ensure the item to be marked is properly positioned and oriented for the pattern that is
currently opened.
To perform a dry run:
Ensure the pattern is open. (see procedure)
Ensure the machine is online. (see procedure)
Do one of the following:
•
Hold down the SHIFT key and press the PRINT key
•
From the Main Screen, press F3 (MACHINE), then press F5 (DRYRUN)
or
1.10 PRINT PATTERNS
To print a pattern:
Ensure the pattern is open. (see procedure)
Ensure the machine is online. (see procedure)
Ensure the part, pattern, and marker are ready for printing:
Refer to the marker-specific Operation Supplement for details on hardware setup and other marking
considerations.
(optional) Park the machine.
(optional) Pre-position the machine.
Position and secure the object to be marked.
(optional) Perform a dry run.
Enter User Text or edit Query Text, if applicable. (see procedure)
Do one of the following:
•
Press the PRINT key
•
From the Main Screen, press F3 (MACHINE), then press F4 (GO)
or
1.11 STOP THE PRINT CYCLE
Stopping a print cycle aborts the printing operation and places the marker offline. If you stop printing a pattern that
contains serial numbers, you may have to contact the Designer or Supervisor to reset the serial number values before
you resume normal printing operations.
Press the STOP key
.
The system will display a prompt for you to acknowledge that printing has been aborted.
1-14
Press F1 (ACKNOWLEDGE) to clear the message from the screen.
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
1.12 JOG THE MACHINE
The Jog command is used to interactively reposition the machine axes using the marking system software. The Jog
features allow you to move the marking system equipment anywhere within its travel limits.
WARNING
Stay clear of the marking system when jogging the machine to avoid
contact with the moving equipment.
Ensure the machine is online. (see procedure)
Press the JOG key
.
The system will display the Jog Screen, similar to the one shown here.
Select the X/Y (lateral) Axes
The first page automatically displays the Jog X/Y Screen.
This screen allows you to reposition the X/Y (lateral) axes.
If optional, auxiliary axes are installed and enabled, they
will be listed on the first line of the Jog Screen. The "| |"
indicator on the top line shows which axis parameters are
currently displayed. Procedures for jogging the optional
auxiliary axes are provided later in this section.
JOG:
X/Y
Z
THETA
Resolution: <COARSE > Drop Pin:
X: [ 6.0000]in
Y: [ 6.0000]in
F1 ACCEPT
F2 GOTO
Select the Size of Movement
Verify the cursor is on the Resolution parameter. If
not, press TAB to select it.
The Resolution parameter allows you to choose the
size of each Jog movement.
JOG:
X/Y
Z
THETA
Resolution: <COARSE > Drop Pin:
X: [ 6.0000]in
Y: [ 6.0000]in
Press ENTER to toggle through the available
Resolution selections: Single, Fine, or Coarse.
F1 ACCEPT
Jog the X/Y Axes
F2 GOTO
Values displayed in the X and Y boxes show the current
marker position in the marking window. As the machine
moves, the system will update coordinates.
Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key to move the machine left or right along the X-axis.
Press the UP or DOWN ARROW key to move the machine back and forth along the Y-axis.
Move to a Specific X/Y Location
Press TAB to select the X-axis box.
Press TAB to select the Y-axis box.
Press F2 (GOTO) to move the marker to the specified
X/Y coordinate location.
JOG:
Enter the X-axis coordinate where you wish to move
the marker.
This feature allows you to drop (extend) the impact pin to
verify its exact location over the marking surface.
Press TAB to select the Drop Pin check box.
Z
THETA
Resolution: <COARSE > Drop Pin:
X: [ 6.0000]in
Y: [ 6.0000]in
Enter the Y-axis coordinate where you wish to move
the marker.
(TMP6100 only) Drop the Impact Pin
X/Y
F1 ACCEPT
JOG:
X/Y
Z
F2 GOTO
THETA
Resolution: <COARSE > Drop Pin:
X: [ 6.0000]in
Y: [ 6.0000]in
Press ENTER to extend the pin (⌧).
Press ENTER again to retract the pin ( ).
F1 ACCEPT
34700D.DOC
F2 GOTO
1-15
TMC470 Controller Operation
JOG THE MACHINE (continued)
Select the Z (vertical) Axis
If installed and enabled, the optional Z-axis allows you to move the marking head up and down the Z-axis tool post.
Press PAGE DOWN until the Jog Z Screen is displayed.
Select the Size of Movement
JOG:
Verify the cursor is on the Resolution parameter. If
not, press TAB to select it.
The Resolution parameter allows you to choose the
size of each Jog movement.
X/Y
Z
THETA
Resolution: <COARSE >
Z: [ 0.0000]in
Press ENTER to toggle through the available
Resolution selections: Single, Fine, or Coarse.
F1 ACCEPT
F2 GOTO
Jog the Z-axis
Values displayed in the Z-axis box shows the current marker
position on the Z-axis. As the machine moves, the system
will update the axis coordinate.
Press the UP or DOWN ARROW key to move the marker
up or down the Z-axis tool post.
Move to a Specific Z-axis Location
JOG:
Press TAB to select the Z-axis box.
Enter the Z-axis coordinate where you wish to move
the marker.
Press F2 (GOTO) to move the marker to the specified
Z-axis location.
1-16
34700D.DOC
X/Y
Z
THETA
Resolution: <COARSE >
Z: [ 0.0000]in
F1 ACCEPT
F2 GOTO
TMC470 Controller Operation
JOG THE MACHINE (continued)
Select the Theta (rotational) Axis
If installed and enabled, the optional Theta-axis allows you to rotate the rotary drive unit.
Press PAGE DOWN until the Jog Theta screen is displayed.
Select the Size of Movement
JOG:
Verify the cursor is on the Resolution parameter. If
not, press TAB to select it.
The Resolution parameter allows you to define the
size of each Jog movement.
X/Y
Z
THETA
Resolution: <COARSE >
Theta: [ 0.0000]degrees
F1 ACCEPT
Press ENTER to toggle through the available
selections: Single (0.1°), Fine (1°), or Coarse (10°).
F2 GOTO
Jog the Theta-axis
Values displayed in the Theta-axis box shows the current
marker position on the rotational axis. As the machine
moves, the system will update the axis coordinate.
Press the RIGHT or LEFT ARROW key to rotate the
drive unit clockwise or counterclockwise as viewed
from behind the fixture.
Move to a Specific Theta-axis Location
Press TAB to select the Theta-axis box.
Enter the Theta-axis coordinate where you wish to
move the rotary device.
Press F2 (GOTO) to rotate the fixture to the
specified Theta-axis location.
JOG:
X/Y
Z
THETA
Resolution: <COARSE >
Theta: [ 0.0000]degrees
F1 ACCEPT
F2 GOTO
Close the Jog Screen
Press F1 (or ESC) to close the Jog Screen
34700D.DOC
1-17
TMC470 Controller Operation
1.13 DISPLAY SYSTEM INFORMATION
In case you need to contact Telesis Customer Support with questions, you’ll need to report the version number and
item number of your system software.
From the Main Screen, press F4 (MARKER).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER –Offline– Pattern:UNTITLED
:000
The system will display the Marker menu.
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
From the Marker menu, press F1 (ABOUT).
]
]
]
]
]
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER –Offline– Pattern:UNTITLED
:000
F1:ABOUT
The system will display a screen similar to the
following.
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
Record the information displayed on the second and
third lines of the display.
Press ESC return to the Main Screen.
]
]
]
]
]
TELESIS TECHNOLOGIES INC.
xxxxxxx/470 – xxxxxx
Version x.xx
Copyright (c) 2008 All Rights Reserved
1.14 DISPLAY PRINT CYCLE TIME
To display the amount of time it took the system to complete the last print cycle:
From the Main Screen, press CTRL + T.
The system will display the time on the third line
of the screen (below the pattern name).
The value represents the time interval between
the Start Print command and completion of the
mark. It does not account for time required to
park, move home, etc.
The time is shown in seconds, accurate to 0.001
second. The time display will automatically clear
when the next print cycle is started.
1-18
To clear the time display from the screen manually,
press CTRL + T.
34700D.DOC
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
:035.818 secs
*001:[TEXT: User Text: 12345
]
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
003:[
]
004:[
]
005:[
]
TMC470 Controller Operation
1.15 USING THE MERLIN III INTERFACE
The TMC470 Controller may be used in a stand-alone manner or it may be connected to a computer running Telesis
Merlin III Visual Design Software.
The Merlin III software is a 32-bit, Windows based, WYSIWYG application that provides a graphical user interface to
make pattern design quick and easy. Using Merlin III, you can design and compile pattern files and block files that may
be downloaded to the TMC470 Controller.
®
•
While connected to the computer, the Merlin III software and its user interface provide complete operational
control of the marking system.
•
When disconnected, operational control returns to the TMC470 Controller keyboard. Any pattern files or block
files that you downloaded from Merlin III may be used by the controller in its stand-alone configuration.
NOTICE
While the Merlin III software is controlling the system, the TMC470 keyboard is disabled.
Only the PRINT key and the STOP (abort) key remain functional on the controller keyboard.
The TMC470 Controller I/O Port remains functional for remote input/output signals.
1.15.1 Summary of Features
Below is a summary of operational features that are available when Merlin III is, and is not, connected to the TMC470.
When the computer is connected and Merlin III is running:
•
Full marking system operation is controlled from the Merlin III interface on the computer.
See Initiating Merlin Control (below) for details.
•
The TMC470 Controller I/O Port remains functional for remote input/output signals.
•
The PRINT key on the TMC470 Controller remains functional.
•
The STOP (abort) key on the TMC470 Controller remains functional.
•
All other keys on the TMC470 Controller are disabled.
•
Merlin pattern files stored on the computer may be loaded, modified (with permission), and printed.
•
Merlin pattern files and block files may be downloaded from the computer to the TMC470 Controller.
See Downloading Patterns from Merlin (Chapter 2) for details.
•
Pattern-related system parameters may be downloaded from the Merlin III software to the TMC470 Controller.
See Downloading System Parameters from Merlin (Chapter 3) for details.
•
Custom (User) fonts may be downloaded from the computer to the TMC470 Controller.
See Font Selection (Chapter 2) for details.
When the computer is not connected or when Merlin III is not running:
•
Full marking system operation is controlled from the TMC470 Controller keyboard.
See Resuming TMC470 Control (below) for details.
•
All key functions on the TMC470 Controller are enabled.
•
All pattern files stored in controller memory (including any that were downloaded from Merlin III) can be
loaded, modified (with permission), and printed.
•
Any block files that were downloaded from Merlin III may be used in the TMC470 patterns.
See Defining Objects in Patterns: Block Objects (Chapter 2) for details.
•
Any custom (User) Font files that were downloaded from the computer may be used in the TMC470 patterns.
See Font Selection (Chapter 2) for details.
34700D.DOC
1-19
TMC470 Controller Operation
1.15.2 Initiating Merlin Control
To control marking operations from the Merlin III interface:
Ensure the TMC470 is OFF and the Merlin III software is not running.
Turn the TMC470 Controller ON.
Turn the computer ON.
Ensure the computer is properly connected and all communication parameters are properly configured.
Refer to Ethernet/Merlin Communication Properties (Chapter 3) for details.
Ensure the Main Screen is displayed.
(The system may be in Operator, Designer, or Supervisor mode).
Start the Merlin III software.
The system displays M3 to indicate that Merlin III
has operational control. Although the Main Screen
looks the same, only the Offline/Online display
remains functional.
Refer to the Merlin III Operating Instructions for
details on using the Merlin III software.
You can view the on-screen operating instructions
via the software Help menu under Help Topics.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
M3
–Online – Pattern:UNTITLED
:000
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
]
]
]
]
]
1.15.3 Resuming TMC470 Control
To disconnect the controller from the Merlin III software
and resume control from the TMC470 keyboard:
Exit the Merlin III software.
The TMC470 Controller will regain control of the
marking system. The system will be automatically
placed offline and in Operator Mode.
Optionally, you may turn the computer off and
disconnect the Ethernet cabling.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
Oper –Offline– Pattern:UNTITLED
:000
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
]
]
]
]
]
1.15.4 Recovering from Unintentional Disconnection
If the TMC470 becomes unintentionally disconnected from the Merlin III software, follow these steps to reconnect.
Using the Merlin III software, save any pattern changes that may have been in progress.
Exit the Merlin III software.
Cycle the TMC470 power switch OFF, then ON.
Allow the TMC470 to complete its startup. Wait until the Main Screen displayed.
Start the Merlin III software. Connection should re-establish automatically.
1.16 SOFTWARE EXIT / POWER OFF
The marking system may remain on from shift-to-shift so that unnecessary startup and shutdown is avoided. If you
choose to shut down the marking system:
Locate the power switch on the back panel of the controller (next to the power cable).
Position the switch to OFF (O).
The marking system software will terminate immediately and electrical power will be removed from the controller
and from all equipment connected to the controller.
Refer to the marker-specific Operation Supplement for additional shutdown procedures that may be required.
1-20
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
Chapter 2
Pattern Design & Management
2.1 OVERVIEW
Patterns are a series of instructions that tell the marking system what to print, where to print, and how to print. These
instructions are saved as pattern files in controller memory. The controller can store up to 200 patterns, depending on
the size of the individual patterns. They can be quickly and easily opened, edited, copied, renamed, printed, or deleted.
Patterns are made up of one or more tools – also called fields. Each field defines a single object in the pattern. Fields
can define printable objects, non-printable (template) objects, or commands that the marker will process when the
pattern is printed. Pattern parameters, options, and field definitions are stored in each pattern file. Changing patternspecific parameters and editing fields within the pattern will affect only the pattern being created or edited. It will not
affect other patterns stored in the controller.
This chapter provides instructions and guidelines for creating, editing, and maintaining a library of printable patterns.
This section discusses each of the following topics in detail.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Design considerations
Accessing Designer Mode
Creating a pattern
Saving a pattern
Adding objects to a pattern
Testing a pattern
Editing a pattern
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Defining the park position
Defining default text parameters
Defining default pin parameters
Adding pattern instructions
Setting axis speeds
Viewing controller library files
Deleting controller library files
Defining pattern serial numbers
2.2 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
Although you may be anxious to jump right in and start creating patterns, there are a few design considerations you
should become familiar with before you begin. Understanding the concepts discussed in this section will be extremely
beneficial when you design and edit your patterns. If nothing else, study the Placement of Objects (described below).
You’ll find that grasping these concepts will make pattern design and management much less intimidating, much easier,
and much more flexible than you might think.
The marking system software provides a multitude of parameters for creating patterns. Accordingly, there is no one,
single approach to designing every pattern. Designing patterns is a subjective process. The possibilities and design
variations are endless. We encourage you to experiment with your pattern designs before actually putting them to use.
Once you’ve found the best combination of settings, you can save the pattern and depend on it to produce reliable and
consistent results.
Please take a few minutes and study the following design considerations:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Marking Window Size
Placement of Objects
Character Dimensions
Font Selection
Printing Order
Print Modes
Pin Return Rate (Pin Recovery Time)
Codes and Real-time Data
34700D.DOC
2-1
TMC470 Controller Operation
2.2.1 Marking Window Size
The size of the marking window a major consideration in pattern design. The marking window is defined by the travel
limitations of the marking pin – left and right along the X-axis, forward and back along the Y-axis. Any field that is to be
printed must lie, in its entirety, within the physical boundaries of the window. If not, the system will issue an error
message when you attempt to print it. The size of the marking window is dependent on the marking head model your
system employs. Refer to the marker-specific Operation Supplement for details on marking window sizes.
2.2.2 Placement of Objects
Defining exactly where you want to mark something is one of the most important tasks of pattern design. There are
two main components that determine an object’s location: its anchor point and its coordinates. Once these concepts are
understood, the Design Jog feature makes defining the precise location very easy.
Coordinates. Let’s start with coordinates. Each point in the
marking window is identified by a unique X/Y coordinate. The
marking window origin (0,0), is located at the front, left
corner of the window. All other coordinates are relative to
that point, increasing in value to the right along the X-axis
and toward the back of the window along the Y-axis. Note if
the optional Theta-axis is employed, there may also be a
rotational (Theta-axis) coordinate.
Anchor Point. The anchor point is an imaginary reference
point on the object itself. Some objects always use the same
reference point as their anchor (e.g., circles always use their
center point, rectangles always use their lower, left corner,
etc.). However, text-based fields have nine (9) possible
reference points. The four obvious reference points are the
four corners (left/top, right/top, left/bottom, and
right/bottom). Five other not-so-obvious reference points are
the center/top, center/bottom, left/middle, right/middle, and
center/middle. The Justification parameter selections allow
you to define which reference point will be used as the anchor
point.
Why is the anchor point so important? Because the system orients the object in the window by placing the anchor point
at the specified coordinates. Changing the coordinate parameters or changing the justification parameters will result in
repositioning the object in the marking window. Note also that if you rotate the object, the system will pivot the object
around its anchor point.
Key Point…
The resulting anchor point must allow the entire object to reside within the marking window boundaries. It’s
possible to choose an anchor point and justification that attempts to print some of the character string outside
the marking window. This will result in an error message from the system when you attempt to print. You will
need to consider the anchor coordinates, the justification options, and the character dimensions when defining
patterns. Slight adjustments to any one of these three factors be may sufficient to reposition the field within
the window.
2-2
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
Design Jog. The design jog feature allows you to interactively position the marker to identify a specific location within
the marking window. Whenever the system displays a screen for you to define a location, you can use the design jog
feature to "show" the software where it is. Instead of trying to measure or calculate the exact axis coordinates of the
location, you can move the impact pin precisely over the desired point and capture its coordinates.
For example, let’s say you want to mark text on a metal plate. Further, let’s say you want to mark a particular corner of
the text (e.g., left/bottom) at a specific location on the plate.
Key Point…
The machine must be online to jog the marker. Ensure it is online before adding or editing the field.
You’ve already identified three key elements:
the type of object you wish to create (TEXT)
TEXT
the text you want to print (e.g., ABC)
Text: [ABC
X: [ 0.1000]in
Y: [ 6.0000]in
θ: [ 0.0000 ]°
the desired anchor point you wish to use for the
text string (LEFT/BOTTOM).
1:
TEXT
Now, you just need to tell the system where to place the
corner (the anchor point) of the text.
Move the cursor to the X (or Y) parameter.
FONT
TOOL
USER
]
X Just: < Left >
Y Just: <Bottom>
Angle: [ 0.000]°
F1 ACCEPT
TEXT
1:
TEXT
FONT
Text: [ABC
X: [ 0.1000]in
Y: [ 6.0000]in
θ: [ 0.0000 ]°
TOOL
USER
]
X Just: < Left >
Y Just: <Bottom>
Angle: [ 0.000]°
F1 ACCEPT
On the keyboard, press the JOG key
.
The system will display the Jog Screen.
JOG:
X/Y
The top line shows all enabled axes. The "| |"
indicator shows which axis coordinates are
currently displayed. Press PAGE DOWN or PAGE UP
to display other axis coordinates, if applicable.
Resolution: <COARSE >> Drop Pin:
X: [ 1.0000]in
Y: [ 0.2500]in
Arm: Alpha
Use the LEFT, RIGHT, UP, and DOWN ARROW keys to
move the marker. Position the impact pin over the
point you want to identify as the anchor point.
Z
THETA
Beta
F7 CW
F8 CCW
F1 ACCEPT
F2 GOTO
Notice as the marker moves, the axis coordinates are updated on the display.
(TMP6100 only) Optionally, press TAB to select the Drop Pin check box.
Press ENTER to extend the pin and verify its location over the marking surface. Press ENTER (again) to retract the pin.
Note: The Alpha and Beta Arm parameters are used for testing machine movement. Refer to Chapter 3.
When the marker is positioned at the desired anchor
point, press F1 (ACCEPT).
The system will return to the Editor Screen and
insert the coordinates of the current marker
location into the appropriate axis coordinates for
the object.
That’s it! No measuring, no calculations!
Just tell the system what to mark, how to anchor
it, and show it where… and the object is precisely
defined in the marking window.
TEXT
1:
TEXT
Text: [ABC
X: [ 1.0000]in
Y: [ 0.2500]in
θ: [ 0.0000 ]°
FONT
TOOL
USER
]
X Just: < Left >
Y Just: <Bottom>
Angle: [ 0.000]°
F1 ACCEPT
Key Point…
The resulting location must allow the entire object to reside within the marking window boundaries.
34700D.DOC
2-3
TMC470 Controller Operation
2.2.3 Character Dimensions
Three parameters that control the size and shape of your printed text are height, width, and pitch.
Height. Height is measured from the center of the mark at the
top of the character to the center of the mark at the bottom of the
character.
Width. Width is measured from the center of the mark at the left
side of the character to the center of the mark at the right side of
the character. Unless there is a specific width requirement for
your text, the width should be 2/3 (66%) of the character height.
Pitch. Pitch defines the distance from the start of one character
to the start of the next character. It includes the width of the
character and the space between characters. Unless there is a
specific character spacing requirement for your text, the pitch
should equal the character height.
2.2.4 Font Selection
The system provides several font selections for printing text strings. The character font determines the printed
appearance of the text. Each font selection provides a specific set of characters. The font determines the shape and
composition of each character. Standard Telesis fonts are illustrated in Appendix A of this manual.
Custom (User) fonts may be designed using the Telesis Logo/Font Generator Utility software. Once created, the user
font file may be downloaded to the controller and used in your patterns. To apply a custom a font to a text field, choose
USER from the list of available fonts. Note that only one custom font may be stored in the controller at a time. Note
also that when the TMC470 Controller is connected to a PC running the Merlin III software, the User font is
automatically downloaded to the controller as soon as Merlin applies the font to one of its text fields.
Some factors you may want to consider when selecting a font are the size of the characters to be printed and any
special requirements you may have for printing speed or for character recognition.
Size. The desired size of your marked characters should be a consideration when selecting a font. Very small
characters may have a better appearance with a font containing fewer pixels (e.g., 5x7). Very large characters will
benefit from fonts with higher pixel densities (e.g., 11x16). Characters with a higher pixel density also allow for
more delicate shapes.
Speed. Your required marking speed is also a consideration when selecting a font. Certain fonts may require a
longer marking time. Character size also affects the marking speed. Smaller characters may be printed faster; larger
characters, characters with higher pixel densities, and characters with more serifs may require longer printing times.
Specific marking times can be verified by a Telesis representative. You may wish to mark samples with different
fonts before deciding on the font for your particular needs.
Character Recognition. The OCR font is specially designed to be used with the Telesis PS-OCR® optical character
reader. In order for the characters to be reliably read by the Reader, a special relationship should exist between the
character height, width, and pitch.
Follow these guidelines for setting the OCR text dimensions:
1.
Decide the height of the characters you want to print.
The height parameter will be used as the basis for
establishing the width and pitch parameters.
2.
Set the width equal to ½ the height.
3.
Set the pitch equal to the height.
These parameter settings will provide a square character block
(height x pitch) with the actual character occupying the first half of
the character block. This relationship will provide a character
height/width ratio that permits the reader to recognize the
characters, and enough space between characters to provide reliable
readings.
For example, if your characters need to be 0.20 in. (0.5 mm) high:
2-4
set the width to 0.10 in. (0.25 mm)
set the pitch to 0.20 in. (0.5 mm)
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
2.2.5 Printing Order
The marker prints the fields of a pattern in the order
they are listed in the pattern definition. This order is
also displayed on the Main Screen. The marker will print
(or process) the first field in its entirety before moving to
and processing any subsequent fields. Normally, this is
not an issue when you create a pattern. However, it
may be beneficial to process fields in a particular
sequence to improve print cycle efficiency. Or, it may be
necessary to ensure certain fields are processed before
others. If the sequence is important, you can edit the
pattern and rearrange the field order. See Edit Patterns
(Move Fields) for details.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
*001:[TEXT: User Text: 12345
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
003:[GOTO
004:[PAUSE
005:[ARC
]
]
]
]
]
2.2.6 Print Modes
The software provides several modes for marking the fields of your patterns. Since the Mode parameter is defined with
the field, you can specify the printing mode on a field-by-field basis. The system provides additional control over how
the marker prints when the optional Theta-axis is enabled. See Configure Pattern Properties (Theta-axis Parameters)
for details.
Dot. Dot matrix mode marks the characters in a pattern of dots as
defined by the selected font style.
Cont. Continuous mode allows you to specify the print density to mark
fully formed characters that produce an engraved appearance. Using
Continuous mode may slightly increase pin wear and may significantly
increase the marking cycle time.
2.2.7 Pin Return Rate
The pin return rate (or pin recovery time) is the brief period it takes for the marking pin to become ready from one
impact to the next. Although this time may be imperceptible, it can affect the quality of the mark.
Pin recovery is affected by the marking surface and the marking pin cone angle. Softer surfaces (e.g., plastic) may
cause the marking pin to drag, or hang up, in the material. Accordingly, the recovery time may be greater than it would
be when marking a very hard surface.
Larger marking pin cone angles (e.g., 60°) tend to produce deeper marks. Again, the recovery time may be greater
than it would be when using a pin with a smaller cone angle (e.g., 30°).
The marking system software allows you to compensate for the pin recovery time, based on your particular marking
needs. Refer to Marker Properties (Chapter 3) for details.
34700D.DOC
2-5
TMC470 Controller Operation
2.2.8 Codes and Real-time Data
The software allows you to include special message flags in your text strings to insert codes and real-time data into the
printed pattern. The system provides a wide variety of message flags to insert such things as times, dates, and serial
numbers. Certain flags allow operators to supply data during the print cycle; others allow you to encode the year,
month, or work shift in the printed text.
Message flags consists of the percent symbol (%) followed the flag character. The flag character is case-sensitive, so be
sure to use upper- or lowercase characters, as appropriate. Serial number flags (%#S) and variable text flags (%#V)
allow you to specify an integer value (e.g., %5S). The integer indicates the maximum number of characters the
inserted data may occupy. Query text message flags also use an integer (1, 2, … 20) to identify the query text buffer.
The maximum text string length, which includes the data to be inserted by the flag, is limited to 160 characters. Be
sure to account for the expanded length as the system inserts the data into the field. Don’t forget to include
appropriate spaces before or after the message flag if you want to separate the inserted data from the adjacent text.
The following table lists various flags that may be used. Special message flags are explained in the following paragraphs.
FLAG
Abbreviated Weekday (Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun)
%a
%B
%C
%D
%d
%E
%F
%G
%H
Omni Alpha Character (A – Z) – see Omni Serial Number Properties (Chapter 3)
Abbreviated Month (Jan, Feb, Mar, Apr, May, Jun, Jul, Aug, Sep, Oct, Nov, Dec)
Date and Time (MM/DD/YY HH:MM)
Day of the Month (01 – 31)
User-defined Day Code – see Date Code Properties (Chapter 3)
User-defined Year Code – see Date Code Properties (Chapter 3)
Single Character Check Digit for PS-OCR (see Error Checking)
Double Character Check Digit for PS-OCR (see Error Checking)
Hour of the Day (00 - 23)
%h
%I
%J
%K
%L
%M
User-defined Hour Code – see Date Code Properties (Chapter 3)
Hour of the Day (00 – 12)
Julian Day of the Year (001 - 366)
Month Code (1 - 9, O, N, D)
Last Digit of the Year (0 - 9)
Month (01 - 12)
%N
%n
%#O
%#o
%P
%#Q
%#q
Minutes of the Current Hour (00 – 59)
Seconds of the Current Minute (00 – 59)
Omni Serial Number – see Omni Serial Number Properties (Chapter 3)
Omni Serial Number – see Omni Serial Number Properties (Chapter 3)
AM or PM
Inserts text from the Query Text look-up table – see Query Text Properties (Chapter 3)
Inserts titles from the Query Text look-up table – see Query Text Properties (Chapter 3)
%R
%r
%#S
%#s
%T
%U
Week Number (01 - 53) [ week 01 is week containing January 1]
Week Number (01 - 53) [ week 01 is week containing first Thursday of new year ]
Pattern Serial Number – see Configure Pattern Properties
Pattern Serial Number – see Configure Pattern Properties
Time (HH:MM)
User-defined Month Code – see Date Code Properties (Chapter 3)
%#V
%#v
%W
%w
%X
%Y
%Z
Variable Text – see Operator-Supplied Text (below)
Variable Text – see Operator-Supplied Text (below)
Weekday (where: 1 = Sunday... 7 = Saturday)
Weekday (where: 1 = Monday... 7 = Sunday)
Date (MM/DD/YY)
Year (00 - 99)
User Shift Code – see Shift Code Properties (Chapter 3)
%%
%#=
%#@
2-6
DATA INSERTED INTO MESSAGE FOR PRINTING
%A
Prints the percent (%) sign
Inserts the current text string from the specified field number (#) into the field containing this flag
Prints the ASCII character specified by the # sign (e.g., 65=A). Typically used with custom fonts.
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
Operator-Supplied Text
The software provides two ways for operators to enter data into a pattern: query text flags and variable text flags.
Query Text is a system-level feature since it may be used to affect more than one pattern. For the system to
extract data from the Query Text lookup table and insert it into a text string, the string must include a %#Q flag
or a %#q flag (or both). See Query Text Properties (Chapter 3) for details.
Variable Text is a pattern-level feature since its usage affects only the field in which it is defined. For an
Operator-level user to enter data into a text string, the string must include a variable text flag (%#V or %#v),
where:
#
is an integer that defines the maximum number of characters that may be entered.
Note that variable text strings are limited to 160 characters. (i.e., %160V or %160v).
V
(uppercase "V") The system will pad the field with blanks if the operator enters fewer characters than the
maximum number defined for the field.
v
(lowercase "v") The system will not pad the blanks if the operator enters fewer characters than the
maximum number defined for the field.
For example, consider the following variable text flag entries, the operator input, and the resulting output.
Field Defined As:
Operator Enters:
Marker Prints:
SAMPLE_%5VABC
12345
SAMPLE_12345ABC
SAMPLE_%5VABC
123
SAMPLE_123
SAMPLE_%5vABC
12345
SAMPLE_12345ABC
SAMPLE_%5vABC
123
SAMPLE_123ABC
ABC
Serial Numbers
The software provides two types of serial numbers that can be included in your patterns’ text strings.
Omni Serial Number is a system-level feature since it may be used to affect more than one pattern. The Omni
serial number is stored in the controller’s permanent memory. It allows you to continue a serial number sequence
from pattern to pattern. For the system to insert the Omni serial number, at least one field in the pattern must
include an Omni serial number flag (%#O or %#o or %O or %o). See Omni Serial Number Properties
(Chapter 3) for details and options.
Pattern Serial Number is a pattern-level feature since its usage affects only the pattern in which it’s defined.
The pattern serial number is stored with the pattern parameters. It allows you to continue a separate serial number
sequence for each pattern. For the system to insert the pattern serial number, at least one field in the pattern must
include a pattern serial number flag (%#S or %#s or %S or %s). See Configure Pattern Properties for details
and options.
#
is an optional integer (1 through 9)
If an integer is used, the system will pad the serial number to the specified number of digits. See below.
If an integer is not used, the system will not pad the serial number.
O or S
(uppercase "O" or "S") will pad the serial number with zeros if an integer was specified. See # above.
o or s
(lowercase "o" or "s") will pad the serial number with spaces if an integer was specified. See # above.
The serial number flags may be placed in the text string by itself, or may be included as part of text string.
For example, consider the following serial number flag entries and the resulting output for serial number "1".
Field Defined As:
Marker Prints:
Field Defined As:
Marker Prints:
OMNI_%5O
OMNI_00001
PATTERN_%5S
PATTERN_00001
OMNI_%5o
OMNI_
PATTERN_%5s
PATTERN_
OMNI_%O
OMNI_1
PATTERN_%S
PATTERN_1
OMNI_%o
OMNI_1
PATTERN_%s
PATTERN_1
1
34700D.DOC
1
2-7
TMC470 Controller Operation
Time and Date Insertion
The various time and date flags provide the ability to include the current time, date, or shift in the marked message.
The controller’s internal clock is the source of the date and time information. Simply include the desired flag in your
text string, where appropriate.
Coded Information
Certain flags allow you to define code characters that represent the current year, current month, day, hour, or current
work shift. The system uses the controller’s internal clock/calendar and the appropriate look-up table to insert the code
characters into the text string. Refer to the following sections for details.
•
•
Shift Code Properties (Chapter 3)
Date Code Properties (Chapter 3)
Error Checking
Special flags can be used to assist in error checking when your marked message will be read by a Telesis PS-OCR
optical character reader. The check character flags may be used to append a one- or two-digit character at the end of
the text string. The check characters are calculated by the system based on the hexadecimal sum of the characters in
the text string. The resulting checksum character is then inserted into the message. The reader can then interpret the
text string, perform its own checksum calculation, and verify that the check characters in the message match its
calculated checksum results. The %F and %G flags, if used, must be placed at the end of the text string. The %F flag
inserts a single check character at the end of the message. The %G flag inserts two check characters at the end of the
message. The single check digit should be used only when space constraints prohibit the use of two check characters.
2-8
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
2.3 ACCESS DESIGNER MODE
The system must be placed in Designer mode (or Supervisor mode) to create and edit patterns.
To place the system in Designer mode:
From the Operator Main Screen, press F5 (SETUP).
The system will display the Setup menu.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER –Offline– Pattern:UNTITLED
:000
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
Press F6 to toggle the LEVEL selection to DESIGNER.
Press F1 (LEVEL).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER –Offline– FPattern:UNTITLED
1:LEVEL
F6:< DESIGNER:000
>
The system will display the Password prompt.
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
Type the password into the Enter Password box. If a
password has not been defined, leave the box empty
(blank).
Note: A password may be defined to restrict
access to Designer-level features. Refer to
System Passwords (Chapter 3) for details.
]
]
]
]
]
Press F1 (ACCEPT).
F2:QUERY TEXT
]
]
]
]
]
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER –Offline– Pattern:UNTITLED
:000
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
Enter Password [
F1 ACCEPT
F2 CANCEL
]
]
]
]
]
]
The system will return to the Main Screen.
The system displays DESN to indicate it is in
Designer mode. Although the Main Screen looks
the same as Operator Mode, the drop-down menus
now provide many more options and privileges.
34700D.DOC
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Offline– Pattern:UNTITLED
:000
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
]
]
]
]
]
2-9
TMC470 Controller Operation
2.4 CREATE NEW PATTERNS
The system provides two methods for creating new patterns. The Pattern Wizard allows you to create simple patterns
using only text fields. The Pattern Editor allows you to create complex patterns using all types of fields and options.
2.4.1 Using the Pattern Wizard
The Pattern Wizard may be used to define a pattern that contains only text fields. The wizard allows you to supply the
basic information required to define the fields, and lets the system provided the other parameter details based on your
primary input.
To create a new pattern using the wizard:
From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen,
press F1 (FILE).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Offline– Pattern:UNTITLED
:000
The system will display the File menu.
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
From the File menu, press F7 to toggle the NEW
selection to WIZARD.
Press F2 (NEW).
Note: If a pattern is already open when you
attempt to create a new one, the system will
prompt you to save any changes to the existing
pattern before proceeding.
The system will display the Text Tool Wizard
Screen ready to define the first text field.
The top line shows the field number that is currently
being defined (e.g., Field # 01).
]
]
]
]
]
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Offline– Pattern:UNTITLED
:000
F1:OPEN
F2:NEW
F7:<WIZARD >
001:[
]
F3:SAVE
002:[
]
F4:SAVE-AS
003:[
]
F5:PROPERTIES
004:[
]
F6:TEST
005:[
]
Text Tool Wizard
Verify the cursor is on the Text parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
The Text parameter defines the content of the
character string. The text string may contain up to
160 characters including uppercase and lowercase
characters, keyboard symbols, blank spaces,
message flags, and special characters.
Text: [
Height: [
X: [
Y: [
...Field # 01
]
0.125]in
6.000]in
6.000]in
F1-ADD TO PATTERN
Font :
< 5x7
Density: <LOW
F2-TEST
>
>
ESC-EXIT
Refer to Codes and Real-time Data (Chapter 2) and
Special Keys – Control Characters (Chapter 1) for details.
Press TAB to select the Height parameter.
Type the desired height dimension.
Text Tool Wizard
The wizard will automatically set the character
width to 2/3 the character height, and set the
character pitch equal to the character height. Refer
to Character Dimensions for details.
Text: [
Height: [
X: [
Y: [
]
0.125]in
6.000]in
6.000]in
F1-ADD TO PATTERN
2-10
34700D.DOC
...Field # 01
Font :
< 5x7
Density: <LOW
F2-TEST
>
>
ESC-EXIT
TMC470 Controller Operation
Press TAB to select the X (or Y) parameter.
The values in the adjacent boxes identify the axis
coordinates where the text string will be anchored
(top, left justified) in the marking window.
Do one of the following:
•
Enter the specific axis coordinate in each axis box.
]
0.125]in
6.000]in
6.000]in
Press TAB to select the Font parameter.
Press ENTER until the desired font is displayed.
Text Tool Wizard
Text: [
Height: [
X: [
Y: [
Press ENTER until the desired density is displayed.
•
•
•
F2-TEST
>
>
ESC-EXIT
...Field # 01
Font :
< 5x7
Density: <LOW
F2-TEST
>
>
ESC-EXIT
Press TAB to select the Density parameter.
The Density parameter determines the pixel
density (e.g., dots per inch) the system will use to
form the characters. Refer to Print Modes for
details.
Font :
< 5x7
Density: <LOW
]
0.125]in
6.000]in
6.000]in
F1-ADD TO PATTERN
...Field # 01
Use the default values provided by the system.
As text fields are added, the wizard automatically
adjusts the X/Y coordinates to separate the fields. Each
field is anchored at the same X-axis coordinate as the
previous field and at a Y-axis coordinate below the previous
field a distance equal to 1½ times the character height.
The Font parameter defines the character set that
will be used to print the text string. It determines
the shape and appearance of the characters. Refer
to Font Selection for details.
Text: [
Height: [
X: [
Y: [
F1-ADD TO PATTERN
or
•
Text Tool Wizard
LOW prints in Dot mode.
Text Tool Wizard
Text: [
Height: [
X: [
Y: [
...Field # 01
]
0.125]in
6.000]in
6.000]in
F1-ADD TO PATTERN
Font :
< 5x7
Density: <LOW
F2-TEST
>
>
ESC-EXIT
MEDIUM prints in Continuous mode at 100 dpi.
HIGH prints in Continuous mode at 200 dpi.
Press F1 (ADD TO PATTERN) to save the text field
parameters and add the field to the pattern.
The top line of the Text Tool Wizard Screen
changes to show the next field is ready to be
defined (e.g., Field # 02). You may continue to use
the wizard to define additional text fields as
needed.
Press F2 (TEST) to verify the fields you’ve defined will
print within the boundaries of the marking window.
An error message will be displayed if the system
encounters a problem..
After all text fields are defined, press ESC to exit the wizard.
Text Tool Wizard
Text: [
Height: [
X: [
Y: [
...Field # 02
]
0.125]in
6.000]in
6.000]in
F1-ADD TO PATTERN
Font :
< 5x7
Density: <LOW
F2-TEST
>
>
ESC-EXIT
The system will return to the Main Screen.
Press F1 (FILE) to display the File menu.
From the File Menu, press F4 (SAVE-AS) to save the
new pattern. Refer to Save/Name/Copy Patterns for
details.
34700D.DOC
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Offline– Pattern:UNTITLED
:000
F1:OPEN
F2:NEW
F7:<WIZARD >
001:[
]
F3:SAVE
002:[
]
F4:SAVE-AS
003:[
]
F5:PROPERTIES
004:[
]
F6:TEST
005:[
]
2-11
TMC470 Controller Operation
2.4.2 Using the Pattern Editor
When you create a new pattern using the Pattern Editor, the system uses the default pattern parameters to produce an
empty pattern. Once created, you can define objects to be printed, define commands to be processed during the print
cycle, and change the pattern parameters to suit your preferences.
To create a new pattern:
From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen,
press F1 (FILE).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Offline– Pattern:UNTITLED
:000
The system will display the File menu.
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
From the File menu, press F7 to toggle the NEW
selection to PATTERN.
Press F2 (NEW).
Note: If a pattern is already open when you
attempt to create a new one, the system will
prompt you to save any changes to the existing
pattern before proceeding.
]
]
]
]
]
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Offline– Pattern:UNTITLED
:000
F1:OPEN
F2:NEW
F7:<PATTERN>
001:[
]
F3:SAVE
002:[
]
F4:SAVE-AS
003:[
]
F5:PROPERTIES
004:[
]
F6:TEST
005:[
]
The system will display the Main Screen and show
an empty, unnamed pattern (UNTITLED).
You can now proceed to define your pattern objects and
set your pattern parameters. Refer to the appropriate
section to perform the following tasks:
•
•
•
Save & Name Patterns
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Offline– Pattern:UNTITLED
:000
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
Define Objects in Patterns
Configure Pattern Properties
]
]
]
]
]
2.4.3 Downloading Patterns from Merlin
The Merlin III software is a 32-bit, Windows based, WYSIWYG application that provides a graphical user interface to
make pattern design quick and easy. Using Merlin III, you can design and compile pattern files and block files that may
be downloaded to the TMC470 Controller. Downloaded pattern files and block files may then be used by the controller in
its stand-alone configuration.
®
To use this feature:
Ensure the computer is properly connected and all communication parameters are properly configured.
Refer to Ethernet/Merlin Communication Properties (Chapter 3).
Place the marking system under Merlin III control.
See Initiating Merlin Control (Chapter 1).
Refer to the Merlin III Operating Instructions (available via the Merlin Help menu under Help Topics).
See TMC470 Stand-alone Operation.
2-12
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
2.5 SAVE/NAME/COPY PATTERNS
New patterns and changes to existing patterns are not stored in controller memory until you save them. Once saved,
they can be recalled (opened) for printing or edited whenever necessary. You can also create a copy of a pattern by
opening an existing pattern and saving it under a new pattern name.
You must save the pattern being edited before opening another pattern. Otherwise, you will lose any changes made
since it was last saved. You should make it a standard practice to periodically save your pattern, especially during an
extended period of editing.
From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen,
press F1 (FILE).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Offline– Pattern:UNTITLED
:000
The system will display the File menu.
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
]
]
]
]
]
Saving a New Pattern or Making a Copy
From the File menu, press F4 (SAVE-AS).
The system will display the Pattern Save Editor
Screen to name and save the pattern.
Type the pattern name in the Save As box.
For new patterns, the screen displays the name
“UNTITLED” to indicate this pattern has never
been saved. This is a reserved name and cannot
be used. You must provide another name for your
pattern.
•
Each pattern must be given a unique name to
identify it. The pattern name may be up to
31 alphanumeric characters long and may
include spaces. Leading and trailing spaces,
though allowed, are highly discouraged.
•
If the name is greater than 10 characters, it may
be abbreviated when shown on the display
screens.
•
If a pattern will be remotely loaded using the
system I/O signals, it must be named one of the
reserved pattern names (PAT001 through
PAT127). See Remote Pattern Selection for
details.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Offline– Pattern:UNTITLED
:000
F1:OPEN
F7:<PATTERN>
F2:NEW
001:[
]
F3:SAVE
002:[
]
F4:SAVE-AS
003:[
]
F5:PROPERTIES
004:[
]
F6:TEST
005:[
]
Pattern Save Editor
Name: UNTITLED
Save As: [UNTITLED
]
F1 SAVE
Press F1 (SAVE) to save and store the pattern.
The system will return to the Main Screen.
Saving an Existing Pattern
From the File menu, press F3 (SAVE).
The system will save the pattern under the current
name and return to the Main Screen.
34700D.DOC
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Offline– Pattern:UNTITLED
:000
F1:OPEN
F2:NEW
F7:<PATTERN>
001:[
]
F3:SAVE
002:[
]
F4:SAVE-AS
003:[
]
F5:PROPERTIES
004:[
]
F6:TEST
005:[
]
2-13
TMC470 Controller Operation
2.6 DEFINE OBJECTS IN PATTERNS
After you create the pattern, you’ll need to add fields to define the content, format, and location of the data you want
to print. There are many types of fields you may define in a pattern.
Text-based Objects
• Text
• 2D Matrix Symbol
• ArcText (radius method)
• ArcText 3P (3-pt method)
• QR Code Symbol
• MicroQR Code Symbol
Geometric Objects
• Arc (radius method)
• Arc 3P (3-pt method)
• Block Object
• Box
• Circle
• Ellipse (radius method)
• Ellipse 3P (3-pt method)
• Line (start method)
• Line 2P (start/end method)
Commands
• GoTo
• Pause
• Input
• Output
• Serial
• Machine
A pattern may contain up to 999 fields. When you add a field to the pattern, the system places it at the end of a
sequential list. During the print cycle, the system processes the fields in the order listed (first to last). If you prefer,
you can rearrange the list to control the order in which they are processed. See Edit Patterns (Move Fields) for details.
2.6.1 Text
Each text field defines the content, size, shape, and location of a single string of characters.
Key Point…
Ensure the pattern you wish to edit is open (loaded).
Before you begin editing the pattern, we suggest you place the machine online (F3, F1).
With the machine online, the Design Jog feature will be readily available to assist in defining the field location.
See Design Considerations for details. If you’re new to the process of designing patterns and adding fields, please
take a few minutes and review that section for an overview of key design concepts.
To add a text field to the pattern:
From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen,
press F2 (EDIT).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
The system will display the Edit Menu.
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
Press F7 to toggle the TOOL selection to TEXT.
Press F1 (TOOL) to add the text field to the pattern.
2-14
34700D.DOC
]
]
]
]
]
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online
– Pattern:SAMPLE_05
F1:TOOL
F7:<TEXT
>:000
F2:COMMAND F8:<GOTO
>
001:[
]
F3:CUT
002:[
]
F4:COPY
003:[
]
F5:PASTE
004:[
]
F6:ADJUST
005:[
]
TMC470 Controller Operation
Text Field Parameters (continued)
The system will display the Text Editor Screen for you to define the field. The parameters are displayed on four
separate pages (Text, Font, Tool, and User).
The first page contains the Text parameters.
Verify the cursor is on the Text parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
The Text parameter defines the content of the
character string. The text string may contain up to
160 characters including uppercase and lowercase
characters, keyboard symbols, blank spaces,
message flags, and special characters.
Message flags may be used to insert real-time
data into the printed message (e.g., dates, time,
codes, serial numbers, etc.). See Codes and
Real-time Data for details.
TEXT
1:
TEXT
Text: [
X: [ 3.0000]in
Y: [ 6.0000]in
θ : [ 0.0000 ]°
FONT
TOOL
USER
]
X Just: < Left >
Y Just: < Top >
Angle: [ 0.000]°
F1 ACCEPT
Special characters, like control characters (e.g.,
EOT) and language phonetic symbols (e.g., ö),
may be entered into the text string. Refer to
Special Keys – Control Characters (Chapter 1) for details.
Type the desired data into the Text box.
Press TAB to select the X (or Y or θ) parameter.
Note: The Theta (θ) parameter will be available
only if your system has the optional Theta
axis enabled.
The values in the adjacent boxes identify the axis
coordinates where the text string will be anchored
in the marking window.
1:
TEXT
Text: [
X: [ 3.0000]in
Y: [ 6.0000]in
θ : [ 0.0000 ]°
FONT
TOOL
USER
]
X Just: < Left >
Y Just: < Top >
Angle: [ 0.000]°
F1 ACCEPT
Do one of the following:
•
TEXT
Press the JOG key
and use the Design Jog
feature to interactively position the marker and
identify the anchor location.
or
•
Enter the specific axis coordinate in each axis box.
34700D.DOC
2-15
TMC470 Controller Operation
Text Field Parameters (continued)
Press TAB to select the X Just parameter.
The X Just parameter defines how the text will be
aligned at the X-axis coordinate. See illustration.
Press ENTER until the desired X-axis justification is
displayed (Left, Center, or Right).
Press TAB to select the Y Just parameter.
The Y Just parameter defines how the text will be
aligned at the Y-axis coordinate. See illustration.
TEXT
1:
TEXT
Text: [
X: [ 3.0000]in
Y: [ 6.0000]in
θ : [ 0.0000 ]°
FONT
TOOL
USER
]
X Just: < Left >
Y Just: < Top >
Angle: [ 0.000]°
F1 ACCEPT
Press ENTER until the desired Y-axis justification is
displayed (Top, Middle, or Bottom).
Key Point…
If you select Top alignment and print special characters with ascenders (e.g., É) the marker will use the top of
the special character as the upper limit and align the other characters accordingly. It will not use the top of
the uppercase characters for alignment. See illustration.
Similarly, if you select Bottom alignment and print lowercase characters, the marker will use the bottom of the
lowercase descenders (e.g., g) as the lower limit and align the other characters accordingly. It will not use the
bottom of the uppercase characters as the baseline. See illustration.
2-16
Press TAB to select the Angle parameter.
The Angle parameter allows you to rotate the text
string in a counterclockwise direction. Note that an
angle of 0° indicates no rotation. See illustration.
Enter the rotation (degrees) in the Angle box.
The text always pivots on its anchor point. Since
the X/Y Just parameters determine the anchor
point, they have a significant impact on how the
rotated text will appear. See illustration.
Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
34700D.DOC
TEXT
1:
TEXT
Text: [
X: [ 3.0000]in
Y: [ 6.0000]in
θ : [ 0.0000 ]°
FONT
TOOL
USER
]
X Just: < Left >
Y Just: < Top >
Angle: [ 0.000]°
F1 ACCEPT
TMC470 Controller Operation
Text Field Parameters (continued)
The second page contains the Font parameters.
Verify the cursor is on the Font parameter. If not,
press TAB to select it.
The Font parameter defines the character set that
will be used to print the text string. It determines
the shape and appearance of the characters. Refer
to Font Selection for details.
TEXT
1:
Font :
Height:
Width :
Pitch :
<
[
[
[
TEXT
FONT
5x7
>
0.1250]in
0.0830]in
0.1250]in
TOOL
USER
Print: DOT
CONT
F1 ACCEPT
Press ENTER until the desired font is displayed.
The next three parameters define the physical size of the characters. See illustration.
Height is the distance from the center of the mark at the
top of the character to the center of the mark at the
bottom.
Width is the distance from the center of the mark at the
left of the character to the center of the mark at the right.
Pitch is the distance from the start of one character to
the start of the next character, including the space
between characters.
Press TAB to select the Height parameter.
Key Point…
You can manually enter width and pitch dimensions or have the system automatically calculate them based on
the character height.
Do one of the following:
•
Automatically Set Width & Pitch. Type the
desired height dimension, then press ENTER. The
system will automatically calculate and apply the
width and pitch dimensions based on the height.
or
•
TEXT
1:
Font :
Height:
Width :
Pitch :
<
[
[
[
TEXT
5x7
>
0.1250]in
0.0830]in
0.1250]in
Manually Set Width & Pitch. Type the desired
height dimension, then press TAB. The system will
leave the Width and Pitch dimensions unchanged for
you to define them manually.
Press TAB to select the Print parameter.
Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key to select the
desired print mode, then press ENTER.
The Print parameter defines the mode that will be
used to print the text string. See illustration.
Dot marks the characters in a pattern of dots as
defined by the selected font set.
FONT
TOOL
USER
Print: DOT
CONT
F1 ACCEPT
TEXT
1:
Font :
Height:
Width :
Pitch :
<
[
[
[
TEXT
FONT
5x7
>
0.1250]in
0.0830]in
0.1250]in
TOOL
USER
Print: DOT
CONT
F1 ACCEPT
Cont (continuous) allows you to specify the print
density to mark fully formed characters that
produce an engraved appearance.
Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
34700D.DOC
2-17
TMC470 Controller Operation
Text Field Parameters (continued)
The third page contains the Tool parameters.
Verify the cursor is on the Printable parameter. If
not, press TAB to select it.
TEXT
The Printable parameter allows you enable or
disable printing for this text string.
1:
TEXT
Printable: ⌧
TOOL
USER
Density:[100.00]
Theta mode: Disabled
Index
Press ENTER to toggle the option OFF or ON.
⌧ indicates this text string will be printed.
Perpendicular
Character
F1 ACCEPT
indicates this text string will not be printed.
FONT
Press TAB to select the Density parameter.
The Density parameter is used with Continuous
print mode. It determines the pixel density (e.g.,
dots per inch) the system will use to form the
characters. Higher density values produce a more
continuous appearance but will increase marking
time and pin wear. The system uses either the
specified pixel density or the minimum "dots"
required by the selected font, whichever is greater.
Enter the desired pixel density.
Press TAB to select the Theta mode parameter.
Note: The Theta mode parameter will be available
only if your system has the optional Theta
axis enabled.
The Theta mode parameter defines how the system
will rotate the drive fixture to print the text.
Disabled tells the system to ignore the Theta print
mode for this text string.
TEXT
1:
TEXT
Printable: ⌧
FONT
TOOL
USER
Density:[100.00]
Theta mode: Disabled
Index
Perpendicular
Character
F1 ACCEPT
TEXT
1:
TEXT
Printable: ⌧
FONT
TOOL
USER
Density:[100.00]
Theta mode: Disabled
Index
Perpendicular
Character
F1 ACCEPT
Index mode is typically used to mark flat surfaces
on square or hexagonal parts (e.g., sides of bolt
heads). In Index mode, the system does not rotate
the Theta-axis while marking. Instead, it rotates the Theta-axis to index the side of the part, then marks.
Perpendicular mode is typically used to mark cylindrical parts (e.g., pipe or tubing). In Perpendicular mode, the
system does rotate the Theta-axis while marking. The software substitutes normal movement along the Y-axis
with rotational movement around the Theta-axis. This may result in slower marking times, but provides a high
quality mark since the impact pin is always perpendicular to the marking surface.
Character mode allows the system to print one character, rotate the Theta-axis, print the next character,
rotate, and so on. Character indexing is normally faster because it results in less rotational interruption to the
printing cycle.
Key Point…
When Character indexing is selected, the text string must be perpendicular to the rotational axis.
That is, the Angle parameter must be set to 90° or 270° to properly orient the text on the Theta axis.
Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key to select the desired Theta mode, then press ENTER.
Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
2-18
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
Text Field Parameters (continued)
The fourth page contains the User parameters.
The User parameters are used by the system only when
the text string contains a variable text flag. The flag
(%#V or %#v) allows users to enter text into the field
while the system is in Operator mode.
Verify the cursor is on the Title parameter. If not,
press TAB to select it.
TEXT
1:
TEXT
Type in the desired text to define a title for the field.
Press TAB to select the User Text parameter.
The User Text parameter allows you to define a
default text string for the variable text. The default
string will reside in the field until actual usersupplied text is entered, until the pattern is closed,
or until the controller is powered off. See Save in
Query Buffer parameter (below) for more
information on retaining user-supplied text.
Type in the desired text to define the default string.
Press TAB to select the Clear User parameter.
The Clear User parameter determines how the
system handles the user-supplied data after the
print cycle is complete.
If enabled, the system will clear (delete) the usertext from the field after the pattern prints. If
another print cycle is attempted with the user text
field empty, the system will prompt the user for
new data before it starts the print cycle.
TOOL
Title:
[
User Text: [
Clear user:
Save in Query buffer :[00]
The Title parameter defines a label that will be
displayed next to the box where the user enters
data. The label can help identify what type of data
the user is to enter.
FONT
USER
]
]
F1 ACCEPT
TEXT
1:
TEXT
FONT
TOOL
Title:
[
User Text: [
Clear user:
Save in Query buffer :[00]
USER
]
]
F1 ACCEPT
TEXT
1:
TEXT
FONT
TOOL
Title:
[
User Text: [
Clear user:
Save in Query buffer :[00]
USER
]
]
F1 ACCEPT
If disabled, the system keeps the user-text in the
field until it is manually cleared or edited, until the
pattern is closed, or until the controller is powered
off. See Save in Query Buffer parameter (below) for more information on retaining user-supplied text.
Press ENTER to toggle the option OFF or ON.
⌧ indicates the user-supplied text will be cleared.
indicates the user-supplied text will be retained.
Press TAB to select the Save in Query Buffer
parameter.
TEXT
The Save in Query Buffer parameter allows you to
save the user-supplied text in one of the query
text buffers. This retains data when it would
normally be cleared by the system.
Type the number of the query text buffer (01… 20)
where you wish to store the data.
1:
TEXT
FONT
TOOL
Title:
[
User Text: [
Clear user:
Save in Query buffer :[00]
USER
]
]
F1 ACCEPT
Note: Entering 00 effectively disables the save
feature (i.e., the user-text will not be saved).
After all text field parameters are defined, press F1 (ACCEPT) to save the settings.
34700D.DOC
2-19
TMC470 Controller Operation
2.6.2 2D Matrix Symbol
A 2D matrix allows you to define a text message, encode it as a two-dimensional, machine-readable matrix symbol,
and print it as part of your pattern. The 2D matrix uses an encoding algorithm based on the Data Matrix Library.
Key Point…
Ensure the pattern you wish to edit is open (loaded).
Before you begin editing the pattern, we suggest you place the machine online (F3, F1).
With the machine online, the Design Jog feature will be readily available to assist in defining the field location.
See Design Considerations for details. If you’re new to the process of designing patterns and adding fields, please
take a few minutes and review that section for an overview of key design concepts.
To add a 2D matrix symbol to the pattern:
From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen, press
F2 (EDIT).
The system will display the Edit Menu.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
Press F7 to toggle the TOOL selection to 2D MATRIX.
Press F1 (TOOL) to add the 2D matrix to the pattern.
The system will display the 2D Matrix Editor Screen
for you to define the field. The parameters are
displayed on five separate pages (Text, Type,
Params, User, and Tool). The
symbol on the top
line indicates additional pages are available.
]
]
]
]
]
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online
– Pattern:SAMPLE_05
F1:TOOL
F7:<2D MATRIX>:000
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
F2:COMMAND
F3:CUT
F4:COPY
F5:PASTE
F6:ADJUST
F8:<GOTO
>
]
]
]
]
]
The first page contains the Matrix parameters.
Verify the cursor is on the Matrix parameter. If not,
press TAB to select it.
The Matrix parameter defines what information will
be encoded into the 2D matrix symbol. It may
include upper- and lowercase characters, keyboard
symbols, blank spaces, and message flags and
special characters.
Message flags may be used to insert real-time
data into the printed message (e.g., dates, time,
codes, serial numbers, etc.). See Codes and
Real-time Data for details.
2D MATRIX
1: MATRIX
Matrix:[
X: [ 3.0000]in
Y: [ 6.0000]in
θ : [ 0.0000 ]°
TYPE
PARAMS
]
X Just: < Left >
Y Just: < Top >
Angle: [ 0.000]°
F1 ACCEPT
Special characters, like control characters (e.g., EOT) and language phonetic symbols (e.g., ö), may also be
entered into the text string. Refer to Special Keys – Control Characters (Chapter 1) for details.
The content of the text string will determine your Format parameter selection (see below). Additionally, the
combination of your Format selection and the length of the text string will affect the geometric shape of the
resulting matrix (square or rectangular). The maximum number of characters that may be encoded in any
Telesis matrix symbol is 160. See Matrix Limitations for details.
2-20
Type the desired data into the Matrix box.
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
2D Matrix Parameters (continued)
Press TAB to select the X (or Y or θ) parameter.
Note: The Theta (θ) parameter will be available only
if your system has the optional Theta axis
enabled.
The values in the adjacent boxes identify the axis
coordinates where the 2D matrix will be anchored in
the marking window.
2D MATRIX
1: MATRIX
Matrix:[
X: [ 3.0000]in
Y: [ 6.0000]in
θ : [ 0.0000 ]°
TYPE
PARAMS
]
X Just: < Left >
Y Just: < Top >
Angle: [ 0.000]°
F1 ACCEPT
Do one of the following:
•
Press the JOG key
and use the Design Jog
feature to interactively position the marker and
identify the anchor location.
•
Enter the specific axis coordinate in each axis box.
or
Key Point…
Avoid placing the 2D matrix symbol too close to the marking window boundary.
To improve the quality of the mark, the marker may extend beyond the edge of the symbol
before it returns to print the next column of dots in the matrix. Usually two pixel spaces
(about 2½ times the dot diameter) between the window boundary and the top or bottom
edge of the symbol is sufficient to avoid errors. See Spacing parameter and Overshoot
parameter for details on pixel spacing.
Press TAB to select the X Just parameter.
The X Just parameter defines how the symbol will
be aligned at the X-axis coordinate. See illustration.
Press ENTER until the desired X-axis justification is
displayed (Left, Center, or Right).
Press TAB to select the Y Just parameter.
2D MATRIX
1: MATRIX
Matrix:[
X: [ 3.0000]in
Y: [ 6.0000]in
θ : [ 0.0000 ]°
TYPE
PARAMS
]
X Just: < Left >
Y Just: < Top >
Angle: [ 0.000]°
F1 ACCEPT
The Y Just parameter defines how the symbol will
be aligned at the Y-axis coordinate.
Press ENTER until the desired Y-axis justification is
displayed (Top, Middle, or Bottom).
34700D.DOC
2-21
TMC470 Controller Operation
2D Matrix Parameters (continued)
Press TAB to select the Angle parameter.
The Angle parameter allows you to rotate the
matrix symbol in a counterclockwise direction. Note
that an angle of 0° indicates no rotation. See
illustration.
Enter the rotation (degrees) in the Angle box.
2D MATRIX
Matrix:[
X: [ 3.0000]in
Y: [ 6.0000]in
θ : [ 0.0000 ]°
TYPE
PARAMS
]
X Just: < Left >
Y Just: < Top >
Angle: [ 0.000]°
F1 ACCEPT
The matrix symbol always pivots on its anchor
point. Since the X/Y Just parameters determine the
anchor point, they have a significant impact on
how the rotated symbol will appear. See
illustration.
1: MATRIX
Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
The second page contains the Type parameters.
Verify the cursor is on the Format parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
2D MATRIX
The Format parameter identifies the type of
characters contained in the encoded data. The
formats and their allowable characters are:
ALPHANUMERIC+ uppercase alphanumeric and
punctuation (A-Z, 0-9, space, comma, period,
slash, hyphen)
ALPHANUMERIC
Format :
Method :
Size
:
Spacing:
1: MATRIX
TYPE
<ALPHANUMERIC+> ECC : <200>
<SPACING>
Code : <Square>
[ 0.5000]in
[ 0.0200]in
F1 ACCEPT
uppercase alphanumeric (A-Z, 0-
9, spaces)
ASCII
full 128 ASCII character set (full keyboard)
8_BIT
(user defined) This format must be selected to encode Extended ASCII characters
NUMERIC
numerical data (0-9, spaces)
ALPHABETIC
2-22
uppercase alphabetic (A-Z, spaces)
Press ENTER until the desired format is displayed.
34700D.DOC
PARAMS
TMC470 Controller Operation
2D Matrix Parameters (continued)
Press TAB to select the ECC parameter.
The ECC parameter allows you to select the level
of error correction. Different levels of error
correction add varying amounts of redundancy to
the matrix. Redundancy data is randomly
encoded with the text string to increase the
system’s ability to recover from damage. As you
increase the level of error correction, the amount
of redundancy is increased, as well as the error
correction overhead. The physical area required
to print the matrix increases proportionally as the
level of redundancy increases. The ECC selections
and their corresponding overhead values are:
0
2D MATRIX
Format :
Method :
Size
:
Spacing:
1: MATRIX
TYPE
PARAMS
<ALPHANUMERIC+> ECC : <200>
<SPACING>
Code : <Square>
[ 0.5000]in
[ 0.0200]in
F1 ACCEPT
for square matrix symbols (no overhead)
50
for square matrix symbols (+33% overhead)
80
for square matrix symbols (+50% overhead)
100
for square matrix symbols (+100% overhead)
140
for square matrix symbols (+300% overhead)
200
for square or rectangular symbols
(overhead varies with size of matrix)
See Code parameter for more information on square vs. rectangular matrix symbols.
Press ENTER until the desired ECC setting is displayed.
Press TAB to select the Method parameter.
2D MATRIX
The Method parameter defines how the system
will construct the symbol.
Spacing allows you to specify the pixel spacing of
the dots that make up the matrix symbol.
Size allows you to specify the height of the
printed matrix symbol.
Format :
Method :
Size
:
Spacing:
1: MATRIX
TYPE
PARAMS
<ALPHANUMERIC+> ECC : <200>
<SPACING>
Code : <Square>
[ 0.5000]in
[ 0.0200]in
F1 ACCEPT
Press ENTER until the desired construction method
is displayed.
Note: Depending on the selected Method, the system
will use either the Spacing parameter value or
the Size parameter value, as applicable.
Refer to the following explanations for details.
34700D.DOC
2-23
TMC470 Controller Operation
2D Matrix Parameters (continued)
Key Point…
2D MATRIX
Successful reading of the matrix symbol is critically
dependent on its printed construction. Optimally, the
dots that make up the matrix should almost touch.
Proper construction requires a special relationship
between the diameter of the printed dot and the
spacing between the printed dots.
Format :
Method :
Size
:
Spacing:
1: MATRIX
TYPE
PARAMS
<ALPHANUMERIC+> ECC : <200>
<SPACING>
Code : <Square>
[ 0.5000]in
[ 0.0200]in
F1 ACCEPT
Do one of the following:
•
Define the Size. Press TAB to select the Size
parameter, then enter the size dimension.
The Size parameter defines the height of the
printed matrix as measured from the center of the
lowest pixel to the center of the highest pixel. See
illustration.
The system automatically calculates the pixel
spacing of the dots and the width of the printed
symbol, rounding off the actual values based on
the resolution of the marker
or
•
Define the Spacing. Press TAB to select the
Spacing parameter, then enter the spacing
dimension.
The Spacing parameter defines the specific pixel
spacing of the dots that make up the matrix.
See illustration.
If you know the diameter of the printed dot, set
the spacing equal to 125% of the dot diameter.
The system will round off the actual spacing value
based on the resolution of the marker.
Press TAB to select the Code parameter.
The Code parameter defines the geometric
shape of the matrix. Square matrix symbols
have an equal number of rows and columns.
Rectangular matrix symbols are constructed in
one of six pre-defined formats.
SQUARE
Equal number of rows and
columns
8 x 18
8 rows, 18 columns
8 x 32
8 rows, 32 columns
12 x 26
12 rows, 26 columns
12 x 36
12 rows, 36 columns
16 x 36
16 rows, 36 columns
16 x 48
16 rows, 48 columns.
2D MATRIX
Format :
Method :
Size
:
Spacing:
1: MATRIX
TYPE
PARAMS
<ALPHANUMERIC+> ECC : <200>
<SPACING>
Code : <Square>
[ 0.5000]in
[ 0.0200]in
F1 ACCEPT
Refer to the Matrix Limitations charts on the following page for guidelines on selecting the correct matrix shape.
Press ENTER until the desired matrix shape is displayed.
2-24
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
2D Matrix Parameters (continued)
Matrix Limitations. The number of characters and the type of characters in the text string determine the
minimum size of the matrix.
Square Matrix. If you choose a square matrix, the system will automatically create the smallest possible
square matrix. Refer to the following table.
Maximum Characters – Square Matrices
Code Parameter =
SQUARE
Maximum Number of Characters in Matrix *
Format Parameter =
NUMERIC
Format Parameter =
ALPHANUMERIC
Format Parameter =
8-BIT
10 x 10
6
3
1
12 x 12
10
6
3
14 x 14
16
10
6
16 x 16
24
16
10
18 x 18
36
25
16
20 x 20
44
31
20
22 x 22
60
43
28
24 x 24
72
52
34
26 x 26
88
64
42
32 x 32
124
91
60
36 x 36
172**
127
84
40 x 40
228**
169**
112
* ECC parameter set to 200
** maximum allowable Telesis text string is 160 characters
Rectangular Matrix. If you choose a rectangular matrix, you must decide which size matrix the system creates.
The Code parameter (rectangular composition of the matrix) and the Format parameter (content of the text
string) determine the maximum number of characters in the rectangular matrix symbols. Refer to the following
table.
Maximum Character – Rectangular Matrices
Code Parameter =
(see below)
Maximum Number of Characters in Matrix *
Format Parameter =
NUMERIC
Format Parameter =
ALPHANUMERIC
Format Parameter =
8-BIT
8 x 18
10
6
3
8 x 32
20
13
8
12 x 26
32
22
14
12 x 36
44
31
20
16 x 36
64
46
30
16 x 48
98
72
47
* ECC parameter set to 200
Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
34700D.DOC
2-25
TMC470 Controller Operation
2D Matrix Parameters (continued)
The third page (PARAMS) contains parameters that define how the matrix symbol will be printed. See illustration.
Verify the cursor is on the BiDirectional parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
When bidirectional printing is enabled, the system
prints the matrix symbol in two directions, just as
it would for any other object. This is a faster, but
less accurate, method of printing the symbol.
2D MATRIX
1: MATRIX
BiDirectional
Overshoot :
Speed Rate:
When bidirectional printing is disabled (the
default), the system prints the matrix in one
direction only. This is a much more accurate, but
slower, method of printing the symbol.
[2
<
TYPE
PARAMS
]
>:100
F1 ACCEPT
Press ENTER to toggle the option ON or OFF.
indicates BiDirectional mode is disabled.
⌧ indicates BiDirectional mode is enabled.
Press TAB to select the Overshoot parameter
The Overshoot parameter defines how far the
marker will extend beyond the edge of the matrix
before it returns to print the next portion of the
symbol. See illustration.
Overshooting allows the marker to come up to
speed before it begins to mark again after
changing directions.
The overshoot parameter specifies an overshoot
factor based on the constructed size of the symbol.
Enter the desired overshoot factor (0 through 10).
Key Point…
If the value of the Overshoot parameter would
cause the marker to move beyond the limits of the
marking window, the system will issue an error
message when you test the pattern or attempt to
print the pattern.
2-26
1: MATRIX
BiDirectional
Overshoot :
Speed Rate:
[2
<
TYPE
34700D.DOC
PARAMS
]
F1 ACCEPT
This allows for a more consistent mark and may
prevent pixels from "bunching up" at the beginning
of the row or column. However, it will require more
time to mark the symbol when the overshoot feature
is used.
2D MATRIX
>:100
TMC470 Controller Operation
2D Matrix Parameters (continued)
Press TAB to select the Speed Rate parameter.
The Speed Rate parameter controls the printing speed and the maximum (large move) speed for this matrix
symbol only. The speed setting is independent for each symbol. It does not affect any other printable field in the
pattern, including other matrix symbols.
NOTICE
The selected speed rate is relative to the overall marker speed.
If you set the matrix speed rate to 100%, the system will use the same printing
speed and the same maximum speed as defined for the marker. Refer to Marker
Properties (Chapter 3). If you set the matrix speed rate to 50%, the system will
print the matrix symbol at ½ the marker-defined printing speed and execute
large moves for the matrix at ½ the marker-defined maximum speed.
Press ENTER to increase the speed rate.
Press CTRL + ENTER to decrease the speed rate.
2D MATRIX
The pointer indicates the selected speed from
10% to 100%.
Higher rates will result in faster marking times.
Slower rates will result in slower marking times,
but will improve the quality of the printed matrix
symbol.
1: MATRIX
BiDirectional
Overshoot :
Speed Rate:
[2
<
TYPE
PARAMS
]
>:100
F1 ACCEPT
Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
34700D.DOC
2-27
TMC470 Controller Operation
2D Matrix Parameters (continued)
The fourth page contains the User parameters.
The User parameters are used by the system only when the 2D matrix field contains a variable text flag. The flag (%#V
or %#v) allows users to enter text into the field while the system is in Operator mode.
Verify the cursor is on the Title parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
2D MATRIX
The Title parameter defines a label that will be
displayed next to the box where the user enters
data. The label can help identify what type of data
the user is to enter.
Type in the desired text to define a title for the field.
Press TAB to select the User Text parameter.
The User Text parameter allows you to define a
default text string for the variable text. The default
string will reside in the field until actual usersupplied text is entered, until the pattern is closed,
or until the controller is powered off. See Save in
Query Buffer parameter (below) for more
information on retaining user-supplied text.
Type in the desired text to define the default string.
Press TAB to select the Clear User parameter.
The Clear User parameter determines how the
system handles the user-supplied data after the
print cycle is complete.
If enabled, the system will clear (delete) the usertext from the field after the pattern prints. If
another print cycle is attempted with the user text
field empty, the system will prompt the user for
new data before it starts the print cycle.
1:
USER
TOOL
Title:
[
User Text: [
Clear user:
Save in Query buffer :[00]
]
]
F1 ACCEPT
2D MATRIX
1:
USER
TOOL
Title:
[
User Text: [
Clear user:
Save in Query buffer :[00]
]
]
F1 ACCEPT
2D MATRIX
1:
USER
TOOL
Title:
[
User Text: [
Clear user:
Save in Query buffer :[00]
]
]
F1 ACCEPT
If disabled, the system keeps the user-text in the
field until it is manually cleared or edited, until the
pattern is closed, or until the controller is powered
off. See Save in Query Buffer parameter (below) for more information on retaining user-supplied text.
Press ENTER to toggle the option OFF or ON.
⌧ indicates the user-supplied text will be cleared.
indicates the user-supplied text will be retained.
Press TAB to select the Save in Query Buffer
parameter.
2D MATRIX
The Save in Query Buffer parameter allows you to
save the user-supplied text in one of the query text
buffers. This retains the data when it would
normally be cleared by the system.
Type the number of the query text buffer (01… 20)
where you wish to store the data.
Note: Entering 00 effectively disables the save
feature (i.e., the user-text will not be saved).
2-28
Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
34700D.DOC
1:
USER
TOOL
Title:
[
User Text: [
Clear user:
Save in Query buffer :[00]
F1 ACCEPT
]
]
TMC470 Controller Operation
The fifth page contains the Tool parameters.
Verify the cursor is on the Printable parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
2D MATRIX
The Printable parameter allows you enable or disable
printing for this 2D symbol.
Printable: ⌧
1:
USER
TOOL
Theta mode:
Disabled
Index
Press ENTER to toggle the option OFF or ON.
⌧ indicates this 2D matrix will be printed.
indicates this 2D matrix will not be printed.
F1 ACCEPT
Press TAB to select the Theta mode parameter.
Note: The Theta mode parameter will be available
only if your system has the optional Theta
axis enabled.
The Theta mode parameter defines how the system
will rotate the drive fixture to print the 2D matrix.
Disabled tells omit the system to ignore the Theta
print mode for this matrix symbol.
2D MATRIX
1:
USER
TOOL
Printable: ⌧
Theta mode:
Disabled
Index
F1 ACCEPT
Index mode is typically used to mark flat surfaces
on square or hexagonal parts (e.g., sides of bolt
heads). In Index mode, the system does not rotate
the Theta-axis while marking. Instead, it rotates the Theta-axis to index the side of the part, then marks.
Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key to select the desired Theta mode, then press ENTER.
After all 2D matrix parameters are defined, press F1 (ACCEPT) to save the settings.
34700D.DOC
2-29
TMC470 Controller Operation
2.6.3 QR Code Symbol
A QR Code object allows you to define a text message, encode it as a two-dimensional, machine-readable symbol, and
print it as part of your pattern. The QR Code symbol is created using encoding algorithms based on the International
Standard ISO/IEC 18004. The QR Code Editor Screen provides several parameters for defining and formatting the encoded
message.
Key Point…
Ensure the pattern you wish to edit is open (loaded).
Before you begin editing the pattern, we suggest you place the machine online (F3, F1).
With the machine online, the Design Jog feature will be readily available to assist in defining the field location.
See Design Considerations for details. If you’re new to the process of designing patterns and adding fields, please
take a few minutes and review that section for an overview of key design concepts.
To add a QR code symbol to the pattern:
From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen, press
F2 (EDIT).
The system will display the Edit Menu.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
Press F7 to toggle the TOOL selection to QR CODE.
Press F1 (TOOL) to add the QR code to the pattern.
The system will display the QR Code Editor Screen
for you to define the field. The parameters are
displayed on five separate pages (QR Code, Type,
Params, User, and Tool). The
symbol on the top
line indicates additional pages are available.
]
]
]
]
]
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online
– Pattern:SAMPLE_05
F1:TOOL
F7:<QR CODE >:000
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
F2:COMMAND
F3:CUT
F4:COPY
F5:PASTE
F6:ADJUST
F8:<GOTO
>
]
]
]
]
]
The first page contains the QR Code parameters.
Verify the cursor is on the QR code parameter. If not,
press TAB to select it.
QR CODE
1: QRCODE
TYPE
PARAMS
The QR code parameter defines what information
will be encoded into the symbol. It may include
QRcode:[
]
X: [ 3.0000]in
X Just: < Left >
uppercase characters, certain keyboard symbols,
Y: [ 6.0000]in
Y Just: < Top >
blank spaces, and special message flags. The content
θ : [ 0.0000 ]°
Angle: [ 0.000]°
of the text string will require you to set the Mode
parameter (below) to match the type of characters
F1 ACCEPT
in the string. Additionally, the combination of the
Mode parameter selection and the length of the text
string will affect the geometric construction of the
resulting symbol (e.g., 21x21, 25x25, 29x29, etc.).
The maximum number of characters that may be encoded in any Telesis QR Code symbol is 160. See QR Code
Limitations for details.
Message flags may be used to insert real-time data into the printed message (e.g., dates, time, codes, serial
numbers, etc.). See Codes and Real-time Data for details.
Special characters, like control characters (e.g., EOT) and language phonetic symbols (e.g., ö), may also be
entered into the text string. Refer to Special Keys – Control Characters (Chapter 1) for details.
2-30
Type the desired data into the QR code box.
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
QR Code Symbol Parameters (continued)
Press TAB to select the X (or Y or θ) parameter.
Note: The Theta (θ) parameter will be available only
if your system has the optional Theta axis
enabled.
The values in the adjacent boxes identify the axis
coordinates where the QR code symbol will be
anchored in the marking window.
QR CODE
1: QRCODE
QRcode:[
X: [ 3.0000]in
Y: [ 6.0000]in
θ : [ 0.0000 ]°
TYPE
PARAMS
]
X Just: < Left >
Y Just: < Top >
Angle: [ 0.000]°
F1 ACCEPT
Do one of the following:
•
Press the JOG key
and use the Design Jog
feature to interactively position the marker and
identify the anchor location.
•
Enter the specific axis coordinate in each axis box.
or
Key Point…
Avoid placing the QR code symbol too close to the marking window boundary.
To improve the quality of the mark, the marker may extend beyond the edge of the symbol
before it returns to print the next column of dots. Usually two pixel spaces (about 2½ times
the dot diameter) between the window boundary and the top or bottom edge of the symbol
is sufficient to avoid errors. See Spacing parameter and Overshoot parameter for details on
pixel spacing.
Press TAB to select the X Just parameter.
The X Just parameter defines how the symbol will
be aligned at the X-axis coordinate. See illustration.
Press ENTER until the desired X-axis justification is
displayed (Left, Center, or Right).
Press TAB to select the Y Just parameter.
QR CODE
1: QRCODE
QRcode:[
X: [ 3.0000]in
Y: [ 6.0000]in
θ : [ 0.0000 ]°
TYPE
PARAMS
]
X Just: < Left >
Y Just: < Top >
Angle: [ 0.000]°
F1 ACCEPT
The Y Just parameter defines how the symbol will
be aligned at the Y-axis coordinate.
Press ENTER until the desired Y-axis justification is
displayed (Top, Middle, or Bottom).
34700D.DOC
2-31
TMC470 Controller Operation
QR Code Symbol Parameters (continued)
Press TAB to select the Angle parameter.
The Angle parameter allows you to rotate the
symbol in a counterclockwise direction. Note that
an angle of 0° indicates no rotation. See
illustration.
Enter the rotation (degrees) in the Angle box.
QR CODE
QRcode:[
X: [ 3.0000]in
Y: [ 6.0000]in
θ : [ 0.0000 ]°
TYPE
PARAMS
]
X Just: < Left >
Y Just: < Top >
Angle: [ 0.000]°
F1 ACCEPT
The symbol always pivots on its anchor point. Since
the X/Y Just parameters determine the anchor
point, they have a significant impact on how the
rotated symbol will appear. See illustration.
1: QRCODE
Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
The second page contains the Type parameters.
Verify the cursor is on the Mode parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
QR CODE
The Mode parameter identifies the type of
characters contained in the text string. The formats
and their allowable characters are:
NUMERIC
numeric data 0-9
A-Z 0-9 space $ * % + – . / :
2-32
< NUMERIC
<SPACING>
[ 0.5000]in
[ 0.0200]in
TYPE
>
F1 ACCEPT
ALPHANUMERIC uppercase alphanumeric data
8_BIT
Mode
:
Method :
Size
:
Spacing:
1: QRCODE
(user defined) The data is encoded at 8bits per characters. Note: This mode
must be selected to encode Extended
ASCII characters
Press ENTER until the desired mode is displayed.
34700D.DOC
PARAMS
EC Level: <L>
Version : [ 0]
TMC470 Controller Operation
QR Code Symbol Parameters (continued)
Press TAB to select the EC Level parameter.
QR CODE
The EC Level (error correction) parameter lets
you select one of four error correction levels.
Mode
:
Each level provides a specific degree of recovery
Method :
that allows the symbol to withstand damage
Size
:
without the loss of data. The system generates
Spacing:
error correction code words that are embedded in
the symbol. The code words can correct erasures
(invalid code words at known locations) and
errors (invalid code words at unknown locations).
Higher error correction levels generate more code
words. This creates more overhead for the symbol
and may require a larger symbol format to encode the data.
1: QRCODE
< NUMERIC
<SPACING>
[ 0.5000]in
[ 0.0200]in
TYPE
>
PARAMS
EC Level: <L>
Version : [ 0]
F1 ACCEPT
The EC Level selections and their corresponding recovery capacities are listed below:
L
7% recovery capacity
M
15% recovery capacity
Q
25% recovery capacity
H
30% recovery capacity
Press ENTER until the desired EC Level setting is displayed.
Press TAB to select the Method parameter.
The Method parameter defines how the system will construct the symbol.
Spacing allows you to specify the pixel spacing of
the dots that make up the symbol.
QR CODE
Size allows you to specify the height of the
printed symbol.
Press ENTER until the desired construction method
is displayed.
Note: Depending on the selected Method, the
system
will use either the Spacing parameter value
or
the Size parameter value, as applicable.
Refer to the following explanations for details.
34700D.DOC
Mode
:
Method :
Size
:
Spacing:
1: QRCODE
< NUMERIC
<SPACING>
[ 0.5000]in
[ 0.0200]in
TYPE
>
PARAMS
EC Level: <L>
Version : [ 0]
F1 ACCEPT
2-33
TMC470 Controller Operation
QR Code Symbol Parameters (continued)
Key Point…
Successful reading of the QR Code symbol is
critically dependent on its printed construction.
Optimally, the dots that make up the symbol should
almost touch. Proper construction requires a special
relationship between the diameter of the printed dot
and the spacing between the printed dots.
QR CODE
Mode
:
Method :
Size
:
Spacing:
1: QRCODE
< NUMERIC
<SPACING>
[ 0.5000]in
[ 0.0200]in
TYPE
>
F1 ACCEPT
Do one of the following:
•
Define the Size. Press TAB to select the Size
parameter, then enter the size dimension.
The Size parameter defines the height of the
printed symbol as measured from the center of
the lowest pixel to the center of the highest pixel.
See illustration.
The system automatically calculates the pixel
spacing of the dots and the width of the printed
symbol, rounding off the actual values based on
the resolution of the marker
or
•
Define the Spacing. Press TAB to select the
Spacing parameter, then enter the spacing
dimension.
The Spacing parameter defines the specific pixel
spacing of the dots that make up the symbol.
See illustration.
If you know the diameter of the printed dot,
set the spacing equal to 125% of the dot
diameter. The system will round off the
actual spacing value based on the resolution
of the marker.
2-34
34700D.DOC
PARAMS
EC Level: <L>
Version : [ 0]
TMC470 Controller Operation
QR Code Symbol Parameters (continued)
Press TAB to select the Version parameter.
The Version parameter allows you to define the
physical construction of the symbol. Each selection
corresponds to a specific QR Code version that
determines the number of rows and columns in the
symbol where:
0 = auto *
14 = 73x73
28 = 129x129
1 = 21x21
15 = 77x77
29 = 133x133
2 = 25x25
16 = 81x81
30 = 137x137
3 = 29x29
17 = 85x85
31 = 141x141
4 = 33x33
18 = 89x89
32 = 145x145
5 = 37x37
19 = 93x93
33 = 149x149
6 = 41x41
20 = 97x97
34 = 153x153
7 = 45x45
21 = 101x101
35 = 157x157
8 = 49x49
22 = 105x105
36 = 165x165
9 = 53x53
23 = 109x109
37 = 165x165
10 = 57x57
24 = 113x113
38 = 169x169
11 = 61x61
25 = 117x117
39 = 173x173
12 = 65x65
26 = 121x121
40 = 177x177
13 = 69x69
27 = 125x125
* Note:
QR CODE
Mode
:
Method :
Size
:
Spacing:
1: QRCODE
< NUMERIC
<SPACING>
[ 0.5000]in
[ 0.0200]in
TYPE
>
PARAMS
EC Level: <L>
Version : [ 0]
F1 ACCEPT
If the Version parameter is set to 0 (zero), the system
will create the smallest possible symbol based on the type of
characters and the number if characters in the text string.
The Version parameter only allows you to increase the number of rows and columns of the symbol. If you select
a version that is too small to properly encode the string, the system will automatically override your selection
and create the smallest possible symbol based on the given data.
For example, suppose the system determines your message should print as an 29x29 symbol.
•
If you set the Version parameter to 0, the system will use smallest possible size (in this case, 29x29).
•
You could set the Version to any value greater than 3. The system will force the same encoded information
to print at the larger version you specified (i.e., 33x33, 37x37, 41x41, 45x45… etc.).
•
If you set the Version parameter to 1 or 2, the system will override your selection since it would be too small
to encode the date. Instead, it would use smallest possible size (in this case, 29x29).
Enter the desired format (0 through 40) in the Version text box.
Refer to QR Code Limitations for the maximum number of characters each version may encode.
34700D.DOC
2-35
TMC470 Controller Operation
QR Code Symbol Parameters (continued)
QR Code Symbol Limitations. The maximum number of characters that a QR Code symbol may encode is limited by
the following factors.
• the physical construction of the symbol (see Version parameter)
• the type of characters encoded (see Mode parameter)
• the level of error correction (see EC Level parameter).
The following table lists the maximum number of characters each QR Code version may encode for each character set
(Numeric, Alphanumeric, and 8_Bit).
NOTICE
Data in this chart is based on symbols using the lowest error correction level (L) which allows the
maximum amount of encoded data. For each symbol version, the encoded data capacity decreases as
the error correction level increases.
Maximum Characters – QR Code Symbols
Maximum Number of Encoded Characters
Version
Rows x Columns
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
*
21 x 21
25 x 25
29 x 29
33 x 33
37 x 37
41 x 41
45 x 45
49 x 49
53 x 53
57 x 57
61 x 61
65 x 65
69 x 69
73 x 73
77 x 77
81 x 81
85 x 85
89 x 89
93 x 93
97 x 97
101 x 101
105 x 105
109 x 109
113 x 113
117 x 117
121 x 121
125 x 125
129 x 129
133 x 133
137 x 137
141 x 141
145 x 145
149 x 149
153 x 153
157 x 157
161 x 161
165 x 165
169 x 169
173 x 173
177 x 177
Numeric
160**
41
77
127
187
255
322
370
461
552
652
772
883
1,022
1,101
1,250
1,408
1,548
1,725
1,903
2,061
2,232
2,409
2,620
2,812
3,057
3,283
3,517
3,669
3,909
4,158
4,417
4,686
4,965
5,253
5,529
5,836
6,153
6,479
6,743
7,089
Alphanumeric
160**
25
47
77
114
154
195
224
279
335
395
468
535
619
667
758
854
938
1,046
1,153
1,249
1,352
1,460
1,588
1,704
1,853
1,990
2,132
2,223
2,369
2,520
2,677
2,840
3,009
3,183
3,351
3,537
3,729
3,927
4,087
4,269
8_Bit
160**
17
32
53
78
106
134
154
192
230
271
321
367
425
458
520
586
644
718
792
858
929
1,003
1,091
1,171
1,273
1,367
1,465
1,528
1,628
1,732
1,840
1,952
2,068
2,188
2,303
2,431
2,563
2,699
2,809
2,953
** The system automatically creates the smallest possible symbol based on mode and content.
** The maximum number of characters that may be encoded in any Telesis QR Code symbol is 160.
2-36
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
QR Code Symbol Parameters (continued)
Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
The third page (PARAMS) contains parameters that define how the QR code symbol will be printed. See illustration.
Verify the cursor is on the BiDirectional parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
When bidirectional printing is enabled, the system
prints the symbol in two directions, just as it would
for any other object. This is a faster, but less
accurate, method of printing the symbol.
QR CODE
1: QRCODE
BiDirectional
Overshoot :
Speed Rate:
When bidirectional printing is disabled (the
default), the system prints the symbol in one
direction only. This is a much more accurate, but
slower, method of printing the symbol.
[2
<
TYPE
PARAMS
]
>:100
F1 ACCEPT
Press ENTER to toggle the option ON or OFF.
indicates BiDirectional mode is disabled.
⌧ indicates BiDirectional mode is enabled.
Press TAB to select the Overshoot parameter
The Overshoot parameter defines how far the
marker will extend beyond the edge of the symbol
before it returns to print the next portion of the
symbol. See illustration.
Overshooting allows the marker to come up to
speed before it begins to mark again after
changing directions.
QR CODE
1: QRCODE
BiDirectional
Overshoot :
Speed Rate:
[2
<
TYPE
PARAMS
]
>:100
F1 ACCEPT
This allows for a more consistent mark and may
prevent pixels from "bunching up" at the beginning
of the row or column. However, it will require more
time to mark the symbol when the overshoot feature
is used.
The overshoot parameter specifies an overshoot
factor based on the constructed size of the symbol.
Enter the desired overshoot factor (0 through 10).
Key Point…
If the value of the Overshoot parameter would
cause the marker to move beyond the limits of the
marking window, the system will issue an error
message when you test the pattern or attempt to
print the pattern.
34700D.DOC
2-37
TMC470 Controller Operation
QR Code Symbol Parameters (continued)
Press TAB to select the Speed Rate parameter.
The Speed Rate parameter controls the printing speed and the maximum (large move) speed for this QR code
symbol only. The speed setting is independent for each symbol. It does not affect any other printable field in the
pattern, including other QR code symbols.
NOTICE
The selected speed rate is relative to the overall marker speed.
If you set the symbol printing speed rate to 100%, the system will use the same
printing speed and the same maximum speed as defined for the marker. Refer to
Marker Properties (Chapter 3). If you set the symbol printing speed rate to 50%,
the system will print the symbol at ½ the marker-defined printing speed and
execute large moves for the symbol at ½ the marker-defined maximum speed.
Press ENTER to increase the speed rate.
Press CTRL + ENTER to decrease the speed rate.
QR CODE
The pointer indicates the selected speed from
10% to 100%.
Higher rates will result in faster marking times.
Slower rates will result in slower marking times,
but will improve the quality of the printed symbol.
2-38
Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
34700D.DOC
1: QRCODE
BiDirectional
Overshoot :
Speed Rate:
[2
<
TYPE
PARAMS
]
F1 ACCEPT
>:100
TMC470 Controller Operation
QR Code Symbol Parameters (continued)
The fourth page contains the User parameters.
The User parameters are used by the system only when the QR Code field contains a variable text flag. The flag (%#V
or %#v) allows users to enter text into the field while the system is in Operator mode.
Verify the cursor is on the Title parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
QR CODE
The Title parameter defines a label that will be
displayed next to the box where the user enters
data. The label can help identify what type of data
the user is to enter.
Type in the desired text to define a title for the field.
Press TAB to select the User Text parameter.
The User Text parameter allows you to define a
default text string for the variable text. The default
string will reside in the field until actual usersupplied text is entered, until the pattern is closed,
or until the controller is powered off. See Save in
Query Buffer parameter (below) for more
information on retaining user-supplied text.
Type in the desired text to define the default string.
Press TAB to select the Clear User parameter.
The Clear User parameter determines how the
system handles the user-supplied data after the
print cycle is complete.
If enabled, the system will clear (delete) the usertext from the field after the pattern prints. If
another print cycle is attempted with the user text
field empty, the system will prompt the user for
new data before it starts the print cycle.
1:
USER
TOOL
Title:
[
User Text: [
Clear user:
Save in Query buffer :[00]
]
]
F1 ACCEPT
QR CODE
1:
USER
TOOL
Title:
[
User Text: [
Clear user:
Save in Query buffer :[00]
]
]
F1 ACCEPT
QR CODE
1:
USER
TOOL
Title:
[
User Text: [
Clear user:
Save in Query buffer :[00]
]
]
F1 ACCEPT
If disabled, the system keeps the user-text in the
field until it is manually cleared or edited, until the
pattern is closed, or until the controller is powered
off. See Save in Query Buffer parameter (below) for more information on retaining user-supplied text.
Press ENTER to toggle the option OFF or ON.
⌧ indicates the user-supplied text will be cleared.
indicates the user-supplied text will be retained.
Press TAB to select the Save in Query Buffer
parameter.
QR CODE
The Save in Query Buffer parameter allows you to
save the user-supplied text in one of the query text
buffers. This retains the data when it would
normally be cleared by the system.
Type the number of the query text buffer (01… 20)
where you wish to store the data.
1:
USER
TOOL
Title:
[
User Text: [
Clear user:
Save in Query buffer :[00]
]
]
F1 ACCEPT
Note: Entering 00 effectively disables the save
feature (i.e., the user-text will not be saved).
Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
34700D.DOC
2-39
TMC470 Controller Operation
QR Code Symbol Parameters (continued)
The fifth page contains the Tool parameters.
Verify the cursor is on the Printable parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
QR CODE
The Printable parameter allows you enable or disable
printing for this QR code symbol.
Printable: ⌧
Press ENTER to toggle the option OFF or ON.
⌧ indicates this QR code symbol will be printed.
indicates this QR code symbol will not be printed.
Press TAB to select the Theta mode parameter.
Note: The Theta mode parameter will be available
only if your system has the optional Theta
axis enabled.
The Theta mode parameter defines how the system
will rotate the drive fixture to print the symbol.
Disabled tells omit the system to ignore the Theta
print mode for this symbol.
1:
USER
TOOL
Theta mode:
Disabled
Index
F1 ACCEPT
QR CODE
1:
USER
TOOL
Printable: ⌧
Theta mode:
Disabled
Index
F1 ACCEPT
Index mode is typically used to mark flat surfaces
on square or hexagonal parts (e.g., sides of bolt
heads). In Index mode, the system does not rotate
the Theta-axis while marking. Instead, it rotates the Theta-axis to index the side of the part, then marks.
Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key to select the desired Theta mode, then press ENTER.
After all QR Code symbol parameters are defined, press F1 (ACCEPT) to save the settings.
2-40
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
2.6.4 MicroQR Code Symbol
A MicroQR Code object allows you to define a text message, encode it as a two-dimensional, machine-readable symbol,
and print it as part of your pattern. The MicroQR Code symbol is created using encoding algorithms based on the
International Standard ISO/IEC 18004. The MicroQR Code Editor Screen provides several parameters for defining and
formatting the encoded message.
Key Point…
Ensure the pattern you wish to edit is open (loaded).
Before you begin editing the pattern, we suggest you place the machine online (F3, F1).
With the machine online, the Design Jog feature will be readily available to assist in defining the field location.
See Design Considerations for details. If you’re new to the process of designing patterns and adding fields, please
take a few minutes and review that section for an overview of key design concepts.
To add a MicroQR Code symbol to the pattern:
From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen, press
F2 (EDIT).
The system will display the Edit Menu.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
Press F7 to toggle the TOOL selection to MICRO QR.
Press F1 (TOOL) to add the MicroQR Code to the
pattern.
]
]
]
]
]
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online
– Pattern:SAMPLE_05
F1:TOOL
F7:<MICRO QR >:000
The system will display the MicroQR Code Editor
Screen for you to define the field. The parameters
are displayed on five separate pages (MicroQR,
Type, Params, User, and Tool). The
symbol on
the top line indicates additional pages are available.
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
F2:COMMAND
F3:CUT
F4:COPY
F5:PASTE
F6:ADJUST
F8:<GOTO
>
]
]
]
]
]
The first page contains the Micro QR Code
parameters.
Verify the cursor is on the MicroQR parameter. If not,
press TAB to select it.
MICRO QR
1: MICROQR TYPE
PARAMS
The MicroQR parameter defines what information
will be encoded into the symbol. It may include
MicroQR:[
]
X: [ 3.0000]in
X Just: < Left >
uppercase characters, certain keyboard symbols,
Y: [ 6.0000]in
Y Just: < Top >
blank spaces, and special message flags. The content
θ : [ 0.0000 ]°
Angle: [ 0.000]°
of the text string will require you to set the Mode
parameter (below) to match the type of characters
F1 ACCEPT
in the string. Additionally, the combination of the
Mode parameter selection and the length of the text
string will affect the geometric construction of the
resulting symbol (e.g., 11x11, 13x13, 15x15, or
17x17). The maximum number of characters that may be encoded in any Telesis MicroQR Code symbol is 35. See
MicroQR Code Limitations for details.
Message flags may be used to insert real-time data into the printed message (e.g., dates, time, codes, serial
numbers, etc.). See Codes and Real-time Data for details.
Special characters, like control characters (e.g., EOT) and language phonetic symbols (e.g., ö), may also be
entered into the text string. Refer to Special Keys – Control Characters (Chapter 1) for details.
Type the desired data into the MicroQR box.
34700D.DOC
2-41
TMC470 Controller Operation
MicroQR Code Symbol Parameters (continued)
Press TAB to select the X (or Y or θ) parameter.
Note: The Theta (θ) parameter will be available only
if your system has the optional Theta axis
enabled.
The values in the adjacent boxes identify the axis
coordinates where the MicroQR Code symbol will be
anchored in the marking window.
MICRO QR
1: MICROQR
MicroQR[
X: [ 3.0000]in
Y: [ 6.0000]in
θ : [ 0.0000 ]°
TYPE
PARAMS
]
X Just: < Left >
Y Just: < Top >
Angle: [ 0.000]°
F1 ACCEPT
Do one of the following:
•
Press the JOG key
and use the Design Jog
feature to interactively position the marker and
identify the anchor location.
•
Enter the specific axis coordinate in each axis box.
or
Key Point…
Avoid placing the MicroQR Code symbol too close to the marking window boundary.
To improve the quality of the mark, the marker may extend beyond the edge of the symbol
before it returns to print the next column of dots. Usually two pixel spaces (about 2½ times
the dot diameter) between the window boundary and the top or bottom edge of the symbol
is sufficient to avoid errors. See Spacing parameter and Overshoot parameter for details on
pixel spacing.
Press TAB to select the X Just parameter.
The X Just parameter defines how the symbol will
be aligned at the X-axis coordinate. See illustration.
Press ENTER until the desired X-axis justification is
displayed (Left, Center, or Right).
Press TAB to select the Y Just parameter.
2-42
1: MICROQR
MicroQR[
X: [ 3.0000]in
Y: [ 6.0000]in
θ : [ 0.0000 ]°
TYPE
Press ENTER until the desired Y-axis justification is
displayed (Top, Middle, or Bottom).
34700D.DOC
PARAMS
]
X Just: < Left >
Y Just: < Top >
Angle: [ 0.000]°
F1 ACCEPT
The Y Just parameter defines how the symbol will
be aligned at the Y-axis coordinate.
MICRO QR
TMC470 Controller Operation
MicroQR Code Symbol Parameters (continued)
Press TAB to select the Angle parameter.
The Angle parameter allows you to rotate the
symbol in a counterclockwise direction. Note that
an angle of 0° indicates no rotation. See
illustration.
Enter the rotation (degrees) in the Angle box.
MICRO QR
MicroQR[
X: [ 3.0000]in
Y: [ 6.0000]in
θ : [ 0.0000 ]°
TYPE
PARAMS
]
X Just: < Left >
Y Just: < Top >
Angle: [ 0.000]°
F1 ACCEPT
The symbol always pivots on its anchor point. Since
the X/Y Just parameters determine the anchor
point, they have a significant impact on how the
rotated symbol will appear. See illustration.
1: MICROQR
Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
The second page contains the Type parameters.
Verify the cursor is on the Mode parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
MICRO QR
The Mode parameter identifies the type of
characters contained in the text string. The formats
and their allowable characters are:
NUMERIC
numeric data 0-9
Mode
:
Method :
Size
:
Spacing:
1: MICROQR
<
NUMERIC
<SPACING>
[ 0.5000]in
[ 0.0200]in
TYPE
>
PARAMS
EC Level: <L>
Version : [ 0]
F1 ACCEPT
ALPHANUMERIC uppercase alphanumeric data
A-Z 0-9 space $ * % + – . / :
8_BIT
(user defined) The data is encoded at 8bits per characters. Note: This mode
must be selected to encode Extended
ASCII characters
Press ENTER until the desired mode is displayed.
34700D.DOC
2-43
TMC470 Controller Operation
MicroQR Code Symbol Parameters (continued)
Press TAB to select the EC Level parameter.
MICRO QR
The EC Level (error correction) parameter lets
you select one of three error correction levels.
Mode
:
Each level provides a specific degree of recovery
Method :
that allows the symbol to withstand damage
Size
:
without the loss of data. The system generates
Spacing:
error correction code words that are embedded in
the symbol. The code words can correct erasures
(invalid code words at known locations) and
errors (invalid code words at unknown locations).
Higher error correction levels generate more code
words. This creates more overhead for the symbol
and may require a larger symbol format to encode the data.
1: MICROQR
<
NUMERIC
<SPACING>
[ 0.5000]in
[ 0.0200]in
TYPE
>
PARAMS
EC Level: <L>
Version : [ 0]
F1 ACCEPT
The EC Level selections and their corresponding recovery capacities are listed below:
L
7% recovery capacity
M
15% recovery capacity
Q
25% recovery capacity
Press ENTER until the desired EC Level setting is displayed.
Press TAB to select the Method parameter.
The Method parameter defines how the system will construct the symbol.
Spacing allows you to specify the pixel spacing of the dots that make up the symbol.
Size allows you to specify the height of the
printed symbol.
Press ENTER until the desired construction method
is displayed.
Note: Depending on the selected Method, the
system will use either the Spacing
parameter value or the Size parameter
value, as applicable. Refer to the following
explanations for details.
2-44
34700D.DOC
MICRO QR
Mode
:
Method :
Size
:
Spacing:
1: MICROQR
<
NUMERIC
<SPACING>
[ 0.5000]in
[ 0.0200]in
TYPE
>
F1 ACCEPT
PARAMS
EC Level: <L>
Version : [ 0]
TMC470 Controller Operation
MicroQR Code Symbol Parameters (continued)
Key Point…
Successful reading of the MicroQR Code symbol is
critically dependent on its printed construction.
Optimally, the dots that make up the symbol should
almost touch. Proper construction requires a special
relationship between the diameter of the printed dot
and the spacing between the printed dots.
MICRO QR
Mode
:
Method :
Size
:
Spacing:
1: MICROQR
<
NUMERIC
<SPACING>
[ 0.5000]in
[ 0.0200]in
TYPE
>
PARAMS
EC Level: <L>
Version : [ 0]
F1 ACCEPT
Do one of the following:
•
Define the Size. Press TAB to select the Size
parameter, then enter the size dimension.
The Size parameter defines the height of the
printed symbol as measured from the center of
the lowest pixel to the center of the highest pixel.
See illustration.
The system automatically calculates the pixel
spacing of the dots and the width of the printed
symbol, rounding off the actual values based on
the resolution of the marker
or
•
Define the Spacing. Press TAB to select the
Spacing parameter, then enter the spacing
dimension.
The Spacing parameter defines the specific pixel
spacing of the dots that make up the symbol.
See illustration.
If you know the diameter of the printed dot,
set the spacing equal to 125% of the dot
diameter. The system will round off the
actual spacing value based on the resolution
of the marker.
34700D.DOC
2-45
TMC470 Controller Operation
MicroQR Code Symbol Parameters (continued)
Press TAB to select the Version parameter.
The Version parameter allows you to define the
physical construction of the symbol. Each selection
corresponds to a specific MicroQR Code version
that determines the number of rows and columns
in the symbol where:
0
1
2
3
4
=
=
=
=
=
auto*
11x11
13x13
15x15
17x17
* Note:
MICRO QR
Mode
:
Method :
Size
:
Spacing:
1: MICROQR
<
NUMERIC
<SPACING>
[ 0.5000]in
[ 0.0200]in
TYPE
>
PARAMS
EC Level: <L>
Version : [ 0]
F1 ACCEPT
If the Version parameter is set to 0 (zero), the system
will create the smallest possible symbol based on the type of
characters and the number if characters in the text string.
The Version parameter only allows you to increase the number of rows and columns of the symbol. If you select
a version that is too small to properly encode the string, the system will automatically override your selection
and create the smallest possible symbol based on the given data.
For example, suppose the system determines your message should print as an 13x13 symbol.
•
•
If you set the Version parameter to 0, the system will use smallest possible size (in this case, 13x13).
•
If you set the Version parameter to 1, the system will override your selection since it would be too small to
encode the date. Instead, it would use smallest possible size (in this case, 13x13).
You could set the Version to any value greater than 2. The system will force the same encoded information
to print at the larger version you specified (i.e., 15x15 or 17x17).
Refer to MicroQR Code Limitations for the maximum number of characters each version may encode.
Enter the desired format (0 through 4) in the Version text box.
Refer to MicroQR Code Limitations for the maximum number of characters each version may encode.
2-46
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
MicroQR Code Symbol Parameters (continued)
MicroQR Code Symbol Limitations. The maximum number of characters that a MicroQR Code symbol may encode is
limited by the following factors.
• the physical construction of the symbol (see Version parameter)
• the type of characters encoded (see Mode parameter)
• the level of error correction (see EC Level parameter).
The following table lists the maximum number of characters each MicroQR Code version may encode for each character
set (Numeric, Alphanumeric, and 8_Bit).
NOTICE
Data in this chart is based on symbols using the lowest error correction level (L) which allows the
maximum amount of encoded data. For each symbol version, the encoded data capacity decreases as
the error correction level increases.
Maximum Characters – MicroQR Code Symbols
Maximum Number of Encoded Characters
Version
0
Rows x Columns
Numeric
Alphanumeric
8_Bit
*
35**
21
15
1***
11 x 11
5
–
–
2
13 x 13
10
6
–
3
15 x 15
23
14
9
4
17 x 17
35
21
15
*** The system automatically creates the smallest possible symbol based on mode and content.
*** The maximum number of characters that may be encoded in any MicroQR Code symbol is 35.
*** EC Level (error correction level) = Error Detection only.
34700D.DOC
2-47
TMC470 Controller Operation
MicroQR Code Symbol Parameters (continued)
Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
The third page (PARAMS) contains parameters that define how the MicroQR Code symbol will be printed. See
illustration.
Verify the cursor is on the BiDirectional parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
When bidirectional printing is enabled, the system
prints the symbol in two directions, just as it would
for any other object. This is a faster, but less
accurate, method of printing the symbol.
MICRO QR
1: MICROQR
BiDirectional
Overshoot :
Speed Rate:
When bidirectional printing is disabled (the
default), the system prints the symbol in one
direction only. This is a much more accurate, but
slower, method of printing the symbol.
[2
<
TYPE
PARAMS
]
>:100
F1 ACCEPT
Press ENTER to toggle the option ON or OFF.
indicates BiDirectional mode is disabled.
⌧ indicates BiDirectional mode is enabled.
Press TAB to select the Overshoot parameter
The Overshoot parameter defines how far the
marker will extend beyond the edge of the symbol
before it returns to print the next portion of the
symbol. See illustration.
Overshooting allows the marker to come up to
speed before it begins to mark again after
changing directions.
The overshoot parameter specifies an overshoot
factor based on the constructed size of the symbol.
Enter the desired overshoot factor (0 through 10).
Key Point…
If the value of the Overshoot parameter would
cause the marker to move beyond the limits of the
marking window, the system will issue an error
message when you test the pattern or attempt to
print the pattern.
2-48
1: MICROQR
BiDirectional
Overshoot :
Speed Rate:
[2
<
TYPE
34700D.DOC
PARAMS
]
F1 ACCEPT
This allows for a more consistent mark and may
prevent pixels from "bunching up" at the beginning
of the row or column. However, it will require more
time to mark the symbol when the overshoot feature
is used.
MICRO QR
>:100
TMC470 Controller Operation
MicroQR Code Symbol Parameters (continued)
Press TAB to select the Speed Rate parameter.
The Speed Rate parameter controls the printing speed and the maximum (large move) speed for this MicroQR
Code symbol only. The speed setting is independent for each symbol. It does not affect any other printable field
in the pattern, including other MicroQR Code symbols.
NOTICE
The selected speed rate is relative to the overall marker speed.
If you set the symbol printing speed rate to 100%, the system will use the same
printing speed and the same maximum speed as defined for the marker. Refer to
Marker Properties (Chapter 3). If you set the symbol printing speed rate to 50%,
the system will print the symbol at ½ the marker-defined printing speed and
execute large moves for the symbol at ½ the marker-defined maximum speed.
Press ENTER to increase the speed rate.
Press CTRL + ENTER to decrease the speed rate.
MICRO QR
The pointer indicates the selected speed from
10% to 100%.
Higher rates will result in faster marking times.
Slower rates will result in slower marking times,
but will improve the quality of the printed symbol.
1: MICROQR
BiDirectional
Overshoot :
Speed Rate:
[2
<
TYPE
PARAMS
]
>:100
F1 ACCEPT
Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
34700D.DOC
2-49
TMC470 Controller Operation
MicroQR Code Symbol Parameters (continued)
The fourth page contains the User parameters.
The User parameters are used by the system only when the MicroQR Code field contains a variable text flag. The flag
(%#V or %#v) allows users to enter text into the field while the system is in Operator mode.
Verify the cursor is on the Title parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
MICRO QR
The Title parameter defines a label that will be
displayed next to the box where the user enters
data. The label can help identify what type of data
the user is to enter.
Type in the desired text to define a title for the field.
Press TAB to select the User Text parameter.
The User Text parameter allows you to define a
default text string for the variable text. The default
string will reside in the field until actual usersupplied text is entered, until the pattern is closed,
or until the controller is powered off. See Save in
Query Buffer parameter (below) for more
information on retaining user-supplied text.
Type in the desired text to define the default string.
Press TAB to select the Clear User parameter.
The Clear User parameter determines how the
system handles the user-supplied data after the
print cycle is complete.
If enabled, the system will clear (delete) the usertext from the field after the pattern prints. If
another print cycle is attempted with the user text
field empty, the system will prompt the user for
new data before it starts the print cycle.
1:
USER
TOOL
Title:
[
User Text: [
Clear user:
Save in Query buffer :[00]
]
]
F1 ACCEPT
MICRO QR
1:
USER
TOOL
Title:
[
User Text: [
Clear user:
Save in Query buffer :[00]
]
]
F1 ACCEPT
MICRO QR
1:
USER
TOOL
Title:
[
User Text: [
Clear user:
Save in Query buffer :[00]
]
]
F1 ACCEPT
If disabled, the system keeps the user-text in the
field until it is manually cleared or edited, until the
pattern is closed, or until the controller is powered
off. See Save in Query Buffer parameter (below) for more information on retaining user-supplied text.
Press ENTER to toggle the option OFF or ON.
⌧ indicates the user-supplied text will be cleared.
indicates the user-supplied text will be retained.
Press TAB to select the Save in Query Buffer
parameter.
MICRO QR
The Save in Query Buffer parameter allows you to
save the user-supplied text in one of the query text
buffers. This retains the data when it would
normally be cleared by the system.
Type the number of the query text buffer (01… 20)
where you wish to store the data.
Note: Entering 00 effectively disables the save
feature (i.e., the user-text will not be saved).
2-50
Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
34700D.DOC
1:
USER
TOOL
Title:
[
User Text: [
Clear user:
Save in Query buffer :[00]
F1 ACCEPT
]
]
TMC470 Controller Operation
MicroQR Code Symbol Parameters (continued)
The fifth page contains the Tool parameters.
Verify the cursor is on the Printable parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
MICRO QR
The Printable parameter allows you enable or disable
printing for this MicroQR Code symbol.
Printable: ⌧
Press ENTER to toggle the option OFF or ON.
⌧ indicates this MicroQR Code symbol will be
printed.
indicates this MicroQR Code symbol will not be
printed.
Press TAB to select the Theta mode parameter.
Note: The Theta mode parameter will be available
only if your system has the optional Theta
axis enabled.
The Theta mode parameter defines how the system
will rotate the drive fixture to print the symbol.
Disabled tells omit the system to ignore the Theta
print mode for this symbol.
1:
USER
TOOL
Theta mode:
Disabled
Index
F1 ACCEPT
MICRO QR
1:
USER
TOOL
Printable: ⌧
Theta mode:
Disabled
Index
F1 ACCEPT
Index mode is typically used to mark flat surfaces
on square or hexagonal parts (e.g., sides of bolt
heads). In Index mode, the system does not rotate
the Theta-axis while marking. Instead, it rotates the Theta-axis to index the side of the part, then marks.
Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key to select the desired Theta mode, then press ENTER.
After all MicroQR Code symbol parameters are defined, press F1 (ACCEPT) to save the settings.
34700D.DOC
2-51
TMC470 Controller Operation
2.6.5 Arc (Radius Method)
The marking system software constructs a radius arc using a center location and a radius to define a circular path. It
also uses a start angle and an end angle to define where the arc begins and ends along that circular path.
Key Point…
Ensure the pattern you wish to edit is open (loaded).
Before you begin editing the pattern, we suggest you place the machine online (F3, F1).
With the machine online, the Design Jog feature will be readily available to assist in defining the field location.
See Design Considerations for details. If you’re new to the process of designing patterns and adding fields, please
take a few minutes and review that section for an overview of key design concepts.
To add an arc to the pattern:
From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen,
press F2 (EDIT).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
The system will display the Edit Menu.
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
Press F7 to toggle the TOOL selection to ARC.
Press F1 (TOOL) to add the arc to the pattern.
The system will display the Arc Editor Screen for
you to define the radius arc. The parameters are
displayed on two pages (Arc and Tool).
]
]
]
]
]
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online
– Pattern:SAMPLE_05
F1:TOOL
F7:<ARC
>:000
F2:COMMAND F8:<GOTO
>
001:[
]
F3:CUT
002:[
]
F4:COPY
003:[
]
F5:PASTE
004:[
]
F6:ADJUST
005:[
]
The first page contains the Arc parameters.
Press TAB to select the X (or Y or θ) parameter.
Note: The Theta (θ) parameter will be available only
if your system has the optional Theta axis
enabled.
The values in the adjacent boxes identify the axis
coordinates where the center of the arc will be
anchored in the marking window.
Press the JOG key
and use the Design Jog
feature to interactively position the marker and
identify the center location.
or
•
2-52
1:
ARC
X: [ 6.0000]in
Y: [ 3.0000]in
θ : [ 0.0000 ]°
TOOL
Radius: [ 1.0000]in
Start: [ 0.0000]°
End : [359.000]°
F1 ACCEPT
Do one of the following:
•
ARC
Enter the specific axis coordinate in each axis box.
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
Radius Arc Parameters (continued)
Press TAB to select the Radius parameter.
The Radius parameter defines the size of the arc.
The system constructs a circular path using the
anchor point and radius that you specified. See
illustration.
Ensure the radius is not so large that it will position
the arc outside the available marking window.
Type the desired radius in the box.
Press TAB to select the Start parameter.
ARC
1:
ARC
TOOL
X: [ 6.0000]in
Y: [ 3.0000]in
θ : [ 0.0000 ]°
Radius: [ 1.0000]in
Start: [ 0.0000]°
End : [359.000]°
F1 ACCEPT
The Start and End parameters define where the arc
will begin and end on the circular path. See
illustration.
Angular measurements around the anchor point
begin at the 3 o’clock position (0°) and increase in
the counter-clockwise direction. See illustration.
ARC
1:
ARC
X: [ 6.0000]in
Y: [ 3.0000]in
θ : [ 0.0000 ]°
TOOL
Radius: [ 1.0000]in
Start: [ 0.0000]°
End : [359.000]°
F1 ACCEPT
Key Point…
The relative location of the start and end points
determine whether the arc is convex or concave.
The software always constructs arcs in a counterclockwise (CCW) direction from the start point.
Type the Start angle to identify where the arc will start.
Press TAB to select the End parameter.
Type the End angle to identify where the arc will end.
Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
34700D.DOC
2-53
TMC470 Controller Operation
Radius Arc Parameters (continued)
The second page contains the Tool parameters.
ARC
Verify the cursor is on the Printable parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
ARC
TOOL
Printable: ⌧
The Printable parameter allows you enable or
disable printing for this arc.
1:
Density:[100.00]
Theta mode:
Disabled
Index
Press ENTER to toggle the printable option ON or
OFF.
Perpendicular
F1 ACCEPT
⌧ indicates this arc will be printed.
indicates this arc will not be printed.
Press TAB to select the Density parameter.
The Density parameter is used with Continuous
print mode. It determines the pixel density (e.g.,
dots per inch) the system will use to form the arc.
Higher density values produce a more continuous
appearance but will increase marking time and pin
wear.
ARC
1:
ARC
TOOL
Printable: ⌧
Density:[100.00]
Theta mode:
Disabled
Index
Perpendicular
F1 ACCEPT
Enter the desired pixel density.
Press TAB to select the Theta mode parameter.
Note: The Theta mode parameter will be available
only if your system has the optional Theta
axis enabled.
The Theta mode parameter defines how the system
will rotate the drive fixture to print the arc.
Disabled tells the system to ignore the Theta print
mode for this arc.
Index mode is typically used to mark flat surfaces
on square or hexagonal parts (e.g., sides of bolt
heads). In Index mode, the system does not rotate
the Theta-axis while marking. Instead, it rotates
the Theta-axis to index the side of the part, then marks.
ARC
1:
ARC
TOOL
Printable: ⌧
Density:[100.00]
Theta mode:
Disabled
Index
Perpendicular
F1 ACCEPT
Perpendicular mode is typically used to mark cylindrical parts (e.g., pipe or tubing). In Perpendicular mode, the
system does rotate the Theta-axis while marking. The software substitutes normal movement along the Y-axis
with rotational movement around the Theta-axis. This may result in slower marking times, but provides a high
quality mark since the impact pin is always perpendicular to the marking surface.
Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key to select the desired Theta mode, then press ENTER.
After all radius arc parameters are defined, press F1 (ACCEPT) to save the settings.
2-54
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
2.6.6 Arc 3P (3-point Method)
The marking system software constructs a 3-point arc using a start point, a center point, and an end point to define a
circular path that encompasses all three points. This method of arc construction is simplified when used with the Design
Jog feature to interactively identify the three points.
Key Point…
Ensure the pattern you wish to edit is open (loaded).
Before you begin editing the pattern, we suggest you place the machine online (F3, F1).
With the machine online, the Design Jog feature will be readily available to assist in defining the field location.
See Design Considerations for details. If you’re new to the process of designing patterns and adding fields, please
take a few minutes and review that section for an overview of key design concepts.
To add a 3-point arc to the pattern:
From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen,
press F2 (EDIT).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
The system will display the Edit Menu.
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
Press F7 to toggle the TOOL selection to ARC 3P.
Press F1 (TOOL) to add the arc to the pattern.
The system will display the Arc 3P Editor Screen for
you to define the 3-point arc. The parameters are
displayed on two pages (Arc 3P and Tool).
The first page contains the Arc 3P parameters.
The values in the Start boxes identify the axis
coordinates in the marking window where the arc will
begin. The End boxes identify where the arc will
terminate. The Center boxes identify the midpoint of the
arc. The system uses these three locations to define a
circular path on which it will create the arc.
]
]
]
]
]
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online
– Pattern:SAMPLE_05
F1:TOOL
F7:<ARC 3P
>:000
F2:COMMAND F8:<GOTO
>
001:[
]
F3:CUT
002:[
]
F4:COPY
003:[
]
F5:PASTE
004:[
]
F6:ADJUST
005:[
]
ARC 3P
1:
Start
X:[ 12.00]in
Y:[ 3.00]in
θ :[ 0.000]°
ARC 3P
TOOL
Center
X:[ 6.00]in
Y:[ 4.00]in
End
X:[
Y:[
1.00]in
3.00]in
F1 ACCEPT
Key Point…
The relative location of the start and end points
determine whether the arc is convex or concave. The
software always constructs arcs in a counter-clockwise
(CCW) direction from the start point.
The center point is used to define the circular path, not
necessarily the arc itself. Accordingly, the arc may or may
not pass through the center point, depending on the shape
of the arc.
Note that the start, center, and end points must not be
located in the same horizontal or vertical line. Doing so
would result in an undefined circular path.
34700D.DOC
2-55
TMC470 Controller Operation
3-Point Arc Parameters (continued)
Press TAB to select the Start X (or Y or θ) parameter.
Note: The Theta (θ) parameter will be available
only if your system has the optional Theta
axis enabled.
Do one of the following to define the arc start point:
•
(recommended) Press the JOG key
and use the
Design Jog feature to interactively position the
marker and identify the location.
•
Enter the specific axis coordinate in each axis box.
ARC 3P
1:
Start
X:[ 12.00]in
Y:[ 3.00]in
θ :[ 0.000]°
ARC 3P
TOOL
Center
X:[ 6.00]in
Y:[ 4.00]in
End
X:[
Y:[
1.00]in
3.00]in
End
X:[
Y:[
1.00]in
3.00]in
End
X:[
Y:[
1.00]in
3.00]in
F1 ACCEPT
or
ARC 3P
1:
Start
X:[ 12.00]in
Y:[ 3.00]in
θ :[ 0.000]°
Press TAB to select the End X (or Y) parameter.
Repeat the process (above) to define the arc end
point.
ARC 3P
TOOL
Center
X:[ 6.00]in
Y:[ 4.00]in
F1 ACCEPT
Press TAB to select the Center X (or Y) parameter.
Repeat the process (above) to define the arc center
point.
ARC 3P
1:
Start
X:[ 12.00]in
Y:[ 3.00]in
θ :[ 0.000]°
ARC 3P
TOOL
Center
X:[ 6.00]in
Y:[ 4.00]in
F1 ACCEPT
Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
The second page contains the Tool parameters.
Verify the cursor is on the Printable parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
ARC 3P
The Printable parameter allows you enable or
disable printing for this arc.
ARC 3P
Printable: ⌧
TOOL
Density:[100.00]
Theta mode:
Disabled
Index
Press ENTER to toggle the printable option ON or
OFF.
⌧ indicates this arc will be printed.
Perpendicular
F1 ACCEPT
indicates this arc will not be printed.
2-56
1:
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
3-Point Arc Parameters (continued)
Press TAB to select the Density parameter.
The Density parameter is used with Continuous
print mode. It determines the pixel density (e.g.,
dots per inch) the system will use to form the arc.
Higher density values produce a more continuous
appearance but will increase marking time and pin
wear.
ARC 3P
1:
ARC 3P
Printable: ⌧
TOOL
Density:[100.00]
Theta mode:
Disabled
Index
Perpendicular
F1 ACCEPT
Enter the desired pixel density.
Press TAB to select the Theta mode parameter.
Note: The Theta mode parameter will be available
only if your system has the optional Theta
axis enabled.
The Theta mode parameter defines how the system
will rotate the drive fixture to print the arc.
Disabled tells the system to ignore the Theta print
mode for this arc.
Index mode is typically used to mark flat surfaces
on square or hexagonal parts (e.g., sides of bolt
heads). In Index mode, the system does not rotate
the Theta-axis while marking. Instead, it rotates
the Theta-axis to index the side of the part, then marks.
ARC 3P
1:
ARC 3P
Printable: ⌧
TOOL
Density:[100.00]
Theta mode:
Disabled
Index
Perpendicular
F1 ACCEPT
Perpendicular mode is typically used to mark cylindrical parts (e.g., pipe or tubing). In Perpendicular mode, the
system does rotate the Theta-axis while marking. The software substitutes normal movement along the Y-axis
with rotational movement around the Theta-axis. This may result in slower marking times, but provides a high
quality mark since the impact pin is always perpendicular to the marking surface.
Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key to select the desired Theta mode, then press ENTER.
After all 3-point arc parameters are defined, press F1 (ACCEPT) to save the settings.
34700D.DOC
2-57
TMC470 Controller Operation
2.6.7 ArcText (Radius Method)
The ArcText features allow you to "bend" a text string in your printed message. The ArcText tool combines features of
the Radius Arc tool and the Text tool to define the curved text string. The system constructs the arc text string using a
center location and a radius to define a circular path. It also uses a start angle to define where the arc begins on the
circular path. The ending point is determined by the length of the text string. Most parameters for defining the text
string are the same as for standard text fields. The actual contour of the arc text string is determined by its character
dimensions, font style, and selected shape (convex or concave).
Key Point…
Ensure the pattern you wish to edit is open (loaded).
Before you begin editing the pattern, we suggest you place the machine online (F3, F1).
With the machine online, the Design Jog feature will be readily available to assist in defining the field location.
See Design Considerations for details. If you’re new to the process of designing patterns and adding fields, please
take a few minutes and review that section for an overview of key design concepts.
To add an arc text field to the pattern:
From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen,
press F2 (EDIT).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
The system will display the Edit Menu.
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
Press F7 to toggle the TOOL selection to ARCTEXT.
Press F1 (TOOL) to add the arc text to the pattern.
The system will display the ArcText (Radius) Editor
Screen for you to define the arc text string. The
parameters are displayed on five separate pages
(Text, Font, User, Arc, and Tool). The
symbol on
the top line indicates additional pages are
available.
2-58
34700D.DOC
]
]
]
]
]
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online
– Pattern:SAMPLE_05
F1:TOOL
F7:<ARCTEXT >:000
F2:COMMAND F8:<GOTO
>
001:[
]
F3:CUT
002:[
]
F4:COPY
003:[
]
F5:PASTE
004:[
]
F6:ADJUST
005:[
]
TMC470 Controller Operation
Radius ArcText Parameters (continued)
The first page contains the Text parameters.
Verify the cursor is on the Text parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
ARCTEXT(RADIUS)
The Text parameter defines the content of the
character string. The text string may contain up to
160 characters including uppercase and lowercase
characters, keyboard symbols, blank spaces,
message flags, and special characters.
Text: [
X: [ 6.0000]in
Y: [ 3.0000]in
θ : [ 0.0000 ]°
Message flags may be used to insert real-time
data into the printed message (e.g., dates, time,
codes, serial numbers, etc.). See Codes and
Real-time Data for details.
1:
TEXT
FONT
USER
]
X Just: < Left >
Y Just: < Top >
F1 ACCEPT
Special characters, like control characters (e.g., EOT) and language phonetic symbols (e.g., ö), may be
entered into the text string. Refer to Special Keys – Control Characters (Chapter 1) for details.
Type the desired data into the Text box.
Press TAB to select the X (or Y or θ) parameter.
Note: The Theta (θ) parameter will be available only
if your system has the optional Theta axis
enabled.
The values in the adjacent boxes identify the axis
coordinates where the center of the circular path
will be placed in the marking window.
ARCTEXT(RADIUS)
Text: [
X: [ 6.0000]in
Y: [ 3.0000]in
θ : [ 0.0000 ]°
1:
TEXT
FONT
USER
]
X Just: < Left >
Y Just: < Top >
F1 ACCEPT
Do one of the following:
•
Press the JOG key
and use the Design Jog
feature to interactively position the marker and
identify the center location.
•
Enter the specific axis coordinate in each axis box.
or
34700D.DOC
2-59
TMC470 Controller Operation
Radius ArcText Parameters (continued)
Press TAB to select the X Just parameter.
The X Just parameter defines how the arc text string
will be aligned at the arc text anchor point. See
illustration.
Press ENTER until the desired X-axis justification is
displayed (Left, Center, or Right).
Press TAB to select the Y Just parameter.
The Y Just parameter defines how the arc text string
will be aligned with the curvature of the arc. See
illustration.
ARCTEXT(RADIUS)
Text: [
X: [ 6.0000]in
Y: [ 3.0000]in
θ : [ 0.0000 ]°
1:
TEXT
FONT
USER
]
X Just: < Left >
Y Just: < Top >
F1 ACCEPT
Press ENTER until the desired Y-axis justification is
displayed (Top, Middle, or Bottom).
Key Point…
If you select Top alignment and print special characters with ascenders (e.g., É) the marker will use the top
of the special character as the upper limit and align the other characters accordingly. It will not use the top
of the uppercase characters for alignment.
Similarly, if you select Bottom alignment and print lowercase characters, the marker will use the bottom of
the lowercase descenders (e.g., g) as the lower limit and align the other characters accordingly. It will not
use the bottom of the uppercase characters as the baseline.
2-60
Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
Radius ArcText Parameters (continued)
The second page contains the Font parameters.
ARCTEXT(RADIUS)
Verify the cursor is on the Font parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
The Font parameter defines the character set that
will be used to print the arc text string. It
determines the shape and appearance of the
characters. Refer to Font Selection for details.
Font :
Height:
Width :
Pitch :
<
[
[
[
1:
5x7
>
0.1250]in
0.0830]in
0.1250]in
TEXT
FONT
Print: DOT
USER
CONT
F1 ACCEPT
Press ENTER until the desired font is displayed.
The next three parameters define the physical size of the characters. See illustration.
Height is the distance from the center of the mark at the
top of the character to the center of the mark at the
bottom.
Width is the distance from the center of the mark at the
left of the character to the center of the mark at the right.
Pitch is the distance from the start of one character to
the start of the next character, including the space
between characters.
Press TAB to select the Height parameter.
Key Point…
You can manually enter width and pitch dimensions or have the system automatically calculate them based on
the character height.
Do one of the following:
•
Automatically Set Width & Pitch. Type the
desired height dimension, then press ENTER. The
system will automatically calculate and apply the
width and pitch dimensions based on the height.
or
•
Manually Set Width & Pitch. Type the desired
height dimension, then press TAB. The system will
leave the Width and Pitch dimensions unchanged for
you to define them manually.
Press TAB to select the Print parameter.
Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key to select the
desired print mode, then press ENTER.
The Print parameter defines the mode that will be
used to print the arc text string. See illustration.
Dot marks the characters in a pattern of dots as
defined by the selected font set.
ARCTEXT(RADIUS)
Font :
Height:
Width :
Pitch :
<
[
[
[
1:
5x7
>
0.1250]in
0.0830]in
0.1250]in
TEXT
FONT
Print: DOT
USER
CONT
F1 ACCEPT
ARCTEXT(RADIUS)
Font :
Height:
Width :
Pitch :
<
[
[
[
1:
5x7
>
0.1250]in
0.0830]in
0.1250]in
TEXT
FONT
Print: DOT
USER
CONT
F1 ACCEPT
Cont (continuous) allows you to specify the print
density to mark fully formed characters that
produce an engraved appearance.
Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
34700D.DOC
2-61
TMC470 Controller Operation
Radius ArcText Parameters (continued)
The third page contains the User parameters.
The User parameters are used by the system only when the arc text contains a variable text flag. The flag (%#V
or %#v) allows users to enter text into the field while the system is in Operator mode.
Verify the cursor is on the Title parameter. If not,
press TAB to select it.
The Title parameter defines a label that will be
displayed next to the box where the user enters
data. The label can help identify what type of data
the user is to enter.
Type in the desired text to define a title for the field.
Press TAB to select the User Text parameter.
The User Text parameter allows you to define a
default text string for the variable text. The default
string will reside in the field until actual usersupplied text is entered, until the pattern is closed,
or until the controller is powered off. See Save in
Query Buffer parameter (below) for more
information on retaining user-supplied text.
Type in the desired text to define the default string.
Press TAB to select the Clear User parameter.
The Clear User parameter determines how the
system handles the user-supplied data after the
print cycle is complete.
If enabled, the system will clear (delete) the usertext from the field after the pattern prints.
The system will prompt the user for new data
before it starts the next print cycle.
ARCTEXT(RADIUS)
Press ENTER to toggle the option OFF or ON.
⌧ indicates the user-supplied text will be cleared.
indicates the user-supplied text will be retained.
Press TAB to select the Save in Query Buffer
parameter.
Type the number of the query text buffer (01… 20)
where you wish to store the data.
Note: Entering 00 effectively disables the save
feature (i.e., the user-text will not be saved).
2-62
Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
34700D.DOC
FONT
USER
]
]
F1 ACCEPT
ARCTEXT(RADIUS)
1:
TEXT
Title:
[
User Text: [
Clear user:
Save in Query buffer :[00]
FONT
USER
]
]
F1 ACCEPT
ARCTEXT(RADIUS)
1:
TEXT
Title:
[
User Text: [
Clear user:
Save in Query buffer :[00]
FONT
USER
]
]
F1 ACCEPT
ARCTEXT(RADIUS)
The Save in Query Buffer parameter allows you to
save the user-supplied text in one of the query
text buffers. This retains data when it would
normally be cleared by the system.
TEXT
Title:
[
User Text: [
Clear user:
Save in Query buffer :[00]
If disabled, the system keeps the user-text in the
field until it is manually cleared or edited, until the
pattern is closed, or until the controller is powered
off. See Save in Query Buffer parameter (below)
for more information on retaining user-supplied text.
1:
1:
TEXT
Title:
[
User Text: [
Clear user:
Save in Query buffer :[00]
F1 ACCEPT
FONT
USER
]
]
TMC470 Controller Operation
Radius ArcText Parameters (continued)
The fourth page contains the Arc parameters.
The Arc parameters define the size of the arc, the location where the text will begin on the arc, and whether the
text shape is convex or concave .
Verify the cursor is on the Radius parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
ARCTEXT(RADIUS)
The Radius parameter defines the size of the arc.
The system constructs a circular path using the
center point and radius that you specify. See
illustration.
Radius:
Start:
ARC
TOOL
[ 1.0000]in
[ 0.0000]°
Curve: Convex
Concave
Type the desired radius in the box.
F1 ACCEPT
Ensure the radius is not so large that it will
position the arc outside the available marking
window.
1:
Press TAB to select the Start parameter.
ARCTEXT(RADIUS)
The Start parameter defines where the arc text
will be anchored. The anchor point is that
location where the start angle intersects the
circular path. See illustration. Angular
measurements around the center point begin
at the 3 o’clock position (0°) and increase in
the counterclockwise direction.
Type the Start angle to identify the arc text
anchor point.
Press TAB to select the Curve parameter.
Radius:
Start:
1:
ARC
TOOL
[ 1.0000]in
[ 0.0000]°
Curve: Convex
Concave
F1 ACCEPT
The Curve parameter defines the shape of the
curved text string (convex or concave). Unlike
arcs which are always constructed in a
counterclockwise direction, the system use the
Curve parameter selection to construct the string
in either a clockwise or a counterclockwise
direction. Additionally, the X Just and Y Just
(alignment) parameters affect how the text
string is aligned at the anchor point. See
illustration (above).
ARCTEXT(RADIUS)
Radius:
Start:
Curve: Convex
1:
ARC
TOOL
[ 1.0000]in
[ 0.0000]°
Concave
F1 ACCEPT
Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key to select the desired shape, then press ENTER.
Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
34700D.DOC
2-63
TMC470 Controller Operation
Radius ArcText Parameters (continued)
The fifth page contains the Tool parameters.
ARCTEXT(RADIUS)
Verify the cursor is on the Printable parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
Printable: ⌧
The Printable parameter allows you enable or disable
printing for this arc text string.
Press ENTER to toggle the printable option ON or
OFF.
⌧ indicates this arc text string will be printed.
indicates this arc text string will not be printed.
Press TAB to select the Density parameter.
The Density parameter is used with Continuous print
mode. It determines the pixel density (e.g., dots per
inch) the system will use to form the characters.
Higher density values produce a more continuous
appearance but will increase marking time and pin
wear. The system uses either the specified pixel
density or the minimum "dots" required by the
selected font, whichever is greater.
2-64
1:
Enter the desired pixel density.
34700D.DOC
ARC
TOOL
Density: [100.00]
Theta mode:
Disabled
Index
Perpendicular
F1 ACCEPT
ARCTEXT(RADIUS)
1:
Printable: ⌧
ARC
TOOL
Density: [100.00]
Theta mode:
Disabled
Index
Perpendicular
F1 ACCEPT
TMC470 Controller Operation
Radius ArcText Parameters (continued)
Press TAB to select the Theta mode parameter.
Note: The Theta mode parameter will be available
only if your system has the optional Theta
axis enabled.
The Theta mode parameter defines how the system
will rotate the drive fixture to print the arc text.
Disabled tells the system to ignore the Theta print
mode for this arc text string.
ARCTEXT(RADIUS)
Printable: ⌧
Theta mode:
Disabled
Index
1:
ARC
TOOL
Density: [100.00]
Perpendicular
F1 ACCEPT
Index mode is typically used to mark flat surfaces
on square or hexagonal parts (e.g., sides of bolt
heads). In Index mode, the system does not rotate
the Theta-axis while marking. Instead, it rotates the Theta-axis to index the side of the part, then marks.
Perpendicular mode is typically used to mark cylindrical parts (e.g., pipe or tubing). In Perpendicular mode, the
system does rotate the Theta-axis while marking. The software substitutes normal movement along the Y-axis
with rotational movement around the Theta-axis. This may result in slower marking times, but provides a high
quality mark since the impact pin is always perpendicular to the marking surface.
Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key to select the desired Theta mode, then press ENTER.
After all radius arc text parameters are defined, press F1 (ACCEPT) to save the settings.
Radius ArctText Tips
Consider the following factors when defining radius arc text.
•
Reduce the radius of the arc to sharpen (increase) the curvature of the text.
•
Increase the radius of the arc to flatten (decrease) the curvature of the text.
•
Experiment with the Start parameter, X/Y parameters, and the X Just and Y Just parameters.
Slight adjustments of these parameters will reposition the text location along the arc path.
•
If an arc text string is positioned slightly outside of the marking window, try changing the alignment:
– If the arc text is convex, try changing the X Just parameter to top or center alignment.
– If the arc text is concave, try changing the Y Just parameter to bottom or middle alignment.
34700D.DOC
2-65
TMC470 Controller Operation
2.6.8 ArcText 3P (3-point Method)
The ArcText 3P features allow you to "bend" a text string in your printed message. ArcText 3P combines the features of
the Arc 3P tool and the Text tool to define a curved text string. The system constructs an ArcText 3P string using a
start point, a center point, and an end point. The system defines a circular path that encompasses all three points.
Most parameters for defining the text string are the same as for standard text fields. The actual contour of the arc text
string is determined by its character dimensions, font style, and selected shape (convex or concave).
Key Point…
Ensure the pattern you wish to edit is open (loaded).
Before you begin editing the pattern, we suggest you place the machine online (F3, F1).
With the machine online, the Design Jog feature will be readily available to assist in defining the field location.
See Design Considerations for details. If you’re new to the process of designing patterns and adding fields, please
take a few minutes and review that section for an overview of key design concepts.
To add a 3-point arc text field to the pattern:
From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen,
press F2 (EDIT).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
The system will display the Edit Menu.
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
Press F7 to toggle the TOOL selection to ARCTEXT 3P.
Press F1 (TOOL) to add the arc text to the pattern.
The system will display the ArcText (3 Point) Editor
Screen for you to define the arc text string. The
parameters are displayed on five separate pages
(Text, Font, User, Arc, and Tool). The
symbol on
the top line indicates additional pages are
available.
]
]
]
]
]
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online
– Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
F1:TOOL
F7:<ARCTEXT 3P>
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
F2:COMMAND
F3:CUT
F4:COPY
F5:PASTE
F6:ADJUST
F8:<GOTO
>
]
]
]
]
]
The first page contains the Text parameters.
Verify the cursor is on the Text parameter. If not,
press TAB to select it.
ARCTEXT(3Point)
The Text parameter defines the content of the
character string. The text string may contain up to
160 characters including uppercase and lowercase
characters, keyboard symbols, blank spaces,
message flags, and special characters.
Message flags may be used to insert real-time
data into the printed message (e.g., dates, time,
codes, serial numbers, etc.). See Codes and
Real-time Data for details.
Text: [
X Just: < Left >
Y Just: < Top >
1:
TEXT
FONT
USER
]
Curve:
Convex
Concave
F1 ACCEPT
Special characters, like control characters (e.g., EOT) and language phonetic symbols (e.g., ö), may be
entered into the text string. Refer to Special Keys – Control Characters (Chapter 1) for details.
2-66
Type the desired data into the Text box.
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
3-Point ArcText Parameters (continued)
Press TAB to select the X Just parameter.
The X Just parameter defines how the arc text
string will be aligned at the arc text anchor point.
See illustration.
Press ENTER until the desired X-axis justification is
displayed (Left, Center, or Right).
Press TAB to select the Y Just parameter.
ARCTEXT(3Point)
Text: [
X Just: < Left >
Y Just: < Top >
TEXT
FONT
USER
]
Curve:
Convex
Concave
F1 ACCEPT
The Y Just parameter defines how the arc text
string will be aligned with the curvature of the arc.
1:
Press ENTER until the desired Y-axis justification is
displayed (Top, Middle, or Bottom).
Key Point…
If you select Top alignment and print special characters with ascenders (e.g., É) the marker will use the top
of the special character as the upper limit and align the other characters accordingly. It will not use the top
of the uppercase characters for alignment.
Similarly, if you select Bottom alignment and print lowercase characters, the marker will use the bottom of
the lowercase descenders (e.g., g) as the lower limit and align the other characters accordingly. It will not
use the bottom of the uppercase characters as the baseline.
Press TAB to select the Curve parameter.
The Curve parameter defines the shape of the
curved text string (convex or concave). Unlike arcs
which are always constructed in a counterclockwise
direction, the system use the Curve parameter
selection to construct the string in either a clockwise
or a counterclockwise direction. Additionally, the
X Just and Y Just (alignment) parameters affect how
the text string is aligned at the anchor point. See
illustration (above).
Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key to select the
desired shape, then press ENTER.
Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters
34700D.DOC
ARCTEXT(3Point)
Text: [
X Just: < Left >
Y Just: < Top >
1:
TEXT
FONT
USER
]
Curve:
Convex
Concave
F1 ACCEPT
2-67
TMC470 Controller Operation
3-Point ArcText Parameters (continued)
The second page contains the Font parameters.
ARCTEXT(3Point)
Verify the cursor is on the Font parameter. I
f not, press TAB to select it.
The Font parameter defines the character set that
will be used to print the arc text string. It
determines the shape and appearance of the
characters. Refer to Font Selection for details.
Font :
Height:
Width :
Pitch :
<
[
[
[
1:
5x7
>
0.1250]in
0.0830]in
0.1250]in
TEXT
FONT
Print: DOT
USER
CONT
F1 ACCEPT
Press ENTER until the desired font is displayed.
The next three parameters define the physical size of the characters. See illustration.
Height is the distance from the center of the mark at the
top of the character to the center of the mark at the
bottom.
Width is the distance from the center of the mark at the
left of the character to the center of the mark at the right.
Pitch is the distance from the start of one character to
the start of the next character, including the space
between characters.
Press TAB to select the Height parameter.
Key Point…
You can manually enter width and pitch dimensions or have the system automatically calculate them based on
the character height.
Do one of the following:
•
Automatically Set Width & Pitch. Type the
desired height dimension, then press ENTER. The
system will automatically calculate and apply the
width and pitch dimensions based on the height.
or
•
Manually Set Width & Pitch. Type the desired
height dimension, then press TAB. The system will
leave the Width and Pitch dimensions unchanged for
you to define them manually.
Press TAB to select the Print parameter.
Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key to select the
desired print mode, then press ENTER.
The Print parameter defines the mode that will be
used to print the arc text string. See illustration.
Dot marks the characters in a pattern of dots as
defined by the selected font set.
Cont (continuous) allows you to specify the print
density to mark fully formed characters that
produce an engraved appearance.
2-68
Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
34700D.DOC
ARCTEXT(3Point)
Font :
Height:
Width :
Pitch :
<
[
[
[
1:
5x7
>
0.1250]in
0.0830]in
0.1250]in
TEXT
FONT
Print: DOT
USER
CONT
F1 ACCEPT
ARCTEXT(3Point)
Font :
Height:
Width :
Pitch :
<
[
[
[
1:
5x7
>
0.1250]in
0.0830]in
0.1250]in
TEXT
FONT
Print: DOT
F1 ACCEPT
USER
CONT
TMC470 Controller Operation
3-Point ArcText Parameters (continued)
The third page contains the User parameters.
The User parameters are used by the system only when the arc text contains a variable text flag. The flag (%#V
or %#v) allows users to enter text into the field while the system is in Operator mode.
Verify the cursor is on the Title parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
The Title parameter defines a label that will be
displayed next to the box where the user enters
data. The label can help identify what type of data
the user is to enter.
Type in the desired text to define a title for the field.
Press TAB to select the User Text parameter.
The User Text parameter allows you to define a
default text string for the variable text. The default
string will reside in the field until actual usersupplied text is entered, until the pattern is closed,
or until the controller is powered off. See Save in
Query Buffer parameter (below) for more
information on retaining user-supplied text.
Type in the desired text to define the default string.
Press TAB to select the Clear User parameter.
The Clear User parameter determines how the
system handles the user-supplied data after the
print cycle is complete.
If enabled, the system will clear (delete) the usertext from the field after the pattern prints.
The system will prompt the user for new data
before it starts the next print cycle.
ARCTEXT(3Point)
Press ENTER to toggle the option OFF or ON.
⌧ indicates the user-supplied text will be cleared.
indicates the user-supplied text will be retained.
Press TAB to select the Save in Query Buffer
parameter.
Type the number of the query text buffer (01… 20)
where you wish to store the data.
FONT
USER
]
]
F1 ACCEPT
ARCTEXT(3Point)
1:
TEXT
Title:
[
User Text: [
Clear user:
Save in Query buffer :[00]
FONT
USER
]
]
F1 ACCEPT
ARCTEXT(3Point)
1:
TEXT
Title:
[
User Text: [
Clear user:
Save in Query buffer :[00]
FONT
USER
]
]
F1 ACCEPT
ARCTEXT(3Point)
The Save in Query Buffer parameter allows you to
save the user-supplied text in one of the query
text buffers. This retains data when it would
normally be cleared by the system.
TEXT
Title:
[
User Text: [
Clear user:
Save in Query buffer :[00]
If disabled, the system keeps the user-text in the
field until it is manually cleared or edited, until the
pattern is closed, or until the controller is powered
off. See Save in Query Buffer parameter (below)
for more information on retaining user-supplied text.
1:
1:
TEXT
Title:
[
User Text: [
Clear user:
Save in Query buffer :[00]
FONT
USER
]
]
F1 ACCEPT
Note: Entering 00 effectively disables the save
feature (i.e., the user-text will not be saved).
Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
34700D.DOC
2-69
TMC470 Controller Operation
3-Point ArcText Parameters (continued)
The fourth page contains the Arc parameters.
The Arc parameters define the size of the arc and the
location where the text will begin on the arc. The values in
the Start boxes identify the axis coordinates for the arc text
anchor point. The system uses coordinates from the Center
and End boxes to define a circular path on which it will create
the arc text.
ARCTEXT(3Point)
Start
X:[ 8.00]in
Y:[ 3.00]in
θ :[ 0.000]°
1:
ARC
Center
X:[ 6.00]in
Y:[ 4.00]in
TOOL
End
X:[
Y:[
4.00]in
3.00]in
F1 ACCEPT
Press TAB to select the Start X (or Y or θ) parameter.
Note: The Theta (θ) parameter will be available only if
your system has the optional Theta axis enabled.
Do one of the following to define the arc start point:
•
(recommended) Press the JOG key
and use the
Design Jog feature to interactively position the
marker and identify the location.
•
Enter the specific axis coordinate in each axis box.
or
Press TAB to select the End X (or Y) parameter. Repeat
the process (above) to define the arc end point.
Key Point…
The arc text may or may not pass through the
center point of the arc. That depends on whether
the text string is convex or concave. See below.
ARCTEXT(3Point)
Start
X:[ 8.00]in
Y:[ 3.00]in
θ :[ 0.000]°
Press TAB to select the Center X (or Y) parameter.
Repeat the process (above) to define the arc center
point.
ARC
Center
X:[ 6.00]in
Y:[ 4.00]in
TOOL
End
X:[
Y:[
4.00]in
3.00]in
F1 ACCEPT
The arc text may extend beyond the end point, even
overlap the start point, if the text string is longer
than the defined arc.
1:
ARCTEXT(3Point)
Start
X:[ 8.00]in
Y:[ 3.00]in
θ :[ 0.000]°
1:
ARC
Center
X:[ 6.00]in
Y:[ 4.00]in
TOOL
End
X:[
Y:[
4.00]in
3.00]in
F1 ACCEPT
Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
The fifth page contains the Tool parameters.
Verify the cursor is on the Printable parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
ARCTEXT(3Point)
The Printable parameter allows you enable or disable
printing for this arc text string.
Press ENTER to toggle the printable option ON or OFF.
⌧ indicates this arc text string will be printed.
indicates this arc text string will not be printed.
2-70
34700D.DOC
1:
Printable: ⌧
ARC
TOOL
Density: [100.00]
Theta mode:
Disabled
Index
Perpendicular
F1 ACCEPT
TMC470 Controller Operation
3-Point ArcText Parameters (continued)
Press TAB to select the Density parameter.
The Density parameter is used with Continuous
print mode. It determines the pixel density (e.g.,
dots per inch) the system will use to form the
characters. Higher density values produce a more
continuous appearance but will increase marking
time and pin wear. The system uses either the
specified pixel density or the minimum "dots"
required by the selected font, whichever is
greater.
Enter the desired pixel density.
Press TAB to select the Theta mode parameter.
Note: The Theta mode parameter will be available
only if your system has the optional Theta
axis enabled.
The Theta mode parameter defines how the
system will rotate the drive fixture to print the arc
text.
ARCTEXT(3Point)
1:
Printable: ⌧
ARC
TOOL
Density: [100.00]
Theta mode:
Disabled
Index
Perpendicular
F1 ACCEPT
ARCTEXT(3Point)
1:
Printable: ⌧
ARC
TOOL
Density: [100.00]
Theta mode:
Disabled
Index
Perpendicular
F1 ACCEPT
Disabled tells the system to ignore the Theta
print mode for this arc text string.
Index mode is typically used to mark flat surfaces
on square or hexagonal parts (e.g., sides of bolt
heads). In Index mode, the system does not rotate the Theta-axis while marking. Instead, it rotates the Thetaaxis to index the side of the part, then marks.
Perpendicular mode is typically used to mark cylindrical parts (e.g., pipe or tubing). In Perpendicular mode, the
system does rotate the Theta-axis while marking. The software substitutes normal movement along the Y-axis
with rotational movement around the Theta-axis. This may result in slower marking times, but provides a high
quality mark since the impact pin is always perpendicular to the marking surface.
Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key to select the desired Theta mode, then press ENTER.
After all 3-point arc text parameters are defined, press F1 (ACCEPT) to save the settings.
3-Point ArctText Tips
Consider the following factors when defining 3-point arc text.
•
Reduce the span of the arc to sharpen (increase) the curvature of the text.
•
Increase the span of the arc to flatten (decrease) the curvature of the text.
•
Experiment with the Start X/Y parameters and the X Just and Y Just parameters.
Slight adjustments of these parameters will reposition the text location along the arc path.
•
If an arc text string is positioned slightly outside of the marking window, try changing the alignment:
– If the arc text is convex, try changing the Y Just parameter to top or middle alignment.
– If the arc text is concave, try changing the Y Just parameter to bottom or middle alignment.
34700D.DOC
2-71
TMC470 Controller Operation
2.6.9 Line (Start Method)
The Line tool allows you to add a simple line segment to the pattern. The system constructs the line using a start
location, an angular direction, and a distance dimension.
Key Point…
Ensure the pattern you wish to edit is open (loaded).
Before you begin editing the pattern, we suggest you place the machine online (F3, F1).
With the machine online, the Design Jog feature will be readily available to assist in defining the field location.
See Design Considerations for details. If you’re new to the process of designing patterns and adding fields, please
take a few minutes and review that section for an overview of key design concepts.
To add a line to the pattern:
From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen,
press F2 (EDIT).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
The system will display the Edit Menu.
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
Press F7 to toggle the TOOL selection to LINE.
Press F1 (TOOL) to add the line to the pattern.
The system will display the Line Editor Screen for
you to define the field. The parameters are
displayed on two separate pages (Line and Tool).
2-72
34700D.DOC
]
]
]
]
]
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online
– Pattern:SAMPLE_05
F1:TOOL
F7:<LINE
>:000
F2:COMMAND F8:<GOTO
>
001:[
]
F3:CUT
002:[
]
F4:COPY
003:[
]
F5:PASTE
004:[
]
F6:ADJUST
005:[
]
TMC470 Controller Operation
Line Parameters (continued)
The first page contains the Line parameters.
LINE
Press TAB to select the X (or Y or θ) parameter.
Note: The Theta (θ) parameter will be available
only if your system has the optional Theta
axis enabled.
1:
LINE
X: [ 3.0000]in
Y: [ 6.0000]in
θ : [ 0.0000 ]°
The values in the adjacent boxes identify the axis
coordinates where the line will start in the marking
window.
TOOL
Length: [ 0.0000]in
Angle: [ 0.000]°
F1 ACCEPT
Do one of the following:
•
Press the JOG key
and use the Design Jog
feature to interactively position the marker and
identify the anchor location.
•
Enter the specific axis coordinate in each axis box.
or
Press TAB to select the Length parameter.
The Length parameter defines the outward distance
of the line from the start point
Enter the line length in the Length box.
LINE
1:
LINE
X: [ 3.0000]in
Y: [ 6.0000]in
θ : [ 0.0000 ]°
TOOL
Length: [ 0.0000]in
Angle: [ 0.000]°
F1 ACCEPT
Press TAB to select the Angle parameter.
The Angle parameter defines the direction of the line
from the start point. Angles are measured from 0°
(parallel to the X-axis) and increase in a counterclockwise direction. See illustration.
Enter the desired direction of the line (in degrees) in
the Angle box.
LINE
1:
LINE
X: [ 3.0000]in
Y: [ 6.0000]in
θ : [ 0.0000 ]°
TOOL
Length: [ 0.0000]in
Angle: [ 0.000]°
F1 ACCEPT
Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
34700D.DOC
2-73
TMC470 Controller Operation
Line Parameters (continued)
The second page contains the Tool parameters.
Verify the cursor is on the Printable parameter. If not,
press TAB to select it.
The Printable parameter allows you enable or
disable printing for this line.
LINE
1:
Printable: ⌧
Press ENTER to toggle the printable option ON or OFF.
TOOL
Density: [100.00]
Theta mode:
Disabled
Index
⌧ indicates this line will be printed.
Perpendicular
F1 ACCEPT
indicates this line will not be printed.
LINE
Press TAB to select the Density parameter.
The Density parameter is used with Continuous
print mode. It determines the pixel density (e.g.,
dots per inch) the system will use to form the line.
Higher density values produce a more continuous
appearance but will increase marking time and pin
wear.
LINE
1:
LINE
Printable: ⌧
TOOL
Density: [100.00]
Theta mode:
Disabled
Index
Perpendicular
F1 ACCEPT
Enter the desired pixel density.
Press TAB to select the Theta mode parameter.
Note: The Theta mode parameter will be available
only if your system has the optional Theta axis
enabled.
The Theta mode parameter defines how the system
will rotate the drive fixture to print the line.
Disabled tells the system to ignore the Theta print
mode for this line.
LINE
1:
LINE
Printable: ⌧
TOOL
Density: [100.00]
Theta mode:
Disabled
Index
Perpendicular
F1 ACCEPT
Index mode is typically used to mark flat surfaces
on square or hexagonal parts (e.g., sides of bolt
heads). In Index mode, the system does not rotate the Theta-axis while marking. Instead, it rotates the Thetaaxis to index the side of the part, then marks.
Perpendicular mode is typically used to mark cylindrical parts (e.g., pipe or tubing). In Perpendicular mode, the
system does rotate the Theta-axis while marking. The software substitutes normal movement along the Y-axis
with rotational movement around the Theta-axis. This may result in slower marking times, but provides a high
quality mark since the impact pin is always perpendicular to the marking surface.
Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key to select the desired Theta mode, then press ENTER.
After all line parameters are defined, press F1 (ACCEPT) to save the settings.
2-74
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
2.6.10 Line 2P (Start/End Method)
The Line 2P tool allows you to add a 2-point line segment to the pattern. The system constructs the line using a start
location and an end location to define the line length and direction.
Key Point…
Ensure the pattern you wish to edit is open (loaded).
Before you begin editing the pattern, we suggest you place the machine online (F3, F1).
With the machine online, the Design Jog feature will be readily available to assist in defining the field location.
See Design Considerations for details. If you’re new to the process of designing patterns and adding fields, please
take a few minutes and review that section for an overview of key design concepts.
To add a line to the pattern specifying a start and end
point:
From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen, press
F2 (EDIT).
The system will display the Edit Menu.
Press F7 to toggle the TOOL selection to LINE 2P.
Press F1 (TOOL) to add the line to the pattern.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
The system will display the Line 2P Editor Screen for
you to define the field. The parameters are
displayed on two separate pages (Line2P and Tool).
34700D.DOC
]
]
]
]
]
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online
– Pattern:SAMPLE_05
F1:TOOL
F7:<LINE 2P >:000
F2:COMMAND F8:<GOTO
>
001:[
]
F3:CUT
002:[
]
F4:COPY
003:[
]
F5:PASTE
004:[
]
F6:ADJUST
005:[
]
2-75
TMC470 Controller Operation
Line 2P Parameters (continued)
The first page contains the Line2P parameters.
Press TAB to select the Start X (or Start Y or Start θ)
parameter.
Note: The Theta (θ) parameter will be available only
if your system has the optional Theta axis
enabled.
The values in the adjacent boxes identify the axis
coordinates where the line will start in the marking
window.
LINE 2P
1:
LINE2P
Start
X:[ 3.0000]in
Y:[ 6.0000]in
θ :[ 0.0000 ]°
TOOL
End
X:[
Y:[
3.0000]in
6.0000]in
F1 ACCEPT
Do one of the following:
•
Press the JOG key
and use the Design Jog
feature to interactively position the marker and
identify the start location.
or
•
Enter the specific axis coordinate in each axis box.
Press TAB to select the End X (or End Y) parameter.
The values in the adjacent boxes identify the axis
coordinates where the line will end in the marking
window.
Do one of the following:
•
Press the JOG key
and use the Design Jog
feature to interactively position the marker and
identify the end location.
2-76
1:
Start
X:[ 3.0000]in
Y:[ 6.0000]in
θ :[ 0.0000 ]°
LINE2P
TOOL
End
X:[
Y:[
F1 ACCEPT
or
•
LINE 2P
Enter the specific axis coordinate in each axis box.
Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
34700D.DOC
3.0000]in
6.0000]in
TMC470 Controller Operation
Line 2P Parameters (continued)
The second page contains the Tool parameters.
LINE 2P
Verify the cursor is on the Printable parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
LINE2P
Printable: ⌧
The Printable parameter allows you enable or
disable printing for this line.
1:
Density: [100.00]
Theta mode:
Disabled
Index
Press ENTER to toggle the printable option ON or
OFF.
TOOL
Perpendicular
F1 ACCEPT
⌧ indicates this line will be printed.
indicates this line will not be printed.
Press TAB to select the Density parameter.
The Density parameter is used with Continuous
print mode. It determines the pixel density (e.g.,
dots per inch) the system will use to form the line.
Higher density values produce a more continuous
appearance but will increase marking time and pin
wear.
LINE 2P
1:
LINE2P
Printable: ⌧
TOOL
Density: [100.00]
Theta mode:
Disabled
Index
Perpendicular
F1 ACCEPT
Enter the desired pixel density.
Press TAB to select the Theta mode parameter.
Note: The Theta mode parameter will be available
only if your system has the optional Theta
axis enabled.
The Theta mode parameter defines how the
system will rotate the drive fixture to print the
line.
LINE 2P
1:
LINE2P
Printable: ⌧
TOOL
Density: [100.00]
Theta mode:
Disabled
Index
Perpendicular
F1 ACCEPT
Disabled tells the system to ignore the Theta
print mode for this line.
Index mode is typically used to mark flat surfaces
on square or hexagonal parts (e.g., sides of bolt heads). In Index mode, the system does not rotate the Thetaaxis while marking. Instead, it rotates the Theta-axis to index the side of the part, then marks.
Perpendicular mode is typically used to mark cylindrical parts (e.g., pipe or tubing). In Perpendicular mode, the
system does rotate the Theta-axis while marking. The software substitutes normal movement along the Y-axis
with rotational movement around the Theta-axis. This may result in slower marking times, but provides a high
quality mark since the impact pin is always perpendicular to the marking surface.
Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key to select the desired Theta mode, then press ENTER.
After all line parameters are defined, press F1 (ACCEPT) to save the settings.
34700D.DOC
2-77
TMC470 Controller Operation
2.6.11 Box
The Box tool allows you to add rectangular objects to your pattern. The system constructs a box using a start point, a
height dimension, and a width dimension. The anchor point for a box is always its left, bottom corner.
Key Point…
Ensure the pattern you wish to edit is open (loaded).
Before you begin editing the pattern, we suggest you place the machine online (F3, F1).
With the machine online, the Design Jog feature will be readily available to assist in defining the field location.
See Design Considerations for details. If you’re new to the process of designing patterns and adding fields, please
take a few minutes and review that section for an overview of key design concepts.
To add a box to the pattern:
From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen,
press F2 (EDIT).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
The system will display the Edit Menu.
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
Press F7 to toggle the TOOL selection to BOX.
Press F1 (TOOL) to add the box to the pattern.
The system will display the Box Editor Screen for
you to define the field. The parameters are
displayed on two separate pages (Box and Tool).
]
]
]
]
]
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online
– Pattern:SAMPLE_05
F1:TOOL
F7:<BOX
>:000
F2:COMMAND F8:<GOTO
>
001:[
]
F3:CUT
002:[
]
F4:COPY
003:[
]
F5:PASTE
004:[
]
F6:ADJUST
005:[
]
The first page contains the Box parameters.
Press TAB to select the X (or Y or θ) parameter.
Note: The Theta (θ) parameter will be available
only if your system has the optional Theta
axis enabled.
The values in the adjacent boxes identify the axis
coordinates where the lower, left corner of the
rectangle will be placed in the marking window.
1:
BOX
X: [ 6.0000] in
Y: [ 3.0000] in
θ : [ 0.0000 ]°
TOOL
Width : [ 1.000]in
Height: [ 1.000]in
Angle: [ 0.0000]°
F1 ACCEPT
Do one of the following:
•
Press the JOG key
and use the Design Jog
feature to interactively position the marker and
identify the start location.
•
Enter the specific axis coordinate in each axis box.
or
2-78
BOX
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
Box Parameters (continued)
Press TAB to select the Width parameter.
The Width parameter (along with the Height
parameter, below) defines the size of the box. Box
width is measured from the center of the left-most
dot to the center of the right-most dot. Note that
the box width may increase as the diameter of the
marked dot increases.
Enter the width dimension in the Width box.
Press TAB to select the Height parameter.
Enter the height dimension in the Height box.
Press TAB to select the Angle parameter.
Enter the desired amount of rotation (in degrees) in
the Angle box.
TOOL
X: [ 6.0000] in
Y: [ 3.0000] in
θ : [ 0.0000 ]°
Width : [ 1.000]in
Height: [ 1.000]in
Angle: [ 0.0000]°
BOX
1:
BOX
TOOL
X: [ 6.0000] in
Y: [ 3.0000] in
θ : [ 0.0000 ]°
Width : [ 1.000]in
Height: [ 1.000]in
Angle: [ 0.0000]°
BOX
1:
BOX
X: [ 6.0000] in
Y: [ 3.0000] in
θ : [ 0.0000 ]°
TOOL
Width : [ 1.000]in
Height: [ 1.000]in
Angle: [ 0.0000]°
F1 ACCEPT
The box always pivots on its lower, left corner.
Angles are measured from 0° (no rotation) and
increase in a counter-clockwise direction. See
illustration (above)
BOX
F1 ACCEPT
The Angle parameter allows you to rotate the box
in a counterclockwise direction. Note that an angle
of 0° indicates no rotation. See illustration.
1:
F1 ACCEPT
The Height parameter (along with the Width
parameter, above) defines the size of the box. Box
height is measured from the center of the bottommost dot to the center of the top-most dot. Note
that the box height may increase as the diameter
of the marked dot increases.
BOX
Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
34700D.DOC
2-79
TMC470 Controller Operation
Box Parameters (continued)
The second page contains the Tool parameters.
BOX
Verify the cursor is on the Printable parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
BOX
TOOL
Printable: ⌧
The Printable parameter allows you enable or
disable printing for this box.
1:
Density: [100.00]
Theta mode:
Disabled
Index
Press ENTER to toggle the printable option ON or OFF.
Perpendicular
F1 ACCEPT
⌧ indicates this box will be printed.
indicates this box will not be printed.
Press TAB to select the Density parameter.
The Density parameter is used with Continuous
print mode. It determines the pixel density (e.g.,
dots per inch) the system will use to form the box.
Higher density values produce a more continuous
appearance but will increase marking time and pin
wear.
BOX
1:
BOX
TOOL
Printable: ⌧
Density: [100.00]
Theta mode:
Disabled
Index
Perpendicular
F1 ACCEPT
Enter the desired pixel density.
Press TAB to select the Theta mode parameter.
Note: The Theta mode parameter will be available
only if your system has the optional Theta
axis enabled.
The Theta mode parameter defines how the system
will rotate the drive fixture to print the box.
Disabled tells the system to ignore the Theta print
mode for this box.
BOX
1:
BOX
TOOL
Printable: ⌧
Density: [100.00]
Theta mode:
Disabled
Index
Perpendicular
F1 ACCEPT
Index mode is typically used to mark flat surfaces
on square or hexagonal parts (e.g., sides of bolt
heads). In Index mode, the system does not rotate the Theta-axis while marking. Instead, it rotates the Thetaaxis to index the side of the part, then marks.
Perpendicular mode is typically used to mark cylindrical parts (e.g., pipe or tubing). In Perpendicular mode, the
system does rotate the Theta-axis while marking. The software substitutes normal movement along the Y-axis
with rotational movement around the Theta-axis. This may result in slower marking times, but provides a high
quality mark since the impact pin is always perpendicular to the marking surface.
Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key to select the desired Theta mode, then press ENTER.
After all box parameters are defined, press F1 (ACCEPT) to save the settings.
2-80
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
2.6.12 Circle
The Circle tool allows you to add symmetrical, ring-shaped objects to your pattern. The system constructs a circle using
a start point and a radius dimension. The anchor point for a circle is always its center point.
Key Point…
Ensure the pattern you wish to edit is open (loaded).
Before you begin editing the pattern, we suggest you place the machine online (F3, F1).
With the machine online, the Design Jog feature will be readily available to assist in defining the field location.
See Design Considerations for details. If you’re new to the process of designing patterns and adding fields, please
take a few minutes and review that section for an overview of key design concepts.
To add a circle to the pattern:
From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen,
press F2 (EDIT).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
The system will display the Edit Menu.
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
Press F7 to toggle the TOOL selection to CIRCLE.
Press F1 (TOOL) to add the circle to the pattern.
The system will display the Circle Editor Screen for
you to define the field. The parameters are
displayed on two separate pages (Circle and Tool).
]
]
]
]
]
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online
– Pattern:SAMPLE_05
F1:TOOL
F7:<CIRCLE
>:000
F2:COMMAND F8:<GOTO
>
001:[
]
F3:CUT
002:[
]
F4:COPY
003:[
]
F5:PASTE
004:[
]
F6:ADJUST
005:[
]
The first page contains the Circle parameters.
CIRCLE
Press TAB to select the X (or Y or θ) parameter.
Note: The Theta (θ) parameter will be available
only if your system has the optional Theta
axis enabled.
The values in the adjacent boxes identify the axis
coordinates where the center of the circle will be
anchored in the marking window.
1:
CIRCLE
X: [ 3.0000]in
Y: [ 6.0000]in
θ : [ 0.0000 ]°
TOOL
Radius: [ 0.1000]in
F1 ACCEPT
Do one of the following:
•
Press the JOG key
location.
•
Enter the specific axis coordinate in each axis box.
and use the Design Jog feature to interactively position the marker and identify the center
or
34700D.DOC
2-81
TMC470 Controller Operation
Circle Parameters (continued)
Press TAB to select the Radius parameter.
The Radius parameter defines the size of the
circle. The system constructs a circular path using
the anchor point and radius that you specified.
See illustration.
CIRCLE
1:
X: [ 3.0000]in
Y: [ 6.0000]in
θ : [ 0.0000 ]°
Ensure the radius is not so large that it will
position the circle outside the available marking
window.
Type the desired radius in the box.
Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
CIRCLE
TOOL
Radius: [ 0.1000]in
F1 ACCEPT
The second page contains the Tool parameters.
Verify the cursor is on the Printable parameter. If
not, press TAB to select it.
CIRCLE
The Printable parameter allows you enable or
disable printing for this circle.
CIRCLE
Printable: ⌧
TOOL
Density: [100.00]
Theta mode:
Disabled
Index
Press ENTER to toggle the printable option ON or
OFF.
⌧ indicates this circle will be printed.
Perpendicular
F1 ACCEPT
indicates this circle will not be printed.
2-82
1:
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
Circle Parameters (continued)
Press TAB to select the Density parameter.
The Density parameter is used with Continuous
print mode. It determines the pixel density (e.g.,
dots per inch) the system will use to form the
circle. Higher density values produce a more
continuous appearance but will increase marking
time and pin wear.
Enter the desired pixel density.
Press TAB to select the Theta mode parameter.
CIRCLE
1:
CIRCLE
Printable: ⌧
TOOL
Density: [100.00]
Theta mode:
Disabled
Index
Perpendicular
F1 ACCEPT
The Theta mode parameter defines how the
system will rotate the drive fixture to print the
circle.
CIRCLE
1:
CIRCLE
Disabled tells the system to ignore the Theta
print mode for this circle.
Theta mode:
Disabled
Index
Printable: ⌧
Index mode is typically used to mark flat surfaces
on square or hexagonal parts (e.g., sides of bolt
heads). In Index mode, the system does not
rotate the Theta-axis while marking. Instead, it
rotates the Theta-axis to index the side of the
part, then marks.
TOOL
Density: [100.00]
Perpendicular
F1 ACCEPT
Perpendicular mode is typically used to mark cylindrical parts (e.g., pipe or tubing). In Perpendicular mode, the
system does rotate the Theta-axis while marking. The software substitutes normal movement along the Y-axis
with rotational movement around the Theta-axis. This may result in slower marking times, but provides a high
quality mark since the impact pin is always perpendicular to the marking surface.
Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key to select the desired Theta mode, then press ENTER.
After all circle parameters are defined, press F1 (ACCEPT) to save the settings.
34700D.DOC
2-83
TMC470 Controller Operation
2.6.13 Ellipse (Radius Method)
The Ellipse tool allows you to add oval objects to your pattern. The marking system software provides two ways to
create an ellipse: the radius method and the 3-point method. The system constructs a radius ellipse using a center
point, a start angle, a major radius, and a minor radius. The start angle defines the direction the major radius is drawn
from the center point. The elliptical path is always constructed in a counter-clockwise direction relative to the major
radius. Optionally, elliptical arcs may be created along the elliptical path so that only a portion of the ellipse is printed.
The Start and End parameters define where the arc begins and ends on the elliptical path.
Key Point…
Ensure the pattern you wish to edit is open (loaded).
Before you begin editing the pattern, we suggest you place the machine online (F3, F1).
With the machine online, the Design Jog feature will be readily available to assist in defining the field location.
See Design Considerations for details. If you’re new to the process of designing patterns and adding fields, please
take a few minutes and review that section for an overview of key design concepts.
To add an ellipse to the pattern:
From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen,
press F2 (EDIT).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
The system will display the Edit Menu.
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
Press F7 to toggle the TOOL selection to ELLIPSE.
Press F1 (TOOL) to add the ellipse to the pattern.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online
– Pattern:SAMPLE_05
F1:TOOL
F7:<ELLIPSE >:000
The system will display the Ellipse Editor Screen
for you to define the field. The parameters are
displayed on three separate pages (Ellipse,
Common, and Tool).
2-84
]
]
]
]
]
34700D.DOC
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
F2:COMMAND
F3:CUT
F4:COPY
F5:PASTE
F6:ADJUST
F8:<GOTO
>
]
]
]
]
]
TMC470 Controller Operation
Radius Ellipse Parameters (continued)
The first page contains the Ellipse parameters.
Press TAB to select the X (or Y or θ) parameter.
Note: The Theta (θ) parameter will be available only
if your system has the optional Theta axis
enabled.
The values in the adjacent boxes identify the axis
coordinates where the center of the elliptical path
will be anchored in the marking window.
ELLIPSE
1:
ELLIPSE
X:[ 6.0000]in
Y:[ 3.0000]in
θ :[ 0.0000 ]°
COMMON
TOOL
Major Radius:[
Minor Radius:[
1.00]in
1.00]in
F1 ACCEPT
Do one of the following:
•
Press the JOG key
and use the Design Jog
feature to interactively position the marker and
identify the center location.
•
Enter the specific axis coordinate in each axis box.
or
Press TAB to select the Major Radius parameter.
The Major Radius defines the widest part of the
ellipse. See illustration.
ELLIPSE
Ensure the major radius is not so large that it will
position the ellipse outside the available marking
window.
X:[ 6.0000]in
Y:[ 3.0000]in
θ :[ 0.0000 ]°
Type the desired dimension in the Major Radius box.
Press TAB to select the Minor Radius parameter.
The Minor Radius defines the narrower diameter of
the ellipse. The minor radius is always
perpendicular to the major radius (widest part) of
the ellipse. See illustration.
Ensure the minor radius is not so large that it will
position the ellipse outside the available marking
window.
Type the desired dimension in the Minor Radius box.
Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
34700D.DOC
1:
ELLIPSE
COMMON
Major Radius:[
Minor Radius:[
TOOL
1.00]in
1.00]in
F1 ACCEPT
ELLIPSE
1:
X:[ 6.0000]in
Y:[ 3.0000]in
θ :[ 0.0000 ]°
ELLIPSE
COMMON
Major Radius:[
Minor Radius:[
TOOL
1.00]in
1.00]in
F1 ACCEPT
2-85
TMC470 Controller Operation
Radius Ellipse Parameters (continued)
The second page contains the Common parameters. These parameters allow you to rotate the ellipse and to define
whether the ellipse is a complete oval or partial oval (an elliptical arc).
Press TAB to select the Angle parameter.
The Angle parameter allows you to rotate the ellipse
counter-clockwise around is center point. The Angle
parameter defines the number of degrees the major
diameter will be rotated relative to the X-axis. Note
that 0° indicates no rotation. See illustration.
ELLIPSE
1:
ELLIPSE
COMMON
TOOL
Angle: [ 0.0000]°
Start: [ 0.000]°
End : [360.000]°
Enter the desired rotation (in degrees) in the Angle box.
F1 ACCEPT
Key Point…
The origin is that point where the major diameter intersects
the ellipse at the 3 o’clock position relative to the ellipse
center point. Note that the origin stays at the same relative
location on the ellipse as it is rotated.
If you wish to print only a portion of the ellipse the Start and End
parameters allow you to define the beginning and end of an
elliptical arc.
Press TAB to select the Start parameter.
The Start parameter defines the start angle,
relative to the center point and the origin. See
illustration below. The arc will begin where the start
angle intersects the elliptical path.
Enter the start angle (in degrees) in the Start box.
Press TAB to select the End parameter.
The End parameter defines the end angle, relative
to the center point and origin. See illustration. The
arc will end where the end angle intersects the
elliptical path.
Enter the end angle (in degrees) in the End box.
Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
2-86
34700D.DOC
ELLIPSE
1:
ELLIPSE
COMMON
Angle: [ 0.0000]°
Start: [ 0.000]°
End : [360.000]°
F1 ACCEPT
TOOL
TMC470 Controller Operation
Radius Ellipse Parameters (continued)
The third page contains the Tool parameters.
Verify the cursor is on the Printable parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
ELLIPSE
The Printable parameter allows you enable or
disable printing for this ellipse.
1:
Printable: ⌧
Press ENTER to toggle the printable option ON or OFF.
⌧ indicates this ellipse will be printed.
COMMON
TOOL
Density: [100.00]
Theta mode:
Disabled
Index
Perpendicular
F1 ACCEPT
indicates this ellipse will not be printed.
ELLIPSE
Press TAB to select the Density parameter.
The Density parameter is used with Continuous
print mode. It determines the pixel density (e.g.,
dots per inch) the system will use to form the
ellipse. Higher density values produce a more
continuous appearance but will increase marking
time and pin wear.
ELLIPSE
1:
ELLIPSE
Printable: ⌧
COMMON
TOOL
Density: [100.00]
Theta mode:
Disabled
Index
Perpendicular
F1 ACCEPT
Enter the desired pixel density.
Press TAB to select the Theta mode parameter.
Note: The Theta mode parameter will be available
only if your system has the optional Theta
axis enabled.
The Theta mode parameter defines how the
system will rotate the drive fixture to print the
ellipse.
ELLIPSE
1:
ELLIPSE
Printable: ⌧
COMMON
TOOL
Density: [100.00]
Theta mode:
Disabled
Index
Perpendicular
F1 ACCEPT
Disabled tells the system to ignore the Theta
print mode for this ellipse.
Index mode is typically used to mark flat surfaces
on square or hexagonal parts (e.g., sides of bolt
heads). In Index mode, the system does not rotate the Theta-axis while marking. Instead, it rotates the Thetaaxis to index the side of the part, then marks.
Perpendicular mode is typically used to mark cylindrical parts (e.g., pipe or tubing). In Perpendicular mode, the
system does rotate the Theta-axis while marking. The software substitutes normal movement along the Y-axis
with rotational movement around the Theta-axis. This may result in slower marking times, but provides a high
quality mark since the impact pin is always perpendicular to the marking surface.
Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key to select the desired Theta mode, then press ENTER.
After all radius ellipse parameters are defined, press F1 (ACCEPT) to save the settings.
34700D.DOC
2-87
TMC470 Controller Operation
2.6.14 Ellipse 3P (3-point Method)
The Ellipse 3P tool allows you to add oval objects to your pattern. The marking system software provides two ways to
create an ellipse: the 3-point method and the radius method. The system constructs a 3-point ellipse using a start
point and an end point to define the major diameter of the ellipse. The middle point helps to define the minor diameter.
The elliptical path is always constructed in a counter-clockwise direction from the start point. Optionally, elliptical arcs
may be created along the elliptical path so that only a portion of the ellipse is printed. The Start and End parameters
define where the arc begins and ends on the elliptical path.
Key Point…
Ensure the pattern you wish to edit is open (loaded).
Before you begin editing the pattern, we suggest you place the machine online (F3, F1).
With the machine online, the Design Jog feature will be readily available to assist in defining the field location.
See Design Considerations for details. If you’re new to the process of designing patterns and adding fields, please
take a few minutes and review that section for an overview of key design concepts.
To add a 3-point ellipse to the pattern:
From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen,
press F2 (EDIT).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
The system will display the Edit Menu.
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
Press F7 to toggle the TOOL selection to ELLIPSE 3P.
Press F1 (TOOL) to add the ellipse to the pattern.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online
– Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
F1:TOOL
F7:<ELLIPSE 3P>
The system will display the Ellipse 3P Editor
Screen for you to define the field. The parameters
are displayed on three separate pages (Ellipse,
Common, and Tool).
2-88
]
]
]
]
]
34700D.DOC
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
F2:COMMAND
F3:CUT
F4:COPY
F5:PASTE
F6:ADJUST
F8:<GOTO
>
]
]
]
]
]
TMC470 Controller Operation
3-Point Ellipse Parameters (continued)
The first page contains the Ellipse 3P parameters.
Press TAB to select the Start X (or Y or θ) parameter.
Note: The Theta (θ) parameter will be available only
if your system has the optional Theta axis
enabled
The Start parameters define where the ellipse will begin.
Do one of the following to define the ellipse start
point:
ELLIPSE-3P
1:
ELLIPSE
COMMON
Start
Center
X:[ 7.00]in X:[ 6.00]in
Y:[ 3.00]in Y:[ 4.00]in
θ :[ 0.0000 ]°
End
X:[
Y:[
TOOL
5.00]in
3.00]in
F1 ACCEPT
•
(recommended) Press the JOG key
and use the
Design Jog feature to interactively position the
marker and identify the location.
•
Enter the specific axis coordinate in each axis box.
or
Press TAB to select the End X (or Y) parameter. Repeat
the process (above) to define the ellipse end point.
The End parameters define where the ellipse will
terminate. This point, relative to the start point,
determines the major diameter (wider diameter)
and the angular orientation of the ellipse.
Remember... The system constructs three-point
arcs from the start point through the end point in a
counter-clockwise direction.
1:
ELLIPSE
Start
Center
X:[ 7.00]in X:[ 6.00]in
Y:[ 3.00]in Y:[ 4.00]in
θ :[ 0.0000 ]°
COMMON
End
X:[
Y:[
TOOL
5.00]in
3.00]in
F1 ACCEPT
Press TAB to select the Center X (or Y) parameter.
Repeat the process (above) to define the ellipse
center point.
The Center parameters help to define the elliptical
path. The system uses this point, relative to the
start and end points, to determine the minor
diameter (narrower diameter) of the ellipse. The
mid-point must reside on an imaginary ellipse
passing through both the start point and end point.
Remember... The system constructs three-point
ellipses from the start point through the end point
in a counter-clockwise direction.
ELLIPSE-3P
ELLIPSE-3P
1:
ELLIPSE
Start
Center
X:[ 7.00]in X:[ 6.00]in
Y:[ 3.00]in Y:[ 4.00]in
θ :[ 0.0000 ]°
COMMON
End
X:[
Y:[
TOOL
5.00]in
3.00]in
F1 ACCEPT
Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
34700D.DOC
2-89
TMC470 Controller Operation
3-Point Ellipse Parameters (continued)
The second page contains the Common parameters. These parameters allow you to rotate the ellipse and to define
whether the ellipse is a complete oval or partial oval (an elliptical arc).
Press TAB to select the Angle parameter.
The Angle parameter allows you to rotate the
ellipse counter-clockwise around is center point. It
defines the number of degrees the major diameter
will be rotated relative to its initial orientation.
Enter the desired rotation (in degrees) in the Angle box.
ELLIPSE-3P
1:
ELLIPSE
Angle:
[ 0.0000]°
Start:
End :
[ 0.000]°
[360.000]°
COMMON
TOOL
COMMON
TOOL
F1 ACCEPT
Key Point…
The ellipse initial orientation may be
rotated due to its construction (i.e.,
the relative location of the Start and
End points). See illustration. The Angle
parameter
rotates each ellipse based on its initial
orientation.
The origin is that point located where
the major diameter intersects the
ellipse at the 3 o’clock position relative
to the ellipse center point. Note that
the origin stays at the same relative
location on the ellipse as it is rotated.
If you wish to print only a portion of the ellipse the Start
and End parameters allow you to define the beginning
and end of an elliptical arc.
Press TAB to select the Start parameter.
The Start parameter defines the start angle,
relative to the center point and the origin. See
illustration below. The arc will begin where the
start angle intersects the elliptical path.
1:
ELLIPSE
Angle:
[ 0.0000]°
Start:
End :
[ 0.000]°
[360.000]°
F1 ACCEPT
Enter the start angle (in degrees) in the
Start box.
Press TAB to select the End parameter.
The End parameter defines the end
angle, relative to the center point and
the origin. See illustration. The arc will
end where the end angle intersects the
elliptical path.
Enter the end angle (in degrees) in the
End box.
Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
2-90
ELLIPSE-3P
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
3-Point Ellipse Parameters (continued)
The third page contains the Tool parameters.
Verify the cursor is on the Printable parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
ELLIPSE-3P
The Printable parameter allows you enable or
disable printing for this ellipse.
1:
ELLIPSE
Printable: ⌧
TOOL
Density: [100.00]
Theta mode:
Disabled
Index
Press ENTER to toggle the printable option ON or
OFF.
COMMON
Perpendicular
F1 ACCEPT
⌧ indicates this ellipse will be printed.
indicates this ellipse will not be printed.
Press TAB to select the Density parameter.
The Density parameter is used with Continuous
print mode. It determines the pixel density (e.g.,
dots per inch) the system will use to form the
ellipse. Higher density values produce a more
continuous appearance but will increase marking
time and pin wear.
ELLIPSE-3P
1:
ELLIPSE
Printable: ⌧
COMMON
TOOL
Density: [100.00]
Theta mode:
Disabled
Index
Perpendicular
F1 ACCEPT
Enter the desired pixel density.
Press TAB to select the Theta mode parameter.
Note: The Theta mode parameter will be available
only if your system has the optional Theta
axis enabled.
The Theta mode parameter defines how the
system will rotate the drive fixture to print the
ellipse.
ELLIPSE-3P
1:
ELLIPSE
Printable: ⌧
Index mode is typically used to mark flat surfaces
on square or hexagonal parts (e.g., sides of bolt
heads). In Index mode, the system does not
rotate the Theta-axis while marking. Instead, it
rotates the Theta-axis to index the side of the part, then marks.
TOOL
Density: [100.00]
Theta mode:
Disabled
Index
Disabled tells the system to ignore the Theta
print mode for this ellipse.
COMMON
Perpendicular
F1 ACCEPT
Perpendicular mode is typically used to mark cylindrical parts (e.g., pipe or tubing). In Perpendicular mode, the
system does rotate the Theta-axis while marking. The software substitutes normal movement along the Y-axis
with rotational movement around the Theta-axis. This may result in slower marking times, but provides a high
quality mark since the impact pin is always perpendicular to the marking surface.
Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key to select the desired Theta mode, then press ENTER.
After all 3-point ellipse parameters are defined, press F1 (ACCEPT) to save the settings.
34700D.DOC
2-91
TMC470 Controller Operation
2.6.15 Block Objects
The Merlin III Visual Design Software allows you to select multiple objects in a pattern and assemble them as a group.
This group (or block) of objects may then be saved as a single entity in a block file.
Although the TMC470 software does not allow you to assemble (or disassemble) block files, you can download existing
block files from Merlin III. Once downloaded to the TMC470 Controller, the block files may be used in patterns that
reside in controller memory. Should you choose to disconnect from the Merlin III software, the patterns and their block
files will then be available to the TMC470 while it is operating in a stand-alone (disconnected-for-Merlin) manner.
Key Point…
Ensure the pattern you wish to edit is open (loaded).
Before you begin editing the pattern, we suggest you place the machine online (F3, F1).
With the machine online, the Design Jog feature will be readily available to assist in defining the field location.
See Design Considerations for details. If you’re new to the process of designing patterns and adding fields, please
take a few minutes and review that section for an overview of key design concepts.
To add a block object to the pattern:
From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen,
press F2 (EDIT).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
The system will display the Edit Menu.
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
Press F7 to toggle the TOOL selection to BLOCK.
Press F1 (TOOL) to add the block to the pattern.
The system will display the Block Editor Screen
for you to define the field. Parameters are shown
on two separate pages (Block and Tool).
2-92
34700D.DOC
]
]
]
]
]
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online
– Pattern:SAMPLE_05
F1:TOOL
F7:<BLOCK
>:000
F2:COMMAND F8:<GOTO
>
001:[
]
F3:CUT
002:[
]
F4:COPY
003:[
]
F5:PASTE
004:[
]
F6:ADJUST
005:[
]
TMC470 Controller Operation
Block Object Parameters (continued)
The first page contains the Block parameters.
Press TAB to select the X (or Y or θ) parameter.
Note: The Theta (θ) parameter will be available
only if your system has the optional Theta
axis enabled.
The values in the adjacent boxes identify the axis
coordinates where the anchor point of the block
will be placed in the marking window.
The anchor point is defined when the block is first
created in Merlin. It is important to know where
the anchor point is located relative to the group of
objects in order to properly position the block.
BLOCK
1: BLOCK
X: [ 6.0000] in
Y: [ 3.0000] in
θ : [ 0.0000 ]°
Block File: [
F1 ACCEPT
TOOL
Scale : [
1.0000]
Angle: [ 0.0000]°
]
F2 FILE SELECT
Do one of the following:
•
Press the JOG key
location.
and use the Design Jog feature to interactively position the marker and identify the start
or
•
Enter the specific axis coordinate in each axis box.
Press TAB to select the Scale parameter.
The Scale parameter allows you to change the size
of the block object without distorting its aspect
ratio (width-to-height ratio).
Enter the scaling factor in the Scale box.
For example:
0.5000 represents 50% or ½X
1.0000 represents 100% or 1X
2.0000 represents 200% or 2X
1: BLOCK
X: [ 6.0000] in
Y: [ 3.0000] in
θ : [ 0.0000 ]°
Block File: [
F1 ACCEPT
TOOL
Scale : [
1.0000]
Angle: [ 0.0000]°
]
F2 FILE SELECT
Press TAB to select the Angle parameter.
The Angle parameter defines the number of
degrees the block of objects will be rotated around
the anchor point. Angles are measured from 0°
(located at the 3 o'clock position relative to the
anchor point) and increase in a counter-clockwise
direction around the anchor. Note that an angle of
0° indicates no rotation.
BLOCK
BLOCK
1: BLOCK
X: [ 6.0000] in
Y: [ 3.0000] in
θ : [ 0.0000 ]°
Block File: [
F1 ACCEPT
TOOL
Scale : [
1.0000]
Angle: [ 0.0000]°
]
F2 FILE SELECT
Enter the desired amount of rotation (in degrees) in
the Angle box.
The block always pivots on its anchor point. The
anchor point is defined when the block is first
created in Merlin. It is important to know where the
anchor point is located relative to the group of
objects. As you can see, using the same rotation
angle with a different anchor (pivot) point produces
very different results. See illustration.
34700D.DOC
2-93
TMC470 Controller Operation
Block Object Parameters (continued)
Press TAB to select the Block File parameter.
The Block File parameter allows you identify the
block file stored in controller memory that you
wish to assign to this field.
Press F2 (FILE SELECT).
1: BLOCK
From the list provided, find the name of the block file
you wish to use, then press the function key that
corresponds with the desired block.
In this example, press F2 to select the block file
named BLOCK_02.
Note: If the block file you wish to use is not shown,
press PAGE DOWN to display more file names.
The system will return to the Block Editor Screen with
the selected file shown in the Block File text box
(e.g., BLOCK_02).
X: [ 6.0000] in
Y: [ 3.0000] in
θ : [ 0.0000 ]°
Block File: [
BLK SELECT
2-94
Scale : [
1.0000]
Angle: [ 0.0000]°
]
Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
34700D.DOC
F2 FILE SELECT
Total 006 Page: 01 of
02
F1–BLOCK_01
F2–BLOCK_02
F3–BLOCK_03
F4–BLOCK_04
F5–BLOCK_05
BLOCK
1: BLOCK
TOOL
X: [ 6.0000] in
Scale : [
1.0000]
Y: [ 3.0000] in
Angle: [ 0.0000]°
θ : [ 0.0000 ]°
Block File: [BLOCK_02
]
F1 ACCEPT
TOOL
F1 ACCEPT
The system will display the Block Select screen
that lists all block files stored in controller
memory.
BLOCK
F2 FILE SELECT
TMC470 Controller Operation
Block Object Parameters (continued)
The second page contains the Tool parameters.
Verify the cursor is on the Printable parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
BLOCK
The Printable parameter allows you enable or
disable printing for this block object.
Printable: ⌧
Press ENTER to toggle the printable option ON or OFF.
⌧ indicates this block will be printed.
Theta mode:
Disabled
Index
F1 ACCEPT
indicates this block will not be printed.
1: BLOCK
Press TAB to select the Density parameter.
The Density parameter is used with Continuous
print mode. It determines the pixel density (e.g.,
dots per inch) the system will use to form the block
object. Higher density values produce a more
continuous appearance but will increase marking
time and pin wear.
Enter the desired pixel density.
Press TAB to select the Theta mode parameter.
Note: The Theta mode parameter will be available
only if your system has the optional Theta
axis enabled.
BLOCK
1: BLOCK
Printable: ⌧
Theta mode:
Disabled
Index
F1 ACCEPT
BLOCK
1: BLOCK
The Theta mode parameter defines how the system
will rotate the drive fixture to print the block object.
Printable: ⌧
Disabled tells the system to ignore the Theta print
mode for this block.
Theta mode:
Disabled
Index
Index mode is typically used to mark flat surfaces
on square or hexagonal parts (e.g., sides of bolt
heads). In Index mode, the system does not rotate
the Theta-axis while marking. Instead, it rotates
the Theta-axis to index the side of the part, then marks.
F1 ACCEPT
TOOL
Density: [100.00]
Perpendicular
F2 FILE SELECT
TOOL
Density: [100.00]
Perpendicular
F2 FILE SELECT
TOOL
Density: [100.00]
Perpendicular
F2 FILE SELECT
Perpendicular mode is typically used to mark cylindrical parts (e.g., pipe or tubing). In Perpendicular mode, the
system does rotate the Theta-axis while marking. The software substitutes normal movement along the Y-axis
with rotational movement around the Theta-axis. This may result in slower marking times, but provides a high
quality mark since the impact pin is always perpendicular to the marking surface.
Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key to select the desired Theta mode, then press ENTER.
After all block object parameters are defined, press F1 (ACCEPT) to save the settings.
34700D.DOC
2-95
TMC470 Controller Operation
2.6.16 GoTo Command
You can design your patterns to include a GoTo field. When a GoTo field is encountered, the machine will move from its
current location to the new location defined by the field. This is useful when you need to move the machine around
obstacles in the marking window. No marking is performed by the GoTo field — only movement.
Key Point…
Ensure the pattern you wish to edit is open (loaded).
Before you begin editing the pattern, we suggest you place the machine online (F3, F1).
With the machine online, the Design Jog feature will be readily available to assist in defining the field location.
See Design Considerations for details. If you’re new to the process of designing patterns and adding fields, please
take a few minutes and review that section for an overview of key design concepts.
To add a GoTo command to the pattern:
From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen,
press F2 (EDIT).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
The system will display the Edit Menu.
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
Press F8 to toggle the COMMAND selection to GOTO.
Press F1 (TOOL) to add the GoTo command to the
pattern.
The system will display the GoTo Editor Screen for
you to define the command. The parameters are
displayed on two separate pages (GoTo and Tool).
]
]
]
]
]
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online
– Pattern:SAMPLE_05
F1:TOOL
F7:<TEXT
>:000
F2:COMMAND F8:<GOTO
>
001:[
]
F3:CUT
002:[
]
F4:COPY
003:[
]
F5:PASTE
004:[
]
F6:ADJUST
005:[
]
The first page contains the GoTo parameters.
These parameters define the axis coordinate(s)
where the marker will reposition when the GoTo
command is encountered in the pattern and the order
in which the system will move each axis.
Press TAB to select the X (or Y or Z or θ) parameter.
Note: The Z and Theta (θ) parameters will be
available only if your system has the optional
vertical or rotary axis enabled.
Key Point…
The Z-axis coordinate is relative to the vertical
axis origin (0.00). Refer to Z-axis Properties
(Chapter 3) for details.
GOTO
1:
GOTO
X: [ 0.0000]in
--Priorities-Y: [ 0.0000]in
X/Y: <1>
Waypoints: [
1 ]
Z:
<2>
Z: [0.0000 ]in
Theta:<3>
θ : [ 0.0000 ]°
F1 ACCEPT
The Theta-axis coordinate is relative to the
rotational Home position (0°).
Do one of the following to define the coordinates:
•
(recommended) Press the JOG key
and use the
Design Jog feature to interactively position the marker and identify the location.
•
Enter the specific axis coordinate in each axis box.
or
2-96
34700D.DOC
TOOL
TMC470 Controller Operation
GoTo Command Parameters (continued)
(TMP6100 only) Waypoints:
Press TAB to select the Waypoints parameter.
GOTO
The Waypoints parameter defines how many move
segments the marker will use to perform the GoTo
command. The more waypoints you specify, the
straighter its path will be during the GoTo move.
Enter the desired number of waypoints for the move.
Press TAB to select the X/Y Priorities parameter.
These parameters allow you to assign priorities to the
movements that make up the GoTo command. The
priority settings determine which axis moves first,
then second, and so on.
Press ENTER to toggle through the available X/Y axis
priority selections: 0, 1, 2, or 3.
Note: Zero (0) indicates the axis is not to be moved.
Press TAB to select the Z (or θ) Priorities parameter.
Note: The Z and Theta (θ) parameters will be
available only if your system has the optional
vertical or rotary axis enabled.
Press ENTER to toggle through the available priority
selections: 0, 1, 2, or 3.
Note: Zero (0) indicates the axis is not to be moved.
1:
GOTO
TOOL
X: [ 0.0000]in
--Priorities-Y: [ 0.0000]in
X/Y: <1>
Waypoints: [
1 ]
Z:
<2>
Z: [0.0000 ]in
Theta:<3>
θ : [ 0.0000 ]°
F1 ACCEPT
GOTO
1:
GOTO
TOOL
X: [ 0.0000]in
--Priorities-Y: [ 0.0000]in
X/Y: <1>
Waypoints: [
1 ]
Z:
<2>
Z: [0.0000 ]in
Theta:<3>
θ : [ 0.0000 ]°
F1 ACCEPT
GOTO
1:
GOTO
TOOL
X: [ 0.0000]in
--Priorities-Y: [ 0.0000]in
X/Y: <1>
Waypoints: [
1 ]
Z:
<2>
Z: [0.0000 ]in
Theta:<3>
θ : [ 0.0000 ]°
F1 ACCEPT
Key Point…
The priorities apply to the specific GoTo field in
which they are defined. You can set different
priorities for each GoTo field in the pattern to
properly position the marker and its integrated
accessories for that particular move.
If two (or more) axes are assigned the same priority,
the system will move those devices in the following
sequence: Z, Theta, then X/Y.
Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
The second page contains the Tool parameters.
Verify the cursor is on the Printable parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
GOTO
The Printable parameter allows you enable or
disable the execution of this GoTo command.
GOTO
TOOL
Printable: ⌧
There may be times when you wish to use (or not
use) the GoTo command in your pattern. Rather
deleting and recreating the command each time,
you can simply toggle its usage on or off.
1:
F1 ACCEPT
Press ENTER to toggle the printable option ON or OFF.
⌧ indicates this GoTo will be executed.
indicates this GoTo command will not be executed.
After all GoTo command parameters are defined, press F1 (ACCEPT) to save the settings.
34700D.DOC
2-97
TMC470 Controller Operation
2.6.17 Pause Command
You can program the marking system to pause during the printing cycle by including a Pause command in the pattern.
The Pause command will suspend marking operation until the system receives another Start Print command or until the
programmable time delay expires.
Key Point…
Ensure the pattern you wish to edit is open (loaded).
NOTICE
When you add a Pause command to the pattern, the system automatically
places it at the end of the list of fields already defined. You may wish to
move the Pause command to a location in the list where it will be most
effective. See Edit Patterns (Move Fields) for details.
To add a Pause command to the pattern:
From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen,
press F2 (EDIT).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
The system will display the Edit Menu.
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
Press F8 to toggle the COMMAND selection to PAUSE.
Press F1 (TOOL) to add the Pause command to the
pattern.
The system will display the Pause Editor Screen for
you to define the command. The parameters are
displayed on two separate pages (Pause and
Instruction).
]
]
]
]
]
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online
– Pattern:SAMPLE_05
F1:TOOL
F7:<TEXT
>:000
F2:COMMAND F8:<PAUSE >
001:[
]
F3:CUT
002:[
]
F4:COPY
003:[
]
F5:PASTE
004:[
]
F6:ADJUST
005:[
]
The first page contains the Pause parameters.
These parameters define how long the marker will remain paused after the Pause command is executed.
Verify the cursor is on the Mode parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
Start Print forces the marker to pause the printing
cycle until it receives another explicit print
command. This feature may be useful if you want
to print part of a pattern, reposition the part, then
resume printing the remaining fields. The Start
Print may be initiated by the operator or by a
remote input device.
Delay programs the system to pause for a specific
length of time. This feature may be useful in
automated applications where other processes
occur during the print cycle (e.g., clamping,
moving, turning, etc.).
2-98
PAUSE
Mode:
1:
PAUSE
INSTRUCT
Start Print
Time Delay: [00000 ]ms
F1 ACCEPT
Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key to select the desired Pause mode, then press ENTER.
34700D.DOC
Delay
TMC470 Controller Operation
Pause Command Parameters (continued)
If you selected Delay mode, press TAB to select the
Time Delay parameter.
Type the time delay (in milliseconds) in the Time
Delay text box. The system will automatically
resume printing after the specified time.
PAUSE
Mode:
1:
PAUSE
INSTRUCT
Start Print
Delay
Time Delay: [00000 ]ms
F1 ACCEPT
Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
The second page contains the Instruction parameter.
Verify the cursor is on the Instructions parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
The Instructions parameter allows you to define a
message that will be displayed to the operator
while the marker is paused. You might wish to
include notes, comments, or special instructions
related to the pause interval. The displayed
message will be removed from the screen when
operation resumes.
PAUSE
1:
PAUSE
INSTRUCT
Instructions: [
]
F1 ACCEPT
Type the appropriate message in the Instructions
text box.
Note: You can force the system to display a second
line by adding \N to the instruction text.
For example, if you enter the instruction text as:
This is a test! \N T esting 12345
The system will display the following instructions when
the Pause command is processed:
This is a Test!
Testing 12345
Note:
Later, if you wish to remove instructions, be sure to delete all characters from the Instructions text box,
including spaces and line breaks. If any non-printable characters are left in the text box, the system will
display a blank Instructions window during the Pause interval.
After all Pause command parameters are defined, press F1 (ACCEPT) to save the settings.
Key Point…
When you add a Pause command to the pattern, the system automatically places it at the end of the list of fields
already defined. You may wish to move the Pause command to a location in the list where it will be most effective.
See Edit Patterns (Move Fields) for details.
34700D.DOC
2-99
TMC470 Controller Operation
2.6.18 Input Command
You can design your patterns to check the status of the marking system spare input signals and have the software
respond accordingly. This allows the TMC470 to emulate a Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) by controlling when
and how the system responds to the signals.
When the system encounters an Input command during the print cycle, it compares the state of the input signals with
the Input command parameter values. If the actual signal states match their parameters, the system continues with
the print cycle without interruption. If any signal state does not match its parameters, the system will take the
appropriate action as defined by the Input command instructions.
Key Point…
Ensure the pattern you wish to edit is open (loaded).
NOTICE
When you add an Input command to the pattern, the system automatically
places it at the end of the list of fields already defined. You may wish to
move the Input command to a location in the list where it will be most
effective. See Edit Patterns (Move Fields) for details.
To add an Input command to the pattern:
From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen,
press F2 (EDIT).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
The system will display the Edit Menu.
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
Press F8 to toggle the COMMAND selection to INPUT.
Press F1 (TOOL) to add the Input command to the
pattern.
The system will display the Input Editor Screen for
you to define the command. The parameters are
displayed on three separate pages (Input,
Condition, and Instruction).
2-100
34700D.DOC
]
]
]
]
]
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online
– Pattern:SAMPLE_05
F1:TOOL
F7:<TEXT
>:000
F2:COMMAND F8:<INPUT >
001:[
]
F3:CUT
002:[
]
F4:COPY
003:[
]
F5:PASTE
004:[
]
F6:ADJUST
005:[
]
TMC470 Controller Operation
Input Command Parameters (continued)
The first page contains the Input parameters.
The system provides three spare input signals: INPUT 11, INPUT 12, and INPUT 13. These signals are received on
pins 11, 12, and 13 of the TMC470 I/O Port connector. Refer to the TMC470 Installation/Maintenance Manual for
complete I/O signal specifications.
When an Input command is executed during the print cycle, it polls the status of the spare input signals, compares
their actual signal states with their assigned states, and takes the appropriate action as follows:
•
•
If all actual signal states match their assigned states, the system continues the print cycle without interruption.
If any signal state does not match its assigned state, the system takes action as defined by the False Condition
parameter. See below.
NOTICE
The system polls the input signals at the time the Input command is executed
during the print cycle, not at the time the Start Print command is issued.
Verify the cursor is on the Input 11 line.
If not, press TAB to select it.
OFF – Select OFF if you want the system to
proceed with the print cycle when this signal is in
its OFF state.
•
If the signal is off when polled, the system will
proceed with the print cycle.
•
If the signal is on when polled, the system will
execute the task defined by the False Condition
parameter. See below.
INPUT
Input 11
Input 12
Input 13
1:
INPUT
OFF
OFF
OFF
CONDITION
ON
ON
ON
INSTRUCT
DON’T CARE
DON’T CARE
DON’T CARE
F1 ACCEPT
ON – Select ON if you want the system to proceed
with the print cycle when this signal is in its ON
state.
•
If the signal is on when polled, the system will
proceed with the print cycle.
•
If the signal is off when polled, the system will
execute the task defined by the False Condition
parameter. See below.
DON’T CARE – Select DON’T CARE (the default) if
you want the system to ignore the signal state. Regardless of the signal state, the system will proceed with the
print cycle.
Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key to select the assigned signal state, then press ENTER.
Repeat the process (above) for the remaining spare input signals (Input 12 and Input 13), as applicable.
Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
34700D.DOC
2-101
TMC470 Controller Operation
Input Command Parameters (continued)
The second page contains the Condition parameters.
The False Condition parameter defines what action the system will take if the actual state of any spare input signal does
not match its assigned state. If all spare input signals match their assigned states, the print cycle will continue without
interruption. If any of signal state does not match its definition, the system can be programmed to respond in one of
three ways.
Configure one of the following options:
Wait Condition. The marking system will suspend
operation until the signal state matches its definition.
The amount of time the system will wait is defined by
the Timeout parameter.
•
•
•
Press TAB to select Wait, then press ENTER.
Press TAB to move the cursor to the Timeout text box.
INPUT
Type the wait period (in milliseconds) in the Timeout
text box.
False Condition:
Wait
Timeout: [00000 ]ms
End
Jump
Field: [000 ]
Note: If the Timeout parameter is set to 0
(zero), the system will wait indefinitely for the
signal state to match its definition. Otherwise,
when the timeout period expires, the system
will execute the End Condition (see below).
•
End Condition. The marking system will end the print
cycle and move the machine to its Park position.
Press TAB to select End, then press ENTER.
1:
INSTRUCT
INPUT
CONDITION
INSTRUCT
False Condition:
Wait
Timeout: [00000 ]ms
End
Jump
Field: [000 ]
F1 ACCEPT
or
CONDITION
F1 ACCEPT
INPUT
•
INPUT
Add instructions for the operator, as applicable.
See Instructions parameter, below.
or
1:
Jump Condition. The marking system will jump to the
specified field in the pattern continue the print cycle.
•
•
•
Press TAB to select Jump, then press ENTER.
Press TAB to move the cursor to the Field text box.
Type the field number the system should jump to
and continue the print cycle.
INPUT
1:
INPUT
CONDITION
False Condition:
Wait
Timeout: [00000 ]ms
End
Jump
Field: [000 ]
F1 ACCEPT
2-102
34700D.DOC
INSTRUCT
TMC470 Controller Operation
Input Command Parameters (continued)
Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
The third page contains the Instruction parameter.
Verify the cursor is on the Instructions parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
The Instructions parameter allows you to define a
message that will be displayed to the operator
while marker operations are suspended during a
timeout. See Wait Condition, above. The displayed
message will be removed from the screen when
operation resumes.
INPUT
1:
INPUT
CONDITION
INSTRUCT
Instructions: [
Type the appropriate message in the Instructions text
box.
Note: You can force the system to display a
second line by adding \N to the instruction
text.
]
F1 ACCEPT
For example, if you enter the instruction text as:
This is a test! \N T esting 12345
The system will display the following instructions when
the Input command is processed:
This is a Test!
Testing 12345
Note:
Later, if you wish to remove instructions, be sure to delete all characters from the Instructions text box,
including spaces and line breaks. If any non-printable characters are left in the text box, the system will
display a blank Instructions window during the Wait Condition interval.
After all Input command parameters are defined, press F1 (ACCEPT) to save the settings.
34700D.DOC
2-103
TMC470 Controller Operation
2.6.19 Output Command
You can design your patterns to activate the marking system spare output signals during the printing cycle. When the
system encounters an Output command during the print cycle, it sets the spare output signals ON or OFF as defined by
the Output command parameters.
The system provides two spare output signals: OUTPUT 24 and OUTPUT 25. These signals are transmitted from pins 24
and 25 of the TMC470 I/O Port connector. Refer to the TMC470 Installation/Maintenance Manual for complete I/O signal
specifications.
Key Point…
Ensure the pattern you wish to edit is open (loaded).
NOTICE
When you add an Output command to the pattern, the system
automatically places it at the end of the list of fields already defined. You
may wish to move the Output command to a location in the list where it
will be most effective. See Edit Patterns (Move Fields) for details.
To add an Output command to the pattern:
From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen, press
F2 (EDIT).
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
The system will display the Edit Menu.
Press F8 to toggle the COMMAND selection to OUTPUT.
Press F1 (TOOL) to add the Output command to the
pattern.
The system will display the Output Editor Screen for
you to define the command.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
Verify the cursor is on the Output 24 line.
If not, press TAB to select it.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online
– Pattern:SAMPLE_05
F1:TOOL
F7:<TEXT
>:000
F2:COMMAND F8:<OUTPUT >
001:[
]
F3:CUT
002:[
]
F4:COPY
003:[
]
F5:PASTE
004:[
]
F6:ADJUST
005:[
]
OUTPUT
OFF – Select OFF if you want the system to set the
spare output signal to its off state.
]
]
]
]
]
Output 24
Output 25
1 ----------------------------OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON – Select ON if you want the system to set the
spare output signal to its on state.
F1 ACCEPT
Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key to select the
appropriate signal state, then press ENTER.
Repeat the process for spare signal Output 25.
After all Output command parameters are defined, press F1 (ACCEPT) to save the settings.
2-104
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
2.6.20 Serial Command
You can design your patterns to include Serial commands. When executed, the system will transmit a specific message
to an I/O device connected to the Serial2 port of the TMC470 Controller. The system will wait for a response from the
I/O device, then respond according to the Serial command parameters you define.
Key Point…
Ensure the pattern you wish to edit is open (loaded).
In order to add a Serial Command to your pattern, the Serial Tool parameter must be enabled.
Refer to Serial2 Communication Properties (Chapter 3) for details.
NOTICE
When you add a Serial command to the pattern, the system automatically
places it at the end of the list of fields already defined. You may wish to
move the Serial command to a location in the list where it will be most
effective. See Edit Patterns (Move Fields) for details.
To add a Serial command to the pattern:
From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen, press
F2 (EDIT).
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
The system will display the Edit Menu.
Press F8 to toggle the COMMAND selection to SERIAL.
Press F1 (TOOL) to add the Serial command to the
pattern.
The system will display the Serial Editor Screen for
you to define the command. The parameters are
displayed on two pages (Message and Condition).
Verify the cursor is on the Message text box.
If not, press TAB to select it.
Type the text of the message in the Message text box.
You may include message flags to insert real-time
data into the transmitted message. For example,
%C would provide date/timestamp and %13@ would
provide an ASCII carriage return <CR> character.
34700D.DOC
]
]
]
]
]
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online
– Pattern:SAMPLE_05
F1:TOOL
F7:<TEXT
>:000
F2:COMMAND F8:<SERIAL >
001:[
]
F3:CUT
002:[
]
F4:COPY
003:[
]
F5:PASTE
004:[
]
6
:ADJUST
F
005:[
]
SERIAL
The Message parameter defines the character string
you wish to transmit to the I/O device.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
Message
Response
Timeout:
1:
MESSAGE
CONDITION
[
[
[05 ] sec
]
]
F1 ACCEPT
2-105
TMC470 Controller Operation
Serial Command Parameters (continued)
Press TAB to select the Response text box.
The Response parameter defines the specific character
string that you expect to receive from the I/O device.
If the I/O device returns a valid string, within the allotted
time limit (see Timeout, below), the system will proceed
to the next field in the pattern.
If the I/O device returns an invalid string, the system
will take action as specified by the False Condition
parameter setting. See below.
SERIAL
Message
Response
Timeout:
1:
MESSAGE
CONDITION
[
[
[05 ] sec
]
]
F1 ACCEPT
Note: If you enter nothing in the Response parameter
text box, the system assumes that a response is
not required from the device and it will proceed
to the next field in the pattern.
Type the expected response in the Response text box.
The Serial2 Communication parameters for
Programmable Protocol govern the Response
message (i.e., Start Character, Ignore Character,
Start Position, Length, and Terminator).
Note: The default settings require an ASCII
carriage return (i.e., decimal 13) at the
end of the message.
Press TAB to select the Timeout parameter.
The Timeout parameter defines how long the system
will wait (in seconds) for a response. If the I/O
device takes longer than the allotted time to
respond, the system will take action as specified by
the False Condition parameter setting. See below.
Type the allotted time in the Timeout text box.
2-106
SERIAL
Message
Response
Timeout:
1:
MESSAGE
CONDITION
[
[
[05 ] sec
F1 ACCEPT
34700D.DOC
]
]
TMC470 Controller Operation
Serial Command Parameters (continued)
Press PAGE DOWN to display the Condition Screen.
The False Condition parameters define what action the
system should take when the response from the I/O
device is invalid or if the response period times out
(elapses).
Configure the parameter for one of these conditions:
SERIAL
1:
F1 ACCEPT
Press TAB to select Abort, then press ENTER.
SERIAL
or
End. The marking system will end the print cycle and
move the machine to its Park position.
•
CONDITION
False Condition:
Abort
End
Jump
Field: [001 ]
Abort. The system will abort the print cycle and
place the machine offline.
•
MESSAGE
1:
MESSAGE
CONDITION
False Condition:
Abort
End
Jump
Field: [001 ]
F1 ACCEPT
Press TAB to select End, then press ENTER.
or
Jump. The marking system will jump to the specified
field in the pattern continue the print cycle.
•
•
•
Press TAB to select Jump, then press ENTER.
Press TAB to move the cursor to the Field text
box.
Type the field number the system should jump
to and continue the print cycle.
SERIAL
1:
MESSAGE
CONDITION
False Condition:
Abort
End
Jump
Field: [001 ]
F1 ACCEPT
After all Serial command parameters are defined, press F1 (ACCEPT) to save the settings.
34700D.DOC
2-107
TMC470 Controller Operation
2.6.21 Machine Command
The Machine command allows you to change certain parameters while printing the pattern. Normally, these parameters
are applied to all objects in the pattern throughout the entire print cycle.
The Machine command allows you to temporarily change parameter values so that objects following the command in
the pattern list will use the alternate settings. You may include as many Machine commands in the pattern as necessary
to change (or reset) the parameters to meet your specific printing needs.
The parameter settings of a Machine command will remain in effect until another Machine command is processed or
until the print cycle terminates. After the pattern prints and the machine parks, the parameter values that where
changed by the Machine command are restored to their original settings.
Key Point…
Ensure the pattern you wish to edit is open (loaded).
NOTICE
When you add a Serial command to the pattern, the system automatically
places it at the end of the list of fields already defined. You may wish to
move the Serial command to a location in the list where it will be most
effective. See Edit Patterns (Move Fields) for details.
To add a Machine command to the pattern:
From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen, press
F2 (EDIT).
The system will display the Edit Menu.
Press F8 to toggle the COMMAND selection to MACHINE.
Press F1 (TOOL) to add the Machine command to the
pattern.
The system will display the Machine Editor Screen
for you to define the command. Parameters may be
displayed on four pages (Marker, Pin, Z, and Theta).
Note: The Z and Theta pages will be available only
if your system has optional axis enabled.
2-108
34700D.DOC
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
]
]
]
]
]
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online
– Pattern:SAMPLE_05
F1:TOOL
F7:<TEXT
>:000
F2:COMMAND F8:<MACHINE>
001:[
]
F3:CUT
002:[
]
F4:COPY
003:[
]
F5:PASTE
004:[
]
F6:ADJUST
005:[
]
TMC470 Controller Operation
Machine Command Parameters (continued)
Verify the cursor is on the Speed Rate parameter.
The system provides a range of acceptable speeds at
which the system can mark to ensure precise
character formation. Within that range, you can
adjust the speed of the marker in 10% increments.
The pointer indicates the selected speed rate for the
X-and Y-axes from 10% to 100%.
MACHINE
1:
MARKER
PIN
Speed Rate:
<
Max Speed Rate: <
Z
THETA
>:100%
>:100%
Settle: <
>:00ms
F1 ACCEPT
Example: You may wish to slow down the marker
when printing objects that require very precise dot
placement or speed up the marker when dot
placement is not as critical.
Note: The Machine Speed Rate setting is relative to the Setup/Marker Speed Rate (system parameter) setting. If
the Setup/Marker Speed Rate is set to 80%, and you set the Machine command Speed Rate to 70%, then the
resulting speed will be 70% of 80% (i.e., 56%).
Press ENTER to increase the speed rate.
Press CTRL + ENTER to decrease the speed rate.
•
•
Higher rates will result in faster marking times.
Slower rates will result in slower marking times, but will improve the quality of the printed mark.
Press TAB to select the Max Speed Rate parameter.
The maximum speed is the fastest rate the marker
will use while executing large moves. Large moves
are those that typically require 200 or more steps.
This includes non-marking moves as when Preposition, Park, and Online commands are executed.
MACHINE
1:
PIN
Speed Rate:
<
Max Speed Rate: <
Z
THETA
>:100%
>:100%
Settle: <
>:00ms
Note: The Max Speed Rate setting is relative to the
Setup/Marker Speed Rate (system parameter)
setting. If the Setup/Marker Speed Rate is set to
80%, and you set the Machine command Max Speed
Rate to 70%, then the resulting speed will be 70% of
80% (i.e., 56%).
MARKER
F1 ACCEPT
Press ENTER to increase the max speed rate.
Press CTRL + ENTER to decrease the max speed rate.
The pointer indicates the selected speed rate from 10% to 100%.
Press TAB to select the Settle parameter.
The Settle parameter defines the time delay (in
milliseconds) between the pin arrival at the mark
destination and the firing of the impact pin. Longer
settling times will affect print cycle times.
EXAMPLE:
If you have a particular object that
requires extremely accurate dot placement, you
could use a Machine command to increase the
settling time for that field. After printing the object,
use another Machine command to restore the Settle
parameter to its typical value. This would help to
keep the cycle time relatively low by changing the
settling time for only the one object, rather than for
the entire pattern.
MACHINE
1:
MARKER
PIN
Speed Rate:
<
Max Speed Rate: <
Settle: <
Z
THETA
>:100%
>:100%
>:00ms
F1 ACCEPT
Press ENTER to increase the settling time.
Press CTRL + ENTER to decrease the settling time.
The pointer indicates the delay from 00ms to 25ms.
34700D.DOC
2-109
TMC470 Controller Operation
Machine Command Parameters (continued)
Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
The second page contains the Pin parameters.
Verify the cursor is on the Stroke parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
MACHINE
The Stroke parameter defines the distance from the
tip of the retracted pin to the surface to be marked.
Example: Suppose you wish to increase the
marking depth of a particular field in the pattern.
This is usually accomplished by increasing the pin
stroke. If your system includes a Z-axis, you could
position the marker at the desired distance above
marking surface, then use a Machine command to
define the new pin stroke distance for that field.
Enter the value (as close as possible) to the actual
stroke distance (within 10%).
Press TAB to select the Pressure parameter.
Press ENTER to toggle through the available settings.
Press TAB to select the Return parameter.
MARKER
Stroke: [0.1250]in
Pressure: < 80>psi
Pin Return Rate:
1:
<
Stroke: [0.1250]in
Pressure: < 80>psi
Pin Return Rate:
THETA
>: 50%
PIN
Z
THETA
Return: <20 >psi
<
>: 50%
F1 ACCEPT
Press ENTER to toggle through the available settings.
Press TAB to select the Pin Return Rate parameter.
The Pin Return Rate allows you to specify the type
of recovery condition you expect to encounter so the
marking system software can automatically
compensate for it. The pointer indicates the selected
pin return rate from 0% to 100%.
•
Select a lower pin recovery time for harder
marking surfaces or
for smaller pin cone angles (e.g., 30°).
•
Select a higher pin recovery for softer marking
surfaces (e.g., plastic) or for larger pin cone
angles (e.g., 60°).
MACHINE
1:
MARKER
Stroke: [0.1250]in
Pressure: < 80>psi
Pin Return Rate:
PIN
Example: Suppose part of the pattern will be
marked on a hard metal surface and part of it will
be marked on soft plastic. You could set the pin
recovery time to one value for marking objects on
the metal, then use a Machine command to change
the settings to mark other objects on the plastic.
Press ENTER to increase the pin return rate.
Press CTRL + ENTER to decrease the pin return rate.
34700D.DOC
Z
THETA
Return: <20 >psi
<
F1 ACCEPT
Higher recovery times will result in a longer print
cycles.
2-110
Z
Return: <20 >psi
MARKER
The Return parameter defines the return air
pressure for your marking system.
PIN
F1 ACCEPT
MACHINE
The Pressure parameter defines the drive air
pressure for your marking system.
1:
>: 50%
TMC470 Controller Operation
Machine Command Parameters (continued)
Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
The third page contains the Z-axis parameters.
Verify the cursor is on the Speed Rate parameter.
The Z-axis Speed Rate controls the rate of travel
along the vertical axis, typically up and down the
Z-axis tool post. The pointer indicates the selected
speed rate from 10% to 100%.
Example: You may wish to increase the Z-axis
speed when the marker is traveling larger distances
up and down the axis, but reduce the speed when it
is traveling between marking objects in the pattern.
MACHINE
1:
Speed Rate:
Press ENTER to increase the speed rate.
Press CTRL + ENTER to decrease the speed rate.
Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
PIN
<
Z
THETA
>:100%
F1 ACCEPT
Note: The Z Speed Rate setting is relative to the
Setup/Z Speed Rate (system parameter) setting. If
the Setup/Z Speed Rate is set to 80%, and you set
the Machine command Z Speed Rate to 70%, then the
resulting speed will be 70% of 80% (i.e., 56%).
MARKER
The fourth page contains the Theta-axis parameters.
Verify the cursor is on the Speed Rate parameter.
The Speed Rate setting controls the rotational rate of
the rotary drive fixture. The pointer indicates the
selected speed rate for the Theta-axis from 10% to
100%.
MACHINE
1:
Speed Rate:
Press ENTER to increase the speed rate.
Press CTRL + ENTER to decrease the speed rate.
Press TAB to select the Part Diameter parameter.
This defines the size (diameter) of the part being
marked. The system uses the part diameter to
determine the circumference of the part and to
calculate the amount of rotation to mark the pattern.
PIN
<
Part Diameter:
Example: Suppose you need to rotate a part 180°,
then mark a text field in perpendicular mode. You
could rotate the part at the maximum Theta-axis
speed, then use a Machine command to reduce the
speed while performing the mark.
MARKER
Z
THETA
>:100%
[ 1.00 ]in.
F1 ACCEPT
MACHINE
1:
Speed Rate:
Part Diameter:
Example: Suppose you need to two mark locations
on a cam shaft that have different diameters. You
could define the part diameter and mark at the first
location, then insert a Machine command to redefine
the diameter for marking at the second location.
MARKER
PIN
<
Z
THETA
>:100%
[ 1.00 ]in.
F1 ACCEPT
Note: The Theta Speed Rate setting is relative to the
Setup/Theta Speed Rate (system parameter) setting. If the Setup/Theta Speed Rate is set to 80%, and you set the
Machine command Theta Speed Rate to 70%, then the resulting speed will be 70% of 80% (i.e., 56%).
In the Part Diameter text box, enter the diameter of the part to be marked.
After all Machine command parameters are defined, press F1 (ACCEPT) to save the settings.
34700D.DOC
2-111
TMC470 Controller Operation
2.7 TEST PATTERNS
You can test patterns to ensure all the fields will print within the boundaries of the marking window. The system
software examines each field in the order they are defined. An error message will be displayed if the system
encounters a problem.
Load the desired pattern.
From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen,
press F1 (FILE). The system will display the File Menu.
From the File Menu, press F6 (TEST).
The system will check the fields in the pattern and
display a screen similar to one of these.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
F1:OPEN
F2:NEW
F7:<PATTERN>
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
]
F3:SAVE
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
F4:SAVE-AS
003:[
]
F5:PROPERTIES
004:[
]
F6:TEST
005:[
]
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
This message shows the system found no errors
with the pattern and the pattern may be printed.
This message shows that the system found an
error with Field 002. It extends beyond the left
boundary of the marking window. This error
must be corrected in order to print the pattern.
Press F1 (ACKNOWLEDGE) to return to the Main
Screen.
If an error was discovered:
•
•
2-112
*001:[TEXT: TEST
User RESULT
Text: SCREEN
0 errors.
002:[TEXT:Pattern
Fixed contains
Text: ABCDE
003:[
F1–Acknowledge
004:[
005:[
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
TEST RESULT SCREEN
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
PatternFixed
pixel range
002:[TEXT:
Text:error!
ABCDEField 002
Exceeded
Left
boundary!
003:[
F1–Acknowledge
004:[
005:[
Edit the reported field, as required, to position it within the marking window.
Note: Slight changes to its location, alignment, rotation, or character size may correct the problem.
Re-run the test to ensure there are no additional problems with this field, or other fields in the pattern.
34700D.DOC
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
TMC470 Controller Operation
2.8 EDIT PATTERNS
You can edit a pattern by changing the pattern parameters or by changing individual fields within the pattern.
Additionally, you can add, copy, insert, and delete fields from the pattern.
2.8.1 Change Pattern Parameters
Certain parameters and options are stored with the pattern. The pattern parameters affect only the currently loaded
pattern. They do not affect other patterns stored in the controller. The pattern parameters may be defined when the
pattern is first created, or you may change them afterward, as necessary. See Configure Pattern Properties for details.
2.8.2 Change Field Parameters
Each field in the pattern is defined by a variety of parameters that control its printed location, appearance, and content.
You can change these parameters to redefine the field and its characteristics whenever necessary.
Load the desired pattern.
When finished editing the field, press F1 (ACCEPT).
Place the system in Designer (or Supervisor) mode.
Press TAB to move the cursor to the field you wish to edit, then press ENTER.
Edit the field parameters, as applicable.
See Define Objects Patterns for parameter descriptions.
(optional) Test the pattern.
Save the pattern to preserve your edits.
2.8.3 Copy Fields
You may copy an existing field in a pattern, then edit the resulting (new) field to make it unique.
Load the desired pattern.
Place the system in Designer (or Supervisor) mode.
Press TAB to move the cursor to the field you wish to copy.
Do one of the following:
•
Press F2 (EDIT), then press F4 (COPY).
•
Press CTRL + C (hold the CTRL key and press C).
or
Press TAB to move the cursor to where you wish to insert the copied field.
Do one of the following:
•
Press F2 (EDIT), then press F5 (PASTE).
•
Press CTRL + INS (hold the CTRL key and press INS).
•
Press CTRL + V (hold the CTRL key and press V).
or
or
With the newly inserted field selected, press ENTER.
(optional) Test the pattern.
Edit the new field as applicable.
Note: At a minimum, you will need to edit the new field’s X/Y-axis coordinates.
Otherwise it will print in the same location as the field from which it was copied.
Save the pattern to preserve your edits.
34700D.DOC
2-113
TMC470 Controller Operation
2.8.4 Delete Fields
If you want to remove a field from the pattern:
Load the desired pattern.
Place the system in Designer (or Supervisor) mode.
Press TAB to move the cursor to the field you wish to delete.
Do one of the following:
•
Press F2 (EDIT), then press F3 (CUT).
•
Press CTRL + X (hold the CTRL key and then press X).
•
Press CTRL + DEL (hold the CTRL key and press DEL).
or
or
Save the pattern to preserve your edits.
2-114
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
2.8.5 Move Fields (Change Print Order)
As you add fields to your pattern, the system places them at the end of a sequential list in the order they are created.
This list is displayed on the Main Screen. When the system prints the pattern, it processes each field, one field at a
time, in the order listed.
After your fields are created, you may wish to rearrange the order in which they will be processed. For example, you
may want certain fields to print before others, or you may need a Pause or GoTo command to be executed at a specific
time during the print cycle. You can effectively change the printing order by simply rearranging the fields in the list. The
Cut and Paste tools allow you to move fields up or down the list to redefine the processing order.
Load the desired pattern.
Place the system in Designer (or Supervisor) mode.
Press TAB to move the cursor to the field you wish to move.
Do one of the following:
•
Press F2 (EDIT), then press F3 (CUT).
•
Press CTRL + X (hold the CTRL key and then press X).
•
Press CTRL + DEL (hold the CTRL key and press DEL).
or
or
Press TAB to move the cursor to where you wish the field to reside in the list.
Do one of the following:
•
Press F2 (EDIT), then press F5 (PASTE).
•
Press CTRL + INS (hold the CTRL key and press INS).
•
Press CTRL + V (hold the CTRL key and press V).
or
or
Save the pattern to preserve your edits.
34700D.DOC
2-115
TMC470 Controller Operation
2.8.6 Adjusting the Pattern Anchor
Suppose you’ve already defined the fields in your pattern and discover they all need to be relocated. Maybe you are
satisfied with their relative layout, but they all need to be shifted (up, down, left, or right) by the same amount. You
could edit each field to redefine its X- and Y-axis coordinates, or you could simply adjust the pattern and let the system
software do the work for you.
When you adjust the pattern, the system will move the first field of the pattern to the new location that you specify. It
will also move all other fields by the same amount. This effectively lets you treat all of the fields as a group so that
when they are moved (adjusted), they maintain their position relative to each other.
2-116
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
To adjust the pattern anchor:
Load the pattern you wish to adjust.
Place the system in Designer (or Supervisor) mode.
From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen,
press F2 (EDIT).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online
– Pattern:SAMPLE_05
F1:TOOL
F7:<2D MATRIX>:003
The system will display the Edit Menu.
From the Edit Menu, press F6 (ADJUST).
The system will display the Pattern Adjust Screen.
The Pattern Adjust Screen shows the X/Y axis
coordinates where the first tool in the pattern is
anchored. These coordinates are relative to the
marking window origin (0,0).
001:[TEXT:
002:[TEXT:
003:[TEXT:
004:[
005:[
F2:COMMAND
F3:CUT
F4:COPY
F5:PASTE
F6:ADJUST
F8:<GOTO
>
0]
3]
3]
]
]
-------------Pattern Adjust--------------
Verify the cursor is on the Anchor X parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
Enter the X-axis coordinate where you wish to move
the first tool in the pattern.
Press TAB to select the Anchor Y parameter.
Press F1 (ACCEPT) to adjust the pattern anchor.
Enter the Y-axis coordinate where you wish to move
the first tool in the pattern.
First Tool Anchor X: [
First Tool Anchor Y: [
3.0000]in
6.0000]in
F1 ACCEPT
-------------Pattern Adjust-------------First Tool Anchor X: [
First Tool Anchor Y: [
The system will move the first tool in the pattern
and anchor it at the new location, as specified.
The system will automatically adjust the locations
of all other fields in the pattern by the same amount
as the first tool.
34700D.DOC
3.0000]in
6.0000]in
F1 ACCEPT
2-117
TMC470 Controller Operation
2.9 CONFIGURE PATTERN PROPERTIES
Certain parameters and options are defined and stored with the pattern. Unlike system parameters that affect all
patterns and all operations, the pattern parameters affect only the currently loaded pattern. They do not affect other
patterns stored in the controller. The pattern parameters may be defined when the pattern is first created or you may
change them afterward, as necessary. Pattern parameters are used to:
• configure the pattern serial number
• define the park position
• define default text parameters
• define pattern instructions
• define default pin parameters
• define X/Y-axis speed parameters
• define Z-axis speed parameters
• define Theta-axis parameters
2.9.1 Pattern Serial Number
A pattern serial number is stored with the pattern parameters and applies only to the pattern in which it resides. Unlike
the Omni serial number which is a system parameter stored in permanent memory, the pattern serial number is
independent of other patterns’ serial numbers.
The pattern serial number is marked each time a text string containing a pattern serial number flag (%S) is printed.
The pattern serial number may be set to increment each time the pattern is printed, or after each field containing a
pattern serial number is printed. When the serial number upper limit is reached, pattern serial numbers may be set to
wrap (reset) or may be set to suspend (halt) printing operations until you take action to reset the number. See Codes
and Real-time Data for details on using the pattern serial number flag in your patterns.
Before you begin, open the pattern you wish to edit.
To configure the pattern serial number:
From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen,
press F1 (FILE).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN
–Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
F1:OPEN
The system will display the File menu.
F2:NEW
F7:<PATTERN>
*001:[TEXT:
User Text:
F3:SAVE
002:[TEXT:
F4:SAVE-ASFixed Text: ABCDE
003:[
F5:PROPERTIES
004:[
F6:TEST
005:[
From the File menu, press F5 (PROPERTIES).
The system will display the Pattern properties
screen. The first page shows the pattern SN
parameters.
Verify the cursor is on the SN parameter. If not,
press TAB to select it.
PATTERN:
The SN (serial number) parameter shows the
current serial number value. This value indicates
the next serial number to be marked in the field (or
fields) containing a pattern serial number flag (%S).
You can manually change the current pattern serial
number at any time by editing this parameter.
Enter the desired value in the SN box.
2-118
34700D.DOC
SN
PARK
SN
:[000000001]
Lower:[000000001]
Mode: WRAP
HALT
DEFAULTS
]
]
]
]
]
INSTRUCT
Delta:[
1]
Upper:[000999999]
Increment: PATTERN
FIELD
F1 ACCEPT
TMC470 Controller Operation
Pattern Serial Number (continued)
Press TAB to select the Delta parameter.
The Delta parameter defines the amount the serial
number will be changed when its value is
automatically updated by the system.
Enter the desired value in the Delta box.
•
Enter a positive value for the system to
automatically increase the serial number.
•
Enter a negative value for the system to
automatically decrease the serial number.
SN
PARK
SN
:[000000001]
Lower:[000000001]
Mode: WRAP
HALT
DEFAULTS
INSTRUCT
Delta:[
1]
Upper:[000999999]
Increment: PATTERN
FIELD
F1 ACCEPT
Press TAB to select the Lower parameter.
The Lower parameter defines the smallest allowable
serial number.
PATTERN:
Enter the desired value in the Lower box.
PATTERN:
SN
PARK
SN
:[000000001]
Lower:[000000001]
Mode: WRAP
HALT
DEFAULTS
INSTRUCT
Delta:[
1]
Upper:[000999999]
Increment: PATTERN
FIELD
F1 ACCEPT
Press TAB to select the Upper parameter.
The Upper parameter defines the largest allowable
serial number.
Enter the desired value in the Upper box.
PATTERN:
SN
PARK
SN
:[000000001]
Lower:[000000001]
Mode: WRAP
HALT
DEFAULTS
INSTRUCT
Delta:[
1]
Upper:[000999999]
Increment: PATTERN
FIELD
F1 ACCEPT
Press TAB to select the Mode parameter.
The Mode parameter defines what action the system
will take when the serial number upper (or lower)
upper limit is reached.
Wrap will automatically reset the serial number
and the system will continue printing.
Note: If the Delta parameter value (see above)
is positive, the serial number will reset to its
lower limit. If the Delta value is negative, the
serial number will reset to its upper limit.
PATTERN:
SN
PARK
SN
:[000000001]
Lower:[000000001]
Mode: WRAP
HALT
DEFAULTS
INSTRUCT
Delta:[
1]
Upper:[000999999]
Increment: PATTERN
FIELD
F1 ACCEPT
Halt will temporarily suspend printing operations.
After the marker halts, you must either load a new pattern or manually reset the SN parameter value.
Use the UP or DOWN ARROW key to select the desired mode setting, then press ENTER.
34700D.DOC
2-119
TMC470 Controller Operation
Pattern Serial Number (continued)
Press TAB to select the Increment parameter.
The Increment parameter defines when the system
will update the pattern serial number.
Pattern will update the serial number after the
marker prints the entire pattern. This allows a
pattern containing multiple serial number flags to
print the same serial number in each field.
PATTERN:
PARK
SN
:[000000001]
Lower:[000000001]
Mode: WRAP
HALT
Field will update the serial number after the
marker prints each field containing a serial number
flag. This allows a pattern containing multiple
serial number flags to print a different serial
number in each field.
SN
DEFAULTS
INSTRUCT
Delta:[
1]
Upper:[000999999]
Increment: PATTERN
FIELD
F1 ACCEPT
Use the UP or DOWN ARROW key to select the desired mode setting, then press ENTER.
Note: Ensure the SN parameter value is valid (between the Lower and Upper limit settings) before you exit this
page. Otherwise, the system will issue an error message if you attempt to save the settings or display a
different page with an invalid serial number value.
Press F1 (ACCEPT) to save the pattern serial number parameter settings.
2-120
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
2.9.2 Pattern Park Position
Each pattern has a Park position. It defines where the marker will move when the print cycle completes or when a Park
command is issued by the operator. The Park position is programmable. It is often set to move the marking pin out of
the way for easy removal and installation of parts being marked. The Park position may be different for each pattern
and may include X-,Y-, Z-, and Theta-axis coordinates, as applicable.
Key Point…
Before you begin setting the pattern park position, we suggest you place the machine online (F3, F1).
With the machine online, the Design Jog feature will be readily available to assist in defining the Park location.
See Design Considerations (Placement of Objects) for details.
Before you begin, open the pattern you wish to edit.
To configure the pattern Park position:
From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen, press
F1 (FILE). The system will display the File menu.
From the File menu, press F5 (PROPERTIES).
The system will display the Pattern properties screen.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN
–Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
F1:OPEN
F2:NEW
F7:<PATTERN>
*001:[TEXT:
User Text:
F3:SAVE
002:[TEXT:
F4:SAVE-ASFixed Text: ABCDE
003:[
F5:PROPERTIES
004:[
F6:TEST
005:[
Press PAGE DOWN to display the Park Screen.
The system will display each available machine axis .
The values in the adjacent boxes identify the axis
coordinates of the Park position.
PATTERN:
Note: The Z-axis parameter and the Theta-axis
parameter will be available only if your system
has the optional axis enabled.
]
]
]
]
]
SN
PARK
X:
Y:
Z:
Theta:
DEFAULTS
INSTRUCT
[ 6.0000]in
[ 6.0000]in
[ 2.0000]in
[ 0.00]
degrees
F1 ACCEPT
Do one of the following:
•
Press the JOG key
and use the Design Jog feature
to interactively position the marker and identify the desired location.
•
Enter the specific axis coordinate in each box.
or
Press F1 (ACCEPT) to save the pattern park position parameter settings.
34700D.DOC
2-121
TMC470 Controller Operation
2.9.3 Default Text Settings
When you create a text string, the system automatically applies default settings that determine the size, shape, and
appearance of the printed text. You can change the default values for these parameters so that new text strings will
automatically use your specific settings when they are created.
Key Point…
•
•
Changing the default text parameters does not affect existing text strings – only newly created ones.
If you’re new to the process of designing patterns and adding fields, please take a few minutes and review
Design Considerations for an overview of character size, shape, and construction.
Before you begin, open the pattern you wish to edit.
To define default text settings:
From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen,
press F1 (FILE).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN
–Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
F1:OPEN
The system will display the File menu.
F2:NEW
F7:<PATTERN>
*001:[TEXT:
User Text:
F3:SAVE
002:[TEXT:
F4:SAVE-ASFixed Text: ABCDE
003:[
F5:PROPERTIES
004:[
F6:TEST
005:[
From the File menu, press F5 (PROPERTIES).
The system will display the Pattern properties
screen.
Press PAGE DOWN until the Defaults Screen is
displayed.
PATTERN:
The first three parameters define the physical size of
the characters. See illustration.
SN
PARK
Height: [0.1250]in.
Width : [0.0830]in.
Pitch : [0.1250]in.
Spacing:[0.1875]in
DEFAULTS
]
]
]
]
]
INSTRUCT
Font : < 5x7
>
Print: DOT
CONT
Density: [100.00]
F1 ACCEPT
Height is the distance from the center of the mark at
the top of the character to the center of the mark at
the bottom.
Width is the distance from the center of the mark at
the left of the character to the center of the mark at
the right.
Pitch is the distance from the start of one character
to the start of the next character, including the space
between characters.
Press TAB to select the Height parameter.
Key Point…
You can manually enter width and pitch dimensions or have the system automatically calculate them based on
the character height.
Do one of the following:
•
Automatically Set Width & Pitch. Type the desired height dimension, then press ENTER. The system will
automatically calculate and apply the width and pitch dimensions based on the height.
•
Manually Set Width & Pitch. Type the desired height dimension, then press TAB. The system will leave the Width
and Pitch dimensions unchanged for you to define them manually.
or
2-122
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
Default Text Settings (continued)
Press TAB to select the Spacing parameter.
The Spacing parameter defines the vertical space
(line spacing) between the fields when printed.
Enter the desired line spacing.
PATTERN:
SN
PARK
Height: [0.1250]in.
Width : [0.0830]in.
Pitch : [0.1250]in.
Spacing:[0.1875]in
DEFAULTS
INSTRUCT
Font : < 5x7
>
Print: DOT
CONT
Density: [100.00]
F1 ACCEPT
Press TAB to select the Font parameter.
PATTERN:
The Font parameter defines the character set
that will be used to print the arc text string. It
determines the shape and appearance of the
characters. Refer to Font Selection for details.
SN
PARK
Height: [0.1250]in.
Width : [0.0830]in.
Pitch : [0.1250]in.
Spacing:[0.1875]in
Press ENTER until the desired font is displayed.
Press TAB to select the Print parameter.
Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key to select the
desired print mode, then press ENTER.
DEFAULTS
INSTRUCT
Font : < 5x7
>
Print: DOT
CONT
Density: [100.00]
F1 ACCEPT
PATTERN:
The Print parameter defines the mode that will
be used to print the text string. See illustration.
SN
PARK
Height: [0.1250]in.
Width : [0.0830]in.
Pitch : [0.1250]in.
Spacing:[0.1875]in
Dot marks the characters in a pattern of dots as
defined by the selected font set.
DEFAULTS
INSTRUCT
Font : < 5x7
>
Print: DOT
CONT
Density: [100.00]
F1 ACCEPT
Cont (continuous) allows you to specify the print density
to mark fully formed characters that produce an
engraved appearance.
Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key to select the desired
print mode, then press ENTER.
Press TAB to select the Density parameter.
The Density parameter is used with Continuous
print mode. It determines the pixel density (e.g.,
dots per inch) the system will use to form the
characters. The system uses either the specified
pixel density or the minimum "dots" required by
the selected font, whichever is greater.
PATTERN:
SN
PARK
Height: [0.1250]in.
Width : [0.0830]in.
Pitch : [0.1250]in.
Spacing:[0.1875]in
DEFAULTS
INSTRUCT
Font : < 5x7
>
Print: DOT
CONT
Density: [100.00]
F1 ACCEPT
Enter the desired pixel density.
Press F1 (ACCEPT) to save the default text parameter settings.
34700D.DOC
2-123
TMC470 Controller Operation
2.9.4 Default Pin Parameters
The system uses several parameters that synchronize the software with the physical configuration of the marker.
These parameter values are saved with the pattern so that specific settings will be applied to the software whenever
the pattern is opened. Changing these pattern-specific parameters will affect only the currently opened pattern. The
settings will not affect any other pattern stored in the controller.
Key Point…
Many of these parameters may be defined for use as system defaults. Refer to Marker Properties (Chapter 3).
The pattern-specific values stored with each pattern will override the system default settings defined for the marker.
Before you begin, open the pattern you wish to edit.
To configure the pattern Pin parameters:
From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen, press
F1 (FILE). The system will display the File menu.
From the File menu, press F5 (PROPERTIES).
The system will display the Pattern properties screen.
Press PAGE DOWN until the Pin Screen is displayed.
Verify the cursor is on the Pin parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
F2:NEW
F7:<PATTERN>
*001:[TEXT:
User Text:
F3:SAVE
002:[TEXT:
F4:SAVE-ASFixed Text: ABCDE
003:[
F5:PROPERTIES
004:[
F6:TEST
005:[
PATTERN:
The Pin Type parameter identifies the type of pin
installed in your marker.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN
–Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
F1:OPEN
Press ENTER to toggle through the available pins.
X/Y
Pin: <
25L>:3.5ms
Pressure: < 80>psi
Pin Return Rate:
<
The software will display only the pin types available
for your particular marking system. Interpretations for
the various pin selections are listed below.
25L
25LC
25LC-X
25L-X
25S
25SC
25CXL
25CXL-X
25XL
25XL-X
150SA *
150S **
PIN
Z
]
]
]
]
]
Theta
Stroke: [0.1250]in
Return: <20 >psi
>: 50%
F1 ACCEPT
25L Powdered Metal, Standard Cartridge
25L Carbide, Standard Cartridge
25L Carbide, Extended Cartridge
25L Powdered Metal, Extended Cartridge
25S Powdered Metal, Standard (Short) Cartridge
25S Carbide, Standard (Short) Cartridge
25XL Carbide, Standard Cartridge
25XL Carbide, Extended Cartridge
25XL Powdered Metal, Standard Cartridge
25XL Powdered Metal, Extended Cartridge
150SA Powdered Metal, Standard Cartridge
150S Powdered Metal, Standard Cartridge
** carbide tipped
** may be carbide tipped
PATTERN:
Press TAB to select the Stroke parameter.
The Stroke parameter defines the distance from the tip of
the retracted pin to the surface to be marked.
Enter the value (as close as possible) to the actual stroke
distance (within 10%).
2-124
34700D.DOC
PIN
X/Y
Pin: <
25L>:3.5ms
Pressure: < 80>psi
Pin Return Rate:
<
Z
Theta
Stroke: [0.1250]in
Return: <20 >psi
>: 50%
F1 ACCEPT
TMC470 Controller Operation
Default Pin Parameters (continued)
Press TAB to select the Pressure parameter.
PATTERN:
The Pressure parameter defines the drive air
pressure for your marking system.
Press ENTER to toggle through the available settings.
PIN
X/Y
Pin: <
25L>:3.5ms
Pressure: < 80>psi
Pin Return Rate:
<
Z
Theta
Stroke: [0.1250]in
Return: <20 >psi
>: 50%
F1 ACCEPT
Press TAB to select the Return parameter.
PATTERN:
The Return parameter defines the return air
pressure for your marking system.
Press ENTER to toggle through the available settings.
PIN
X/Y
Pin: <
25L>:3.5ms
Pressure: < 80>psi
Pin Return Rate:
<
Z
Theta
Stroke: [0.1250]in
Return: <20 >psi
>: 50%
F1 ACCEPT
Key Point…
Set the drive and return air pressures on the filter/regulator unit to match the parameter values you set for the
Pressure and Return parameters.
If the actual pressure cannot be set to the chosen parameter value, set the parameter value to the next lower
selection and print a sample. Then, change the parameter to the next higher selection and print another sample.
Examine both samples and use the parameter settings that produce the most satisfactory result.
Press TAB to select the Pin Return Rate parameter.
The Pin Return Rate allows you to specify the type
of recovery condition you expect to encounter so
the marking system software can automatically
compensate for it.
PATTERN:
PIN
X/Y
Pin: <
25L>:3.5ms
Pressure: < 80>psi
Pin Return Rate:
<
Press ENTER to increase the pin recovery time.
Press CTRL + ENTER to decrease the recovery time.
Z
Theta
Stroke: [0.1250]in
Return: <20 >psi
>: 50%
F1 ACCEPT
The pointer indicates the selected recovery rate
from 10% to 100%.
•
Select a lower pin recovery time for harder
marking surfaces (e.g., Rockwell 40C) or
for smaller pin cone angles (e.g., 30°).
•
Select a higher pin recovery for softer marking
surfaces (e.g., plastic) or for larger pin cone angles (e.g., 60°). .
Note: Higher recovery times will result in a longer print cycles.
Press F1 (ACCEPT) to save the default pin parameter settings.
34700D.DOC
2-125
TMC470 Controller Operation
2.9.5 Pattern Instructions
You may add special notes or informative instructions to your patterns that will be displayed in a pop-up window
automatically whenever the pattern is opened. This feature is especially useful for displaying comments about how the
pattern is to be used, noting the type of components it is designed to mark, or communicating special setup conditions
to the operator.
Before you begin, open the pattern you wish to edit.
To define instructions for the pattern:
From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen, press
F1 (FILE). The system will display the File menu.
From the File menu, press F5 (PROPERTIES).
The system will display the Pattern properties screen.
Press PAGE DOWN until the Instructions Screen is
displayed.
To add pattern instructions:
type the message you wish to display into the text box.
Note: You can force the system to display a second line
by adding \N to the instruction text.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
F1:OPEN
F2:NEW
F7:<PATTERN>
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
]
F3:SAVE
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
F4:SAVE-AS
003:[
]
F5:PROPERTIES
004:[
]
F6:TEST
005:[
]
PATTERN:
SN
PARK
DEFAULTS
Instructions: [
INSTRUCT
]
For example, if you enter the instruction text as:
This is a test! \N T esting 12345
The system will display the following instructions when
the Input command is processed:
F1 ACCEPT
This is a Test!
Testing 12345
To remove pattern instructions:
delete all characters from the text box, including spaces and carriage returns.
Note: If any non-printable characters (e.g., line breaks or carriage returns) remain in the text box, the system
will display a blank pop-up window when the pattern opens.
Press F1 (ACCEPT) to save the pattern instructions.
2-126
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
2.9.6 X/Y-axis Speed Parameters
The system software defines a range of acceptable speeds at which the system can mark to ensure precise character
formation. Within that range, you can adjust the speed of the marker in 10% increments. You may also adjust the
marker maximum speed. The maximum speed is the fastest rate (in steps per second) that the marker will use while
executing large moves. Large moves are those that typically require 200 or more steps.
These parameter values are saved with the pattern so that specific settings will be applied to the software whenever
the pattern is opened. Changing these pattern-specific parameters will affect only the currently opened pattern. The
settings will not affect any other pattern stored in the controller.
Key Point…
These speed parameters may be defined for use as system defaults. Refer to Marker Properties (Chapter 3).
The pattern-specific values stored with each pattern will override the system default settings defined for the marker.
Before you begin, open the pattern you wish to edit.
To configure the pattern X/Y-axis Speed parameters:
From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen, press
F1 (FILE). The system will display the File menu.
From the File menu, press F5 (PROPERTIES).
The system will display the Pattern properties screen.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN
–Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
F1:OPEN
F2:NEW
F7:<PATTERN>
*001:[TEXT:
User Text:
F3:SAVE
002:[TEXT:
F4:SAVE-ASFixed Text: ABCDE
003:[
F5:PROPERTIES
004:[
F6:TEST
005:[
Press PAGE DOWN until the X/Y Screen is displayed.
Verify the cursor is on the Speed Rate parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
PATTERN:
Press ENTER to increase the speed rate.
Press CTRL + ENTER to decrease the speed rate.
Speed Rate:
Max Speed Rate:
The pointer indicates the speed from 10% to 100%.
•
•
X/Y
Z
<
<
Theta
>: 80%
>:100%
Settle: <
>:00ms
Higher rates will result in faster marking times.
F1 ACCEPT
Slower rates will result in slower marking times, but
will improve the quality of the printed mark.
Press TAB to select the Max Speed Rate parameter.
The maximum speed is the fastest rate the marker
will use while executing large moves. Large moves
are those that typically require 200 or more steps.
This includes non-marking moves as when Preposition, Park, and Online commands are executed.
PIN
]
]
]
]
]
PATTERN:
PIN
Speed Rate:
Max Speed Rate:
X/Y
Z
<
<
Theta
>: 80%
>:100%
Settle: <
>:00ms
Press ENTER to increase the max speed rate.
Press CTRL + ENTER to decrease the max speed rate.
F1 ACCEPT
The pointer indicates the speed from 10% to 100%.
Press TAB to select the Settle parameter.
The Settle parameter defines the time delay (in
milliseconds) between the pin arrival at the mark
destination and the firing of the impact pin. Longer
settling times will affect print cycle times.
Press ENTER to increase the settling time.
Press CTRL + ENTER to decrease the settling time.
The pointer indicates the delay from 00ms to 25ms.
PATTERN:
PIN
Speed Rate:
Max Speed Rate:
X/Y
Z
<
<
Settle: <
Theta
>: 80%
>:100%
>:00ms
F1 ACCEPT
Press F1 (ACCEPT) to save the pattern X/Y-axis speed
settings.
34700D.DOC
2-127
TMC470 Controller Operation
2.9.7 Theta-axis Parameters
The system provides several parameters that control the speed and configuration of the Theta-axis.
•
•
•
The Part Diameter parameter defines the size (diameter) of the part being marked.
The Speed Rate parameter controls the rotational rate of the rotary drive fixture.
The Mounting Angle parameter defines the angular difference between the rotational axis and the X-axis.
These parameter values are saved with the pattern so that specific settings will be applied to the software whenever
the pattern is opened. Changing these pattern-specific parameters will affect only the currently opened pattern. The
settings will not affect any other pattern stored in the controller.
Key Point…
These speed parameters may be defined for use as system defaults. Refer to Theta-axis Properties (Chapter 3).
The pattern-specific values stored with each pattern will override the system default settings defined for the marker.
Before you begin, open the pattern you wish to edit.
From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen, press
F1 (FILE). The system will display the File menu.
From the File menu, press F5 (PROPERTIES).
The system will display the Pattern properties screen.
Press PAGE DOWN until the Theta Screen is displayed.
Perform the following, as applicable, to configure the part
diameter, speed, or mounting angle for the Theta-axis.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN
–Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
F1:OPEN
F2:NEW
F7:<PATTERN>
*001:[TEXT:
User Text:
F3:SAVE
002:[TEXT:
F4:SAVE-ASFixed Text: ABCDE
003:[
F5:PROPERTIES
004:[
F6:TEST
005:[
Theta-axis Part Diameter
To configure the part diameter for the pattern:
Press TAB to select the Part Diameter parameter.
This parameter defines the size (diameter) of the part
being marked. The system uses the part diameter to
determine the circumference of the part and to
calculate the amount of rotation to mark the pattern.
The part diameter is used with the Perpendicular and
Character Index marking modes. It is not used with
the Index marking mode.
PATTERN:
Mounting Angle:
Part Diameter:
Speed Rate: <
This setting will override the default setting defined for
the system. However, this setting will affect only the
currently opened pattern. The value you enter will be
used for all parts marked by this pattern.
In the Part Diameter box, enter the diameter of the part to be marked.
Note: If the part is inconsistent in diameter, use the
measurement nearest the area to be marked.
2-128
34700D.DOC
PIN
X/Y
Z
Theta
[ 0.00 ]°
[ 1.00 ]in
>:100%
F1 ACCEPT
]
]
]
]
]
TMC470 Controller Operation
Theta-axis Parameters (continued)
Theta-axis Speed
To configure the Theta-axis rotational speed for the pattern:
PATTERN:
Press TAB to select the Speed Rate parameter.
The Speed Rate setting controls the rotational rate of
the rotary drive fixture. This setting will override the
default setting defined for the system. However, this
setting will affect only the currently opened pattern.
PIN
Mounting Angle:
Part Diameter:
Speed Rate: <
X/Y
Z
Theta
[ 0.00 ]°
[ 1.00 ]in
>:100%
F1 ACCEPT
Press ENTER to increase the speed rate.
Press CTRL + ENTER to decrease the speed rate.
The pointer indicates the selected speed rate from
10% to 100%.
Theta-axis Mounting Angle
The physical installation of the rotary drive fixture determines its mounting angle. Typically, the fixture is mounted with
the rotational axis parallel to the marking window X-axis (0° mounting angle). Optionally, the fixture may be mounted
at a different angle to provide better positioning of the part within the window.
NOTICE
Do not perform this procedure if the mounting angle is parallel to the marking window X-axis.
Verify the cursor is on the Mounting Angle parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
The Mounting Angle parameter allows you to identify
the actual angle the rotary drive fixture is mounted
relative to the X-axis.
This setting will override the default setting defined for
the system. However, this setting will affect only the
currently opened pattern.
PATTERN:
PIN
Mounting Angle:
Part Diameter:
Speed Rate: <
X/Y
Z
Theta
[ 0.00 ]°
[ 1.00 ]in
>:100%
F1 ACCEPT
Measure the angular difference between the X-axis and the
rotational axis. See illustration.
Note: If you are unable to accurately measure the angle,
refer to the exercise in Chapter 3 (see Theta-axis
Properties) to interactively jog the marker and
calculate the mounting angle.
Enter the value (in degrees) in the Mounting Angle text box.
Press F1 (ACCEPT) to save the Theta-axis settings.
34700D.DOC
2-129
TMC470 Controller Operation
2.9.8 Z-axis Speed Parameters
The Z-axis Speed parameter controls the travel rate up and down the vertical axis. This parameter is saved with the
pattern so that specific settings will be applied to the software whenever the pattern is opened. Changing this patternspecific parameter will affect only the currently opened pattern. The setting will not affect any other pattern stored in
the controller.
Key Point…
This speed parameter may be defined for use as system the default. Refer to Z-axis Properties (Chapter 3).
The pattern-specific value stored with each pattern will override the default setting defined for the system.
Before you begin, open the pattern you wish to edit.
To configure the pattern Z-axis Speed parameters:
From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen, press
F1 (FILE). The system will display the File menu.
From the File menu, press F5 (PROPERTIES).
The system will display the Pattern properties screen.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN
–Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
F1:OPEN
F2:NEW
F7:<PATTERN>
*001:[TEXT:
User Text:
F3:SAVE
002:[TEXT:
F4:SAVE-ASFixed Text: ABCDE
003:[
F5:PROPERTIES
004:[
F6:TEST
005:[
Press PAGE DOWN until the Z Screen is displayed.
The Z-axis Speed Rate controls the rate of travel along
the vertical axis, typically along the Z-axis tool post.
The pointer indicates the selected speed rate from
10% to 100%.
Press ENTER to increase the Z-axis speed rate.
Press CTRL + ENTER to decrease the Z-axis speed rate.
PATTERN:
Speed Rate:
PIN
<
X/Y
Z
Theta
>:100%
F1 ACCEPT
Press F1 (ACCEPT) to save the pattern Z-axis speed setting.
2-130
34700D.DOC
]
]
]
]
]
TMC470 Controller Operation
2.10 REMOTE PATTERN SELECTION
The Remote Pattern Selection feature allows the system to monitor up to seven dedicated input signals transmitted from a
remote, customer-supplied I/O device. These signals (SEL_6 through SEL_0) are received at the TMC470 I/O Port. The
ON/OFF combinations of the seven input signals generate binary codes ranging from 0000000 (0) through 1111111 (127).
2.10.1 Reserved Pattern Names
Each code corresponds to specific reserved pattern name. As the input signals are received, the system interprets their
codes, then loads the pattern with reserved pattern name associated with that code. All patterns to be opened via
Remote Pattern Selection must be stored in the controller and must use the specific pattern names listed below.
Note that if all seven input signals are OFF, the resulting code is 0000000. This effectively disables the Remote Pattern
Selection feature so the pattern may be loaded manually by the operator.
2.10.2 Parameter Configuration
The SEL_6 input signal may be configured either to remotely place the marker online (default setting) or to remotely select
patterns stored in the controller. Refer to Startup Properties (Chapter 3). Pattern names shaded in gray (below) may be
remotely selected only if the SEL_6 input is configured for pattern selection. If configured to place the marker online, the
SEL_6 signal state will be ignored for remote pattern selection. This will reduce the number of patterns available for remote
selection from 127 to 63. See chart below.
Reserved Pattern Names for Remote Pattern Selection
Signal State
Sel_ (n)
6543210
Reserved
Pattern
Name
Signal State
Sel_ (n)
6543210
Reserved
Pattern
Name
Signal State
Sel_ (n)
6543210
Reserved
Pattern
Name
Signal State
Sel_ (n)
6543210
Reserved
Pattern
Name
0000000
(disabled)
0I00000
PAT032
I000000
PAT064
II00000
PAT096
000000I
PAT001
0I0000I
PAT033
I00000I
PAT065
II0000I
PAT097
00000I0
PAT002
0I000I0
PAT034
I0000I0
PAT066
II000I0
PAT098
00000II
PAT003
0I000II
PAT035
I0000II
PAT067
II000II
PAT099
0000I00
PAT004
0I00I00
PAT036
I000I00
PAT068
II00I00
PAT100
0000I0I
PAT005
0I00I0I
PAT037
I000I0I
PAT069
II00I0I
PAT101
0000II0
PAT006
0I00II0
PAT038
I000II0
PAT070
II00II0
PAT102
0000III
PAT007
0I00III
PAT039
I000III
PAT071
II00III
PAT103
000I000
PAT008
0I0I000
PAT040
I00I000
PAT072
II0I000
PAT104
000I00I
PAT009
0I0I00I
PAT041
I00I00I
PAT073
II0I00I
PAT105
000I0I0
PAT010
0I0I0I0
PAT042
I00I0I0
PAT074
II0I0I0
PAT106
000I0II
PAT011
0I0I0II
PAT043
I00I0II
PAT075
II0I0II
PAT107
000II00
PAT012
0I0II00
PAT044
I00II00
PAT076
II0II00
PAT108
000II0I
PAT013
0I0II0I
PAT045
I00II0I
PAT077
II0II0I
PAT109
000III0
PAT014
0I0III0
PAT046
I00III0
PAT078
II0III0
PAT110
000IIII
PAT015
0I0IIII
PAT047
I00IIII
PAT079
II0IIII
PAT111
00I0000
PAT016
0II0000
PAT048
I0I0000
PAT080
III0000
PAT112
00I000I
PAT017
0II000I
PAT049
I0I000I
PAT081
III000I
PAT113
00I00I0
PAT018
0II00I0
PAT050
I0I00I0
PAT082
III00I0
PAT114
00I00II
PAT019
0II00II
PAT051
I0I00II
PAT083
III00II
PAT115
00I0I00
PAT020
0II0I00
PAT052
I0I0I00
PAT084
III0I00
PAT116
00I0I0I
PAT021
0II0I0I
PAT053
I0I0I0I
PAT085
III0I0I
PAT117
00I0II0
PAT022
0II0II0
PAT054
I0I0II0
PAT086
III0II0
PAT118
00I0III
PAT023
0II0III
PAT055
I0I0III
PAT087
III0III
PAT119
00II000
PAT024
0III000
PAT056
I0II000
PAT088
IIII000
PAT120
00II00I
PAT025
0III00I
PAT057
I0II00I
PAT089
IIII00I
PAT121
00II0I0
PAT026
0III0I0
PAT058
I0II0I0
PAT090
IIII0I0
PAT122
00II0II
PAT027
0III0II
PAT059
I0II0II
PAT091
IIII0II
PAT123
00III00
PAT028
0IIII00
PAT060
I0III00
PAT092
IIIII00
PAT124
00III0I
PAT029
0IIII0I
PAT061
I0III0I
PAT093
IIIII0I
PAT125
00IIII0
PAT030
0IIIII0
PAT062
I0IIII0
PAT094
IIIIII0
PAT126
00IIIII
PAT031
0IIIIII
PAT063
I0IIIII
PAT095
IIIIIII
PAT127
34700D.DOC
2-131
TMC470 Controller Operation
2.11 MANAGE THE CONTROLLER LIBRARY
The Manager Screen displays the library of pattern files, block files, and custom (user) files stored in the controller.
From the Manager Screen, you can check available controller memory, display the time/date stamp of each file, display
the size of each file, and delete files from the controller.
NOTICE
The system must be placed in Supervisor mode to access the Manager Screen.
2.11.1 View Library Files
Place the system in Supervisor mode.
Refer to Access System Parameters (Chapter 3) for details.
From the Supervisor Main Screen, press F5 (SETUP).
The system will display the Setup menu.
From the Setup menu, press F5 (MANAGEMENT).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
F1:LEVEL
F6:<SUPERVISOR>
F2:QUERY TEXT
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
]
F3:DESIGN
F7:<UNITS>
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
F4:PROPERTIES
F8:<MARKER>
003:[
]
F5:MANAGEMENT
004:[
]
005:[
]
The system will display the Manager Screen.
Press F7 to select the type of file you wish to view:
<PATTERNS>, <PARAMS> (parameters),
<USER FONTS>, or <BLOCKS>.
The screen lists all files of the selected type stored in
the controller with a date and time stamp showing
when each file was last saved.
The top line shows the total number of files stored, the
current page number, and the total number of pages
for that file type.
If more one page exists, press PAGE DOWN and
PAGE UP to scroll through the list of files.
To view the file sizes, press F8 (SIZE).
This screen displays the actual size of the each
stored file (e.g., 248 bytes).
F1-[SAMPLE_01
]:02/24/08;03:41:54
F2-[SAMPLE_02
]:02/24/08;05:07:58
F3-[SAMPLE_03
]:02/24/08;03:45:14
F4-[SAMPLE_04
]:02/24/08;03:46:00
F5-[SAMPLE_05
]:02/24/08;03:46:24
F6 CLEAN F7 <PATTERNS>
F8 SIZE
MANAGER(1581056) Total:007 Page:01 of 02
Depending on the allocated file size, the system can
store up to 200 patterns files (at 8Kb each) and 12
block files (at 64Kb each). Refer to Startup Options:
Allocating File Size (Chapter 3) for details.
To re-display the date and time stamps, press F8 (DATE).
Press ESC to return to the Supervisor Main Screen.
2-132
MANAGER(1581056) Total:007 Page:01 of 02
34700D.DOC
F1-[SAMPLE_01
]:
F2-[SAMPLE_02
]:
F3-[SAMPLE_03
]:
F4-[SAMPLE_04
]:
F5-[SAMPLE_05
]:
F6 CLEAN F7 <PATTERNS>
248
256
312
282
324
F8 DATE
TMC470 Controller Operation
NOTICE
The system must be placed in Supervisor mode to access the Manager Screen.
2.11.2 Delete Library Files
Place the system in Supervisor mode.
Refer to Access System Parameters (Chapter 3) for details.
From the Supervisor Main Screen, press F5 (SETUP).
The system will display the Setup menu.
From the Setup menu, press F5 (MANAGEMENT).
The system will display the Manager Screen.
To delete a single file:
•
Press F7 to select the type of file you wish to delete:
<PATTERNS>, <USER FONTS>, or <BLOCKS>.
Note: If you wish to delete <PARAMS> parameter
files, please refer to Reset System Parameters
(Chapter 3) for important details.
•
Press PAGE DOWN or PAGE UP to locate the file name.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
F1:LEVEL
F6:<SUPERVISOR>
F2:QUERY TEXT
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
]
F7:<UNITS>
F3:DESIGN
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
F4:PROPERTIES
F8:<MARKER>
003:[
]
F5:MANAGEMENT
004:[
]
005:[
]
MANAGER(1581056) Total:007 Page:01 of 02
F1-[SAMPLE_01
]:02/24/08;03:41:54
F2-[SAMPLE_02
]:02/24/08;05:07:58
F3-[SAMPLE_03
]:02/24/08;03:45:14
F4-[SAMPLE_04
]:02/24/08;03:46:00
F5-[SAMPLE_05
]:02/24/08;03:46:24
F6 CLEAN F7 <PATTERNS>
F8 SIZE
MANAGER(1581056) Total:007 Page:01 of 02
•
When the file is displayed, note the key (F1 through F5)
listed beside the file name.
•
Press the appropriate key to delete the file.
(For example, press F1 to delete the file SAMPLE_01.)
F1-[SAMPLE_01
]:02/24/08;03:41:54
F2-[SAMPLE_02
]:02/24/08;05:07:58
F3-[SAMPLE_03
]:02/24/08;03:45:14
F4-[SAMPLE_04
]:02/24/08;03:46:00
F5-[SAMPLE_05
]:02/24/08;03:46:24
F6 CLEAN F7 <PATTERNS>
F8 SIZE
MANAGER(1581056) Total:007 Page:01 of 02
•
•
The system will prompt you to confirm your command.
Press F1 to delete the file
The selected file will be deleted from the controller.
or
Press F2 to cancel.
F1-[SAMPLE_01
]:02/24/08;03:41:54
Delete selected
Pattern?
F2-[SAMPLE_02
]:02/24/08;05:07:58
F3-[SAMPLE_03 F1-Yes
]:02/24/08;03:45:14
F2-No
F4-[SAMPLE_04
]:02/24/08;03:46:00
F5-[SAMPLE_05
]:02/24/08;03:46:24
F6 CLEAN F7 <PATTERNS>
F8 SIZE
Press ESC to return to the Supervisor Main Screen.
34700D.DOC
2-133
TMC470 Controller Operation
To delete ALL files of a selected file type:
•
Press F7 to select the type of files you wish to delete:
<PATTERNS>, <USER FONTS>, or <BLOCKS>.
Note: If you wish to delete <PARAMS> parameter
files, please refer to Reset System Parameters
(Chapter 3) for important details.
MANAGER(1581056) Total:007 Page:01 of 02
F1-[SAMPLE_01
]:02/24/08;03:41:54
F2-[SAMPLE_02
]:02/24/08;05:07:58
F3-[SAMPLE_03
]:02/24/08;03:45:14
F4-[SAMPLE_04
]:02/24/08;03:46:00
F5-[SAMPLE_05
]:02/24/08;03:46:24
F6 CLEAN F7 <PATTERNS>
F8 SIZE
MANAGER(1581056) Total:007 Page:01 of 02
•
F1-[SAMPLE_01
]:02/24/08;03:41:54
F2-[SAMPLE_02
]:02/24/08;05:07:58
F3-[SAMPLE_03
]:02/24/08;03:45:14
F4-[SAMPLE_04
]:02/24/08;03:46:00
F5-[SAMPLE_05
]:02/24/08;03:46:24
F6 CLEAN F7 <PATTERNS>
F8 SIZE
Press F6 (CLEAN).
MANAGER(1581056) Total:007 Page:01 of 02
•
•
The system will prompt you to confirm your command.
Press F1 to delete ALL files of the selected file type.
All selected files will be deleted from the controller.
or
Press F2 to cancel.
Press ESC to return to the Supervisor Main Screen.
2-134
34700D.DOC
F1-[SAMPLE_01
]:02/24/08;03:41:54
Delete all patterns
from memory?
F2-[SAMPLE_02
]:02/24/08;05:07:58
F3-[SAMPLE_03 F1-Yes
]:02/24/08;03:45:14
F2-No
F4-[SAMPLE_04
]:02/24/08;03:46:00
F5-[SAMPLE_05
]:02/24/08;03:46:24
F6 CLEAN F7 <PATTERNS>
F8 SIZE
TMC470 Controller Operation
Chapter 3
System Configuration & Management
Parameters and options that control the system configuration are universally applied during system operation. Unlike
some parameters that are stored with the pattern definition and apply only to a particular pattern, the system
parameters apply to all patterns and to all marker operations. This section provides instructions for configuring the
following system-level parameters and options.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Accessing system parameters
Defining system passwords
Setting marker parameters
Defining query text
Defining date codes
Defining shift codes
Defining Omni serial numbers
Downloading Merlin system parameters
Setting startup parameters
Setting host communications
Setting serial communications
Setting Ethernet communications
Setting the clock and calendar
Setting units of measure
Enabling the marking pin
Configuring the optional Z-axis
Configuring the optional Theta-axis
Backing up/Restoring patterns, fonts, & parameters
Resetting system parameters
Performing system tests
Configuring remote pattern selection
3.1 ACCESS SYSTEM PARAMETERS
Most system parameters require Supervisor-mode access, although some can be configured from Designer-mode.
Where Designer-mode access is sufficient, it will be clearly marked in the following procedures.
To place the system in Supervisor mode:
From the Operator (or Designer) Main Screen, press
F5 (SETUP).
The system will display the Setup menu.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER –Offline– Pattern:UNTITLED
:000
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
Press F6 to toggle the LEVEL selection to SUPERVISOR.
Press F1 (LEVEL).
]
]
]
]
]
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER –Offline– FPattern:UNTITLED
:000
1:LEVEL
F6:<SUPERVISOR>
The system will display the Password prompt.
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
34700D.DOC
F2:QUERY TEXT
]
]
]
]
]
3-1
TMC470 Controller Operation
Access System Parameters (continued)
Type the password into the Enter Password box. If a
password has not been defined, leave the box empty
(blank).
Note: A password may be defined to restrict
access to Supervisor-level features. See
System Passwords for details.
Press F1 (ACCEPT).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER –Offline– Pattern:UNTITLED
:000
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
Enter Password [
F1 ACCEPT
]
F2 CANCEL
]
]
]
]
]
The system will return to the Main Screen.
The system displays SUPV to indicate it is in
Supervisor mode. Although the Main Screen looks
the same as Operator or Designer Mode, the dropdown menus now provide many more options and
privileges.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:UNTITLED
:000
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
]
]
]
]
]
3.2 SYSTEM PASSWORDS
The Password feature allows you to define (or change) the access password for the Designer and Supervisor modes.
This feature provides a measure of security for commands and options that should not be accessed by Operator-level
personnel. Without the proper password, access to the Designer Main Screen and/or the Supervisor Main Screen and
their subsequent features will be denied.
From the Supervisor Main Screen, press F5 (SETUP).
The system will display the Setup Menu.
Press F8 to toggle the PROPERTIES selection to
PASSWORD.
Press F4 (PROPERTIES) to access the Password
Screen.
Define the Supervisor-Level Password:
3-2
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
F1:LEVEL
F6:<SUPERVISOR>
F2:QUERY TEXT
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
]
F3:DESIGN
F7:<UNITS>
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
F4:PROPERTIES
F8:<PASSWORD>
003:[
]
F5:MANAGEMENT
004:[
]
005:[
]
•
Verify the cursor is in the Supervisor-Level text box.
If not, press TAB to select it.
•
Type the Supervisor password in the text box.
Note: The password is not case-sensitive.
•
Set the Designer-Level password (below)
or
Press F1 (SAVE) to store the Supervisor password
and exit the Editor Screen.
------------ PASSWORD EDITOR -----------Supervisor-Level:
[
]
Designer-Level:
[
]
Define the Designer-Level Password:
•
Press TAB to move the cursor to the Designer-Level
text box.
•
Type the Designer password in the text box.
Note: The password is not case-sensitive.
•
Press F1 (SAVE) to store the Designer password and exit the Editor Screen.
Reset Password Defaults:
•
If you wish to remove both passwords, press F2 (DEFAULTS).
The system set both passwords to a null string (no password).
•
Press F1 (SAVE) to store the default settings and exit the Editor Screen.
34700D.DOC
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
TMC470 Controller Operation
3.3 MARKER PROPERTIES
The marker parameters allow you to set the software to match the physical configuration of the marking head.
Additionally, the marker parameters provide some control options for printing and marker movement. These
parameters settings will be used as the system defaults whenever a new pattern is created.
Key Point…
Many of these parameters may be re-defined by the Designer and saved with the pattern. Refer to Default Pin
Parameters (Chapter 2). Any pattern-specific values stored with a pattern will override the system default settings
defined for the marker.
From the Supervisor Main Screen, press F5 (SETUP).
The system will display the Setup Menu.
Press F8 to toggle the PROPERTIES selection to
MARKER.
Press F4 (PROPERTIES) to access the Marker Screen.
The Marker parameters are displayed on two
separate pages (General and Pin).
(TMP1700/TMP1710 only)
Press TAB to select the Selection parameter.
Press ENTER to toggle the selection to identify the
model of marking head connected to the controller.
Choose 1700 or 1710, as applicable.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
F1:LEVEL
F6:<SUPERVISOR>
F2:QUERY TEXT
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
]
F7:<UNITS>
F3:DESIGN
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
F4:PROPERTIES
F8:<MARKER >
003:[
]
F5:MANAGEMENT
004:[
]
005:[
]
MARKER:
Selection:<1700>
Speed Rate:
Max Speed Rate:
Settle: <
F1 SAVE
GENERAL
PIN
Homing Option: <None >
<
>: 80%
<
>:100%
>:00ms
F2 DEFAULTS
Press TAB to select the Homing Option parameter.
The Homing Option parameter defines when,
during the print cycle, the marker will move to the
Home position. If there is a chance the pin
cartridge can be jarred, the Home Print feature
allows you to reset the marker as part of the print
cycle so it may re-establish its correct position.
MARKER:
Before moves the marker from the Park position
to the Home position, then prints.
F1 SAVE
GENERAL
Selection:<1700>
Speed Rate:
Max Speed Rate:
Settle: <
PIN
Homing Option: <None >
<
>: 80%
<
>:100%
>:00ms
F2 DEFAULTS
After moves the marker to Home after printing
and before returning to the Park position.
None prevents the marker from seeking Home as
part of the print cycle.
Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key to select the
desired homing option, then press ENTER.
Press TAB to select the Speed Rate parameter.
Press ENTER to increase the speed rate.
Press CTRL + ENTER to decrease the speed rate.
MARKER:
The pointer indicates the speed from 10% to 100%.
•
•
Higher rates will result in faster marking times.
Slower rates will result in slower marking times,
but will improve the quality of the printed mark.
34700D.DOC
GENERAL
Selection:<1700>
Speed Rate:
Max Speed Rate:
Settle: <
F1 SAVE
PIN
Homing Option: <None >
<
>: 80%
<
>:100%
>:00ms
F2 DEFAULTS
3-3
TMC470 Controller Operation
Marker Properties (continued)
Press TAB to select the Max Speed Rate parameter.
The maximum speed is the fastest rate the marker
will use while executing large moves. Large moves
are those that typically require 200 or more steps.
This includes non-marking moves as when Preposition, Park, and Online commands are executed.
Press ENTER to increase the max speed rate.
Press CTRL + ENTER to decrease the max speed rate.
MARKER:
GENERAL
Selection:<1700>
Speed Rate:
Max Speed Rate:
Settle: <
F1 SAVE
PIN
Homing Option: <None >
<
>: 80%
<
>:100%
>:00ms
F2 DEFAULTS
The pointer indicates the speed from 10% to 100%.
Press TAB to select the Settle parameter.
The Settle parameter defines the time delay (in
milliseconds) between the pin arrival at the mark
destination and the firing of the impact pin. Longer
settling times will affect print cycle times.
Press ENTER to increase the settling time.
Press CTRL + ENTER to decrease the settling time.
The pointer indicates the delay from 00ms to 25ms.
GENERAL
Selection:<1700>
Speed Rate:
Max Speed Rate:
Settle: <
F1 SAVE
PIN
Homing Option: <None >
<
>: 80%
<
>:100%
>:00ms
F2 DEFAULTS
Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
Verify the cursor is on the Pin parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
The Pin Type parameter identifies the type of pin
installed in your marker.
MARKER:
Press ENTER to toggle through the available pins.
The software will display only the pin types
available for your particular marking system.
Interpretations for the various pin selections are
listed below.
25L
25L Powdered Metal, Standard Cartridge
25LC
25L Carbide, Standard Cartridge
25LC-X
25L Carbide, Extended Cartridge
25L-X
25L Powdered Metal, Extended Cartridge
25S
25S Powdered Metal, Standard (Short) Cartridge
25SC
25S Carbide, Standard (Short) Cartridge
25CXL
25XL Carbide, Standard Cartridge
25CXL-X
25XL Carbide, Extended Cartridge
25XL
25XL Powdered Metal, Standard Cartridge
25XL-X
25XL Powdered Metal, Extended Cartridge
150SA *
150SA Powdered Metal, Standard Cartridge
150S **
150S Powdered Metal, Standard Cartridge
MICRO
10MP MicroPin™, Carbide, Standard Cartridge
MARKER:
GENERAL
PIN
Pin: <
25L>:3.5ms Stroke: [0.1250]in
Pressure: < 80>psi
Return: <20 >psi
Pin Return Rate:
<
>: 50%
Pulse Delay: [50 ]ms
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
** carbide tipped
** may be carbide tipped
MARKER:
Press TAB to select the Stroke parameter.
The Stroke parameter defines the distance from
the tip of the retracted pin to the surface to be
marked.
3-4
Enter the value (as close as possible) to the actual
stroke distance (within 10%).
34700D.DOC
GENERAL
PIN
Pin: <
25L>:3.5ms Stroke: [0.1250]in
Pressure: < 80>psi
Return: <20 >psi
Pin Return Rate:
<
>: 50%
Pulse Delay: [50 ]ms
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
TMC470 Controller Operation
Marker Properties (continued)
MARKER:
Press TAB to select the Pressure parameter.
The Pressure parameter defines the drive air pressure
for your marking system.
Press ENTER to toggle through the available settings.
Press TAB to select the Return parameter.
The Return parameter defines the return air pressure
for your marking system.
Press ENTER to toggle through the available settings.
Key Point…
Set the drive and return air pressures on the
filter/regulator unit to match the parameter values
you set for the Pressure and Return parameters.
PIN
Pin: <
25L>:3.5ms Stroke: [0.1250]in
Pressure: < 80>psi
Return: <20 >psi
Pin Return Rate:
<
>: 50%
Pulse Delay: [50 ]ms
F1 SAVE
GENERAL
MARKER:
F2 DEFAULTS
GENERAL
PIN
Pin: <
25L>:3.5ms Stroke: [0.1250]in
Pressure: < 80>psi
Return: <20 >psi
Pin Return Rate:
<
>: 50%
Pulse Delay: [50 ]ms
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
If the actual pressure cannot be set to the chosen
parameter value, set the parameter value to the
next lower selection and print a sample. Then,
change the parameter to the next higher selection
and print another sample. Examine both samples
and use the parameter settings that produce the
most satisfactory result.
Press TAB to select the Pin Return Rate parameter.
The Pin Return Rate allows you to specify the type of
recovery condition you expect to encounter so the
marking system software can automatically
compensate for it.
Press ENTER to increase the pin recovery time.
Press CTRL + ENTER to decrease the recovery time.
MARKER:
GENERAL
PIN
Pin: <
25L>:3.5ms Stroke: [0.1250]in
Pressure: < 80>psi
Return: <20 >psi
Pin Return Rate:
<
>: 50%
Pulse Delay: [50 ]ms
F1 SAVE
The pointer indicates the selected recovery rate from
10% to 100%.
• Select a lower pin recovery time for harder marking
surfaces (e.g., Rockwell 40C) or
for smaller pin cone angles (e.g., 30°).
• Select a higher pin recovery for softer marking
surfaces (e.g., plastic) or for larger pin cone angles (e.g., 60°).
F2 DEFAULTS
Note: Higher recovery times will result in a longer print cycles.
Press TAB to select the Pulse Delay parameter.
This parameters defines the delay (in milliseconds)
between pin firings when you pulse the marking pin
during maintenance tests. Normally, the pulse delay
is set at 50 ms. However, it may be set from 1 ms to
2000 ms (2 seconds).
Type the pulse delay into the text box.
Press F1 (SAVE) to store the marker parameter settings.
To reset all marker parameters to their default settings:
•
•
MARKER:
GENERAL
PIN
Pin: <
25L>:3.5ms Stroke: [0.1250]in
Pressure: < 80>psi
Return: <20 >psi
Pin Return Rate:
<
>: 50%
Pulse Delay: [50 ]ms
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
Press F2 (DEFAULTS)
Press F1 (SAVE)
34700D.DOC
3-5
TMC470 Controller Operation
3.4 QUERY TEXT PROPERTIES
Key Point…
The buffer text and the buffer titles may be edited by Designer-level and Supervisor-level personnel.
Operator-level personnel are permitted to edit only the buffer text.
The Query Text feature provides a way for operators to edit several text strings in a pattern at the same time. This
feature requires the %#Q message flag or %#q message flag to be included in one or more of your text strings.
The flags represent the text and titles of individual buffers you define in the Query Text lookup table. The system will
use the lookup table to insert the appropriate buffer title and buffer text into your pattern wherever the flags are used.
Up to twenty (20) buffers may be defined.
•
•
Lowercase flags %1q, %2q,… %20q will be replaced with the titles of buffers 1, 2,… 20 respectively.
Uppercase flags %1Q, %2Q,… %20Q will be replaced with the text of buffers 1, 2,… 20 respectively.
From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen, press
F5 (SETUP).
The system will display the Setup Menu.
From the Setup Menu, press F2 (QUERY TEXT)
The system will display the Query Text lookup table.
The Query Text lookup table has 20 buffers with
five buffers listed on each page.
Buffer titles (e.g., 1,2,3,4,5 on the left side) can
be edited only by Designer- or Supervisor-level
users. Titles help identify what type of data the
operator is to enter into each buffer.
Buffer text (on the right side) is where Operatorlevel users may enter data into the text buffers.
Designer- and Supervisor-level users may also
enter data into the buffers for use as initial values.
Verify the cursor is in the first buffer Title box
(e.g., 1). If not, press TAB to select it.
Type the title of the first buffer into the Title box
(e.g., “Your Title”).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
F1:LEVEL
F6:<SUPERVISOR>
F2:QUERY TEXT
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
]
F3:DESIGN
F7:<UNITS>
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
F4:PROPERTIES
F8:<MARKER >
003:[
]
F5:MANAGEMENT
004:[
]
005:[
]
QUERY TEXT:
1
2
3
4
5
F1 SAVE
F2
1-5
6-10
11-15
16-20
:[
:[
:[
:[
:[
DEFAULTS
]
]
]
]
]
Note: Pressing ESC while editing the Query Text
lookup table will abandon any changes
you’ve made and return to the Main Screen.
Press TAB to move to the first buffer Text box.
Type data into the buffer Text box
(e.g., “Your first buffer data”).
Press TAB to move to the next buffer and edit the
Title and Text boxes as applicable.
Press PAGE DOWN to display additional buffers.
Press F1 (SAVE) to store the Query Text buffer settings.
To reset the Query Text buffer settings to their default settings:
•
•
3-6
QUERY TEXT:
1-5
6-10
11-15
Your Title:[Your first buffer data
2
:[
3
:[
4
:[
5
:[
F1 SAVE F2 DEFAULTS
Press F2 (DEFAULTS)
Press F1 (SAVE)
34700D.DOC
16-20
]
]
]
]
]
TMC470 Controller Operation
3.5 DATE CODE PROPERTIES
Key Point…
The Date Code properties used by the system may be edited by Designer-level and Supervisor-level personnel.
The Date Code features allow you to encode the current time/date information within the printed text.
This feature requires these special message flags to be included in one or more of the pattern text strings:
• Encoded Hour Flag: %h (lowercase)
• Encoded Day Flag: %d (lowercase)
• Encoded Month Flag: %U (uppercase)
• Encoded Year Flag: %E (uppercase)
When the system encounters one of these flags, it uses the controller clock/calendar and the Date Code lookup tables
to extract the appropriate code character for each flag. It then inserts the character(s) into the pattern for printing.
The Date Code feature provides four lookup tables – one each for encoding the hour, day, month and year.
• The Hour of Day Table contains 24 entries, one for each hour of the day.
• The Month Day Table contains 31 entries, one for each possible day of the month.
• The Month Table contains 12 entries, one for each month of the year.
• The Year Table contains 10 entries, one for each year of the decade.
For example:
Suppose the Year Table is defined as follows:
A B C D E F G H I J
The system uses the lookup table to substitute the year code for the current year as follows:
Table Position
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
6th
7th
8th
9th
Year Code
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
2000
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
Current Year
10th
When an Encoded Year Flag (%E) is encountered in a pattern, the system insert “I” since the current year is 2008.
Key Point…
The first position in the Year Table corresponds to the first year of the decade (e.g., 2000).
The last position in the Year Table corresponds to the last year of the decade (e.g., 2009).
The same table-position/date-unit relationship applies to the hour, day, and month tables.
To configure the Date Code lookup tables:
From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen, press
F5 (SETUP).
The system will display the Setup Menu.
Press F7 to toggle the DESIGN selection to USER.
Press F3 (DESIGN) to access the User Screen.
The User Screen provides parameters on three
separate pages (General, Shifts, and Omni SN).
The Date Code lookup tables are on the first page.
Verify the cursor is on the Month lookup table.
If not, press TAB to select it.
USER:
This table allows you to assign a separate, single
character to represent each month of the year.
Note: The first entry represents January;
the last entry represents December.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
F1:LEVEL
F6:<SUPERVISOR>
F2:QUERY TEXT
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
]
F3:DESIGN
F7:<USER >
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
F8:<STARTUP >
F4:PROPERTIES
003:[
]
F5:MANAGEMENT
004:[
]
005:[
]
Type the 12 code characters into the table.
GENERAL
Month:
Year:
Month Day:
Hour of Day:
SHIFTS
[123456789OND]
[0123456789]
[123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO]
[0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMN]
F1 SAVE
34700D.DOC
OMNI SN
F2 DEFAULTS
3-7
TMC470 Controller Operation
Date Code Properties (continued)
Press TAB to select the Year lookup table.
This table allows you to assign a separate, single
character to represent each year of the decade.
Note: The first entry represents the first year of
the decade (e.g., 2000);
the last entry represents the last year of
the decade (e.g., 2009).
USER:
GENERAL
Month:
Year:
Month Day:
Hour of Day:
SHIFTS
[123456789OND]
[0123456789]
[123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO]
[0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMN]
F1 SAVE
Type the 10 code characters into the table.
Press TAB to select the Month Day lookup table.
This table allows you to assign a separate, single
character to represent each day of the month.
Note: The first entry represents day 1;
the last entry represents day 31.
Type the 31 code characters into the table.
Press TAB to select the Hour of Day lookup table.
USER:
GENERAL
Month:
Year:
Month Day:
Hour of Day:
Note: The first entry represents midnight;
the last entry represents 11:00 p.m.
Type the 24 code characters into the table.
Press F1 (SAVE) to store the Date Code lookup table settings.
USER:
OMNI SN
[123456789OND]
[0123456789]
[123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO]
[0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMN]
GENERAL
Month:
Year:
Month Day:
Hour of Day:
F2 DEFAULTS
SHIFTS
F1 SAVE
This table allows you to assign a separate, single
character to represent each hour of the day.
OMNI SN
F2 DEFAULTS
SHIFTS
OMNI SN
[123456789OND]
[0123456789]
[123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO]
[0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMN]
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
CAUTION
Resetting the Date Code lookup table settings will also reset the Shift Code
lookup table and the Omni SN parameters to their factory default settings.
All parameters that have been specifically configured for your system will
be overwritten with the default values.
To reset all User Properties settings (Date Codes, Shift Codes, Omni SN) to their default settings:
•
•
3-8
Press F2 (DEFAULTS)
Press F1 (SAVE)
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
3.6 SHIFT CODE PROPERTIES
Key Point…
The Shift Code lookup table used by the system may be edited by Designer-level and Supervisor-level personnel.
The Shift Code features allow you to encode the current work shift within the printed text. This feature requires the
Encoded Shift Flag (%Z) to be included in one or more of the pattern text strings.
When the system encounters this flag, it uses the controller clock/calendar and the Shift Code lookup tables to extract
the appropriate code character for the current shift. It then inserts the character into the pattern for printing.
For example:
Suppose the Shift Table is defined as follows:
Table Position
Shift Code
Shift (Start) Time
1st
2nd
3rd
F
S
T
08:00
16:00
00:00
When an Encoded Shift flag (%Z) is encountered in a pattern, the system will insert the appropriate shift code
based on the time of day the pattern is printed.
•
•
•
The first code character (F) will be inserted when the pattern prints between 8:00 a.m. and 3:59:59 p.m.
The second code character (S) will be inserted when the pattern prints between 4:00 p.m. and 11:59:59 p.m.
The third code character (T) will be inserted when the pattern prints between midnight and 7:59:59 a.m.
Key Point…
The first position in the Shift Table corresponds to the first shift (Shift 1) start time (e.g., 08:00).
The second position in the Shift Table corresponds to the second shift (Shift 2) start time (e.g., 16:00).
The third position in the Shift Table corresponds to the third shift (Shift 3) start time (e.g., 00:00).
Special Consideration: If your facility runs less than three shifts each day, you should set the Shift Table to
“ignore” those shifts that don’t exist. For example, if you only run two shifts, define the Shift Table in the example
above as “F S S” (representing First, Second, Second). This way, the system inserts an “F” into the pattern during
the 1st shift only. It will insert an “S” into the pattern at all other times.
To configure the Shift Code lookup table:
From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen, press
F5 (SETUP).
The system will display the Setup Menu.
Press F7 to toggle the DESIGN selection to USER.
Press F3 (DESIGN) to access the User Screen.
The User Screen provides parameters on three
separate pages (General, Shifts, and Omni SN).
The Shift Code lookup table is on the second page.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
F1:LEVEL
F6:<SUPERVISOR>
F2:QUERY TEXT
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
]
F3:DESIGN
F7:<USER >
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
F4:PROPERTIES
F8:<STARTUP >
003:[
]
F5:MANAGEMENT
004:[
]
005:[
]
Press PAGE DOWN until the User Shifts Screen is displayed.
34700D.DOC
3-9
TMC470 Controller Operation
Shift Code Properties (continued)
Verify the cursor is on the Shift lookup table.
If not, press TAB to select it.
This table allows you to assign a separate, single
character to represent each shift of the work day.
Note: The first entry represents Shift 1.
The second entry represents Shift 2.
The third entry represents Shift 3.
Type the 3 code characters into the table.
Press TAB to select Shift 1 (or Shift 2 or Shift 3) .
GENERAL
SHIFTS
Shift 2
[16:00]
F1 SAVE
Type the start time for each shift in the appropriate
text box.
USER:
GENERAL
Shift 3
[00:00]
F2 DEFAULTS
SHIFTS
OMNI SN
Shift Table: [123]
Shift 1
Times: [08:00]
F1 SAVE
OMNI SN
Shift Table: [123]
Shift 1
Times: [08:00]
The Shift Times consist of three text boxes.
Each box defines the time of day the shift begins.
USER:
Shift 2
[16:00]
Shift 3
[00:00]
F2 DEFAULTS
Press F1 (SAVE) to store the Shift Code lookup table
settings.
CAUTION
Resetting the Shift Code lookup table settings will also reset the Date Code
lookup table and the Omni serial number parameters to their factory
default settings. All parameters that have been specifically configured for
your system will be overwritten with the default values.
To reset all User Properties settings (Date Codes, Shift Codes, Omni SN) to their default settings:
•
•
3-10
Press F2 (DEFAULTS)
Press F1 (SAVE)
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
3.7 OMNI SERIAL NUMBER PROPERTIES
Key Point…
The Omni serial number parameters may be configured by Designer-level and Supervisor-level personnel.
The Omni serial number allows you to continue a serial number sequence throughout the marking of several patterns.
Unlike pattern serial numbers which are stored with the individual patterns, the Omni serial number is stored in
permanent memory. It applies to all patterns that contain an Omni serial number flag (%O or %o).
The Omni serial number value is updated each time a pattern containing an Omni serial number flag is printed. The
Omni serial number automatically wraps (resets) when its limit is reached. Optionally, you can program the Omni serial
number to reset at a specific time or you can manually change it whenever you wish.
To configure the Omni serial number properties:
From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen, press
F5 (SETUP). The system will display the Setup Menu.
Press F7 to toggle the DESIGN selection to USER.
Press F3 (DESIGN) to access the User Screen.
The User Screen provides parameters on three
separate pages (General, Shifts, and Omni SN).
Press PAGE DOWN until the Omni SN Screen is
displayed.
Verify the cursor is on the Lower parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
The Lower parameter defines the minimum value of
the Omni serial number.
Type the lower serial number limit in the text box.
Press TAB to select the Upper parameter.
The Upper parameter defines the maximum value of
the Omni serial number.
Type the upper serial number limit in the text box.
Press TAB to select the SN parameter.
The SN parameter shows the current serial number
value. This is the next number to be marked in
fields that contain an Omni serial number flag.
Note: You can manually change the Omni serial
number at any time by editing this parameter.
To change the current Omni serial number, type the
desired value in the text box.
Press TAB to select the Alpha parameter.
The Alpha parameter defines the single, uppercase,
alphabetic character that will be inserted into the
pattern wherever the Omni Alpha flag (%a) is located.
The lower alpha limit is A; the upper limit is Z.
The alpha character automatically bumps when the
numeric portion of the Omni serial number wraps.
Note: If the Delta parameter value (see below) is
positive, the alpha character will bump up.
If the Delta value is negative, it will bump down.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
F1:LEVEL
F6:<SUPERVISOR>
F2:QUERY TEXT
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
]
F3:DESIGN
F7:<USER >
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
F4:PROPERTIES
F8:<STARTUP >
003:[
]
F5:MANAGEMENT
004:[
]
005:[
]
USER:
GENERAL
SHIFTS
Lower:[000000001]
Upper:[000999999]
SN
:[000000001]
Alpha:[A]
Delta: [
1]
Reset: <None
>
Time : [00:00]
F1 SAVE
USER:
GENERAL
OMNI SN
Delta: [
1]
Reset: <None
>
Time : [00:00]
F1 SAVE
GENERAL
F2 DEFAULTS
SHIFTS
Lower:[000000001]
Upper:[000999999]
SN
:[000000001]
Alpha:[A]
USER:
OMNI SN
F2 DEFAULTS
SHIFTS
Lower:[000000001]
Upper:[000999999]
SN
:[000000001]
Alpha:[A]
F1 SAVE
OMNI SN
Delta: [
1]
Reset: <None
>
Time : [00:00]
F2 DEFAULTS
Type the alpha character in the text box. You may use any uppercase character (A, B, C… Z).
34700D.DOC
3-11
TMC470 Controller Operation
Omni Serial Number Properties (continued)
Press TAB to select the Delta parameter.
The Delta parameter defines the amount the
system will increase (or decrease) the Omni serial
number when it automatically updates the number.
The Delta parameter value may be positive or
negative to increase or decrease the Omni serial
number. When the limit is reached, the system will
automatically wrap (reset) the number.
If the Delta parameter is positive, the system will
reset the serial number to the lower limit.
•
If the Delta parameter is negative, the system
will reset the serial number to the upper limit.
GENERAL
SHIFTS
Lower:[000000001]
Upper:[000999999]
SN
:[000000001]
Alpha:[A]
F1 SAVE
OMNI SN
Delta: [
1]
Reset: <None
>
Time : [00:00]
F2 DEFAULTS
Type the delta value in the text box.
•
•
•
USER:
Enter a positive value for the system to automatically increase the serial number.
Enter a negative value for the system to
automatically decrease the serial number.
Press TAB to select the Reset parameter.
USER:
The Reset parameter defines when the Omni serial
number will automatically reset to its lower limit.
None – only when it reaches its upper limit.
Daily – each day at a specific time as defined by
the Time parameter (below).
GENERAL
SHIFTS
Lower:[000000001]
Upper:[000999999]
SN
:[000000001]
Alpha:[A]
Delta: [
1]
Reset: <None
>
Time : [00:00]
F1 SAVE
Shift – at the start of each work shift as defined in
the User Shifts lookup table. See Shift Code
Properties to define work shift start times.
OMNI SN
F2 DEFAULTS
Hourly – at the start of each hour based on the
TMC470 internal clock.
Monthly – at the start of each month based on the
TMC470 internal calendar.
If you set the Reset parameter to Daily,
press TAB to select the Time parameter.
USER:
The Time parameter defines the time of day the
reset will occur if a Daily reset is scheduled.
Type the reset time of day in the text box.
Note: Specify times using the 24-hour clock format
where midnight = 00:00, 1 a.m. = 01:00,
noon = 12:00, and 1 p.m. = 13:00.
GENERAL
SHIFTS
Lower:[000000001]
Upper:[000999999]
SN
:[000000001]
Alpha:[A]
F1 SAVE
Delta: [
1]
Reset: <None
>
Time : [00:00]
F2 DEFAULTS
NOTICE
Ensure the SN parameter value is valid (between the Lower and Upper limit
settings) before you exit this page. Otherwise, the system will issue an
error message if you attempt to save the settings or display a different
page with an invalid serial number value.
3-12
34700D.DOC
OMNI SN
TMC470 Controller Operation
Omni Serial Number Properties (continued)
Press F1 (SAVE) to store the Omni serial number settings.
CAUTION
Resetting the Omni serial number parameters will also reset the Date Code
lookup table and the Shift Code lookup table to their factory default
settings. All parameters that have been specifically configured for your
system will be overwritten with the default values.
To reset all User Properties settings (Date Codes, Shift Codes, Omni SN) to their default settings:
•
•
Press F2 (DEFAULTS)
Press F1 (SAVE)
3.8 DOWNLOADING SYSTEM PARAMETERS FROM MERLIN
You can download certain parameters from the Merlin III software to the TMC470 Controller. This is a quick and easy
way to provide the parameter settings used by patterns you’ve also downloaded from Merlin.
When downloaded, the following parameters in the TMC470 Controller will be set to the current values in Merlin:
•
•
•
•
Omni Serial Number parameters
Query Buffer Titles and Text
User Date Codes
User Shift Codes
To use this feature:
Ensure the computer is properly connected and all communication parameters are properly configured.
Refer to Ethernet/Merlin Communication Properties (Chapter 3).
Place the marking system under Merlin III control.
See Initiating Merlin Control (Chapter 1).
Refer to the Merlin III Operating Instructions (available via the Merlin Help menu under Help Topics).
See TMC470 Stand-alone Operation.
34700D.DOC
3-13
TMC470 Controller Operation
3.9 STARTUP PROPERTIES
The Startup parameters control tasks that the system will automatically perform when the controller is turned on.
From the Supervisor Main Screen, press F5 (SETUP).
The system will display the Setup Menu.
Press F8 to toggle the PROPERTIES selection to
STARTUP.
Press F4 (PROPERTIES) to access the Startup Screen.
The Startup parameters are displayed on three
separate pages (On Startup, IO, and Disk).
Verify the cursor is on the Pattern parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
STARTUP:
This parameter allows you to specify the name of
the pattern the system will automatically load
during startup.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
F1:LEVEL
F6:<SUPERVISOR>
F2:QUERY TEXT
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
]
F7:<UNITS>
F3:DESIGN
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
F4:PROPERTIES
F8:<STARTUP >
003:[
]
F5:MANAGEMENT
004:[
]
005:[
]
Type the exact name of the pattern in the text box.
Pattern: [
Online:
Park on Load:
Keyboard/Display:
Note: If you wish to disable automatic pattern
loading, leave the text box blank (empty).
Press ENTER to toggle the selection on or off.
indicates the system will be placed offline.
Normal
>
F2 DEFAULTS
STARTUP:
ON STARTUP
Pattern: [
Online:
Park on Load:
Keyboard/Display:
IO
DISK
]
<
Normal
>
F2 DEFAULTS
Press TAB to select the Park on Load parameter.
Press ENTER to toggle the selection on or off.
indicates the system will not automatically park.
STARTUP:
ON STARTUP
Pattern: [
Online:
Park on Load:
Keyboard/Display:
F1 SAVE
⌧ indicates the marker will automatically park.
3-14
<
F1 SAVE
This parameter determines whether the marker
will automatically move to the pattern park
position when a pattern is loaded (opened).
DISK
]
F1 SAVE
⌧ indicates the system will be placed online.
IO
Press TAB to select the Online parameter.
This parameter determines whether the system
will automatically be placed online or offline when
the controller is turned on.
ON STARTUP
34700D.DOC
IO
DISK
]
<
Normal
>
F2 DEFAULTS
TMC470 Controller Operation
Startup Properties (continued)
Press TAB to select the Keyboard/Display parameter.
This parameter determines the operation state the
controller keyboard and display.
Press ENTER until the desired mode is displayed.
NORMAL fully enables the keyboard and display.
STARTUP:
ON STARTUP
Pattern: [
Online:
Park on Load:
Keyboard/Display:
DISABLED disables the keyboard once you enter
Operator mode or restart the controller. The only
key that remains enabled is F5 (SETUP) from the
Main Screen.
IO
DISK
]
<
F1 SAVE
Normal
>
F2 DEFAULTS
Key Point…
To restore keyboard usage, press F5 (from the
Main Screen), enter the Supervisor-level
password, then re-configure the Startup
Properties for normal keyboard/display operation.
NO ERRORS suppresses error messages from being displayed to the operator.
Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
Verify the cursor is on the Input Function parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
This parameter defines how the marking system
will interpret the input signal received on pin 8 of
the I/O Port connector.
STARTUP:
ON STARTUP
Input Function(8):
IO
DISK
Online
Sel 6
Debounce: [ 100] ms
F1 SAVE
ONLINE – when an input signal is received, the
system will place the machine online.
F2 DEFAULTS
SEL 6 – when an input signal is received, the system
uses this input (and other SEL inputs) to remotely
select and load patterns. Refer to Remote Pattern
Selection (Chapter 2) for details.
Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key to select the
desired input function, then press ENTER.
Press TAB to select the Debounce parameter.
This parameter is used when patterns are remotely
selected using an I/O device. When activity is
sensed on any of the dedicated input signals, the
system will wait the length of time specified by the
Debounce parameter before reading the inputs.
Type the desired time interval (in milliseconds) into
the text box. You may set the Debounce time from
10 ms to 2000 ms (2 seconds).
34700D.DOC
STARTUP:
ON STARTUP
Input Function(8):
IO
DISK
Online
Sel 6
Debounce: [ 100] ms
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
3-15
TMC470 Controller Operation
Startup Properties (continued)
Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
CAUTION
If you change (and save) the maximum pattern size parameter, the
system will delete ALL patterns stored in the controller.
If you change (and save) the maximum block size parameter, the
system will delete ALL block files stored in the controller.
Verify the cursor is on the Max Pattern Size parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
This parameter defines how much space the system
will allocate in memory for each pattern file. The
smaller the allocation, the more patterns you can
store. Conversely, the larger the allocation, the
fewer patterns you can store.
STARTUP:
ON STARTUP
Max Pattern Size:
Max Block Size:
Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key to select the
maximum file size the controller will allocate per
pattern.
IO
DISK
< 8K>
<64K>
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
Based on the allocated size, the controller will store
approximately the following number of pattern files:
4K
400 patterns
8K
200 patterns (default)
16K 100 patterns
32K 50 patterns
64K 25 patterns
Press TAB to select the Max Block Size parameter.
This parameter defines how much space the system
will allocate in memory for each block file. The
smaller the allocation, the more blocks you can
store. Conversely, the larger the allocation, the
fewer blocks you can store.
Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key to select the
maximum file size the controller will allocate per block.
Based on the allocated size, the controller will store
approximately the following number of block files:
4K
192 blocks
8K
96 blocks
16K 48 blocks
32K 24 blocks
64K 12 blocks (default)
3-16
34700D.DOC
STARTUP:
ON STARTUP
Max Pattern Size:
Max Block Size:
F1 SAVE
IO
DISK
< 8K>
<64K>
F2 DEFAULTS
TMC470 Controller Operation
Startup Properties (continued)
To SAVE the Startup Properties settings, press F1 (SAVE).
•
•
If you changed the Max Pattern Size or the Max Block
Size parameter values, the system will prompt you to
confirm your changes.
!
If you changed (and save) the maximum
pattern size parameter, the system will
delete ALL patterns stored in the controller.
!
If you changed (and save) the maximum
block size parameter, the system will delete
ALL block files stored in the controller.
STARTUP:
ON STARTUP
IO
DISK
Max Pattern
Size: <–8K>
Patterns/Blocks
Erased! Continue?
Max Block Size:
<64K>
F1-Yes
F2-No
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
Press F1 to a continue.
The all patterns and/or all blocks will be deleted from the controller, as applicable.
or
•
Press F2 to cancel and remain on the Startup Screen.
To RESET the Startup Properties settings to their default settings:
•
Press F2 (DEFAULTS)
Note: This will not affect the Max Pattern Size and Max Block Size parameter settings.
The Max Size parameters must be manually reset to their default values.
•
Press F1 (SAVE)
34700D.DOC
3-17
TMC470 Controller Operation
3.10 HOST COMMUNICATION PROPERTIES
The Host communication parameters allow you to configure the TMC470 Comm 1 port. The Comm 1 port is a serial
interface. It may be used to transmit data, select patterns for printing, and control marker operation via remote devices
such as host computers, terminals, or bar code scanners.
The Comm 1 interface can be configured to connect with either RS232 or RS485 devices. Additionally, it may be
configured to use either Programmable Protocol or Extended Protocol. The protocol selection determines how your
system passes information to and from remote serial device.
•
•
Programmable Protocol provides "receive only" communication without error checking.
Extended Protocol provides two-way communication with error checking. Optionally, when using RS485
communications, you can connect multiple, networked TMC470 controllers to a single host device.
3.10.1 Primary Communication Parameters
From the Supervisor Main Screen, press F5 (SETUP).
The system will display the Setup Menu.
Press F8 to toggle the PROPERTIES selection to HOST.
Press F4 (PROPERTIES) to access the Host Screen.
The Host parameters are displayed on four pages
(Comm, Protocol, Programmable, and Echo).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
F1:LEVEL
F6:<SUPERVISOR>
F2:QUERY TEXT
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
]
F3:DESIGN
F7:<UNITS>
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
F4:PROPERTIES
F8:<HOST
>
003:[
]
F5:MANAGEMENT
004:[
]
005:[
]
The first page (COMM) provides the primary
communication parameters required for all Host
interfaces.
BAUD defines the number of data bits transferred
per second. The Baud parameter must be set to
match the baud rate of the connected device.
Note: If given a choice, use the highest possible
value. Transmission distances greater than
50 ft. (25 ft. for 19200 baud) may require a
modem or a lower baud rate selection.
HOST:
STOP BITS represent the space between characters
as they are sent during a transmission. The Stop Bits
parameter must be set to match the value required
by the connected device.
Set each of the primary communication parameters as
required for your application.
•
•
3-18
Press TAB to select the parameter.
Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key to select the
desired setting, then press ENTER.
Proceed to the following section, as applicable, to
configure the remaining host communication properties.
•
Programmable Protocol Parameters
or
•
Extended Protocol Parameters
34700D.DOC
PROT
Baud
Parity
Bits
Stop Bits
PARITY identifies an extra bit at the end of a
message that checks for problems in the data
transmission. The Parity parameter must be set to
match the value required by the connected device.
BITS must be set to match the value required by
the connected device.
COMM
F1 SAVE
PROG
ECHO
< 19200>
<NONE>
<8>
<1>
F2 DEFAULTS
TMC470 Controller Operation
3.10.2 Programmable Protocol Parameters
Programmable Protocol is used to communicate with devices where one-way communication is required. It provides no
error checking or acknowledgment of the transmitted data.
Perform the following procedures to configure the Comm 1
interface for use with Programmable Protocol.
From the Supervisor Main Screen, press F5 (SETUP).
The system will display the Setup Menu.
Press F8 to toggle the PROPERTIES selection to HOST.
Press F4 (PROPERTIES) to access the Host Screen.
The Host parameters are displayed on four pages
(Comm, Protocol, Programmable, and Echo).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
F1:LEVEL
F6:<SUPERVISOR>
F2:QUERY TEXT
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
]
F7:<UNITS>
F3:DESIGN
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
F4:PROPERTIES
F8:<HOST
>
003:[
]
F5:MANAGEMENT
004:[
]
005:[
]
The first page (COMM) provides the basic
communication parameters required for all Host
interfaces. See Primary Communication Parameters
for details.
Press PAGE DOWN until the Protocol Screen is displayed.
The second page (PROT) allows you to select the protocol and communication type you intend to use.
Verify the cursor is on the Protocol parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
The Protocol parameter identifies how your marker
will pass information to and from other serial devices.
Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key until PROGRAM
is displayed.
HOST:
PROG
ECHO
F2 DEFAULTS
Press TAB to select the Type parameter.
The Type parameter identifies the serial format you
intend to use (RS232 or RS485).
PROT
Protocol:
<PROGRAM >
Type:
<232>
485 Rx Tx Delay: [3 ]ms
Id:
[0 ]
F1 SAVE
COMM
Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key until 232 is
displayed.
Note: RS-485 should not be selected when
Programmable Protocol is used. For RS-485
applications, refer to Extended Protocol.
HOST:
COMM
PROT
PROG
ECHO
Protocol:
<PROGRAM >
Type:
<232>
485 Rx Tx Delay: [3 ]ms
Id:
[0 ]
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
Ignore the 485 Rx Tx Delay parameter
when configuring RS232 communications.
Press TAB to select the ID parameter.
Note: The ID parameter is typically used only with
Extended Protocol to identify multiple,
networked controllers.
Verify the ID parameter value is set to zero (0).
If not, type "0" in the text box.
HOST:
PROT
PROG
ECHO
Protocol:
<PROGRAM >
Type:
<232>
485 Rx Tx Delay: [3 ]ms
Id:
[0 ]
F1 SAVE
COMM
F2 DEFAULTS
Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
34700D.DOC
3-19
TMC470 Controller Operation
Programmable Protocol Parameters (continued)
The third page (PROG) allows you to define which characters to extract from the transmitted data string and how to process
the data during marker operations. See Programmable Protocol Examples for illustrations on using these features.
NOTE
The host message may contain ASCII characters that define the Start Character,
the Terminator, and the Ignore Character within the transmitted data string. To
identify these ASCII characters, you must specify their decimal equivalents when
setting up the following parameters. Refer to Appendix B: ASCII Character Cross
Reference to view decimal and hexadecimal equivalents of ASCII characters.
Start Char identifies the decimal equivalent of the
ASCII character in the host message where the
marking system should begin to count character
positions. (e.g., decimal 0 = no starting character or
decimal 2 = ASCII Start of Text)
Terminator identifies the decimal equivalent of the
ASCII character in the host message that signals the
end of the string. The terminator is usually a carriage
return. (e.g., decimal 13 = ASCII Carriage Return)
HOST:
COMM
PROT
PROG
Start Char:[0 ]
Position :[1 ]
Ignore
:[10 ]
F1 SAVE
ECHO
Terminator:[13 ]
Length
:[0 ]
Msg Type :[V ]
F2 DEFAULTS
Position identifies the physical position in the data
string where the marking system will begin to extract
data from the host message. This position is relative to the Start Character position (if used).
Length identifies the number of characters to extract from the host message. The system used the Position
parameter and Length parameter determine which characters to extract from the host message. Note: This
parameter is optional when a Terminator (see above) is used in the host message.
Ignore identifies the decimal equivalent of the ASCII character in the host message that the marking system
should ignore. (e.g., decimal 10 = ASCII Line Feed)
Msg Type defines how the marking system will use the data it extracts from the host message. Valid message
types are: P, V, 1, Q, and 0 (zero).
P
loads a specific pattern using the pattern name extracted from the host message.
V
updates the first variable text field of the pattern with data extracted from the host message.
1 overwrites the content of the first text field in the pattern with data extracted from the host message.
Note that if the field contains message flags, the flags will overwritten (deleted), not updated.
Q
updates the text in the first query text buffer with data extracted from the host message.
0 (zero) indicates that the host message will provide the message type, field number (if applicable), and data.
This option allows more flexibility by delegating the message type selection to the host on a message-bymessage basis. The host message must use the format Tnn<string> where:
T
nn
= P, V, 1, or Q to indicate the message type.
= two-digit number to indicate the field number (01 through 99) or
query text buffer (01 through 20) where the data will be placed.
Note: Do not specify a number with Message Type P.
<string> = pattern name (Message Type P) or field data (Message Types V, 1, or Q), as applicable.
Set each of the programmable protocol parameters as required for your application.
•
•
3-20
Press TAB to select the parameter.
Type the appropriate value in the text box.
Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
Programmable Protocol Parameters (continued)
The fourth page (ECHO) allows you to enable and configure the Echo feature. The Echo feature allows you to send
(echo) a message string (from the controller COMM 1 port) after the pattern is printed. The Echo feature constructs the
transmitted (echoed) message using ASCII characters and special parse flags to extract data from the pattern.
Verify the cursor is on the Echo parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
HOST:
Press ENTER to toggle the Echo option ON or OFF.
<
> indicates Echo is disabled.
< * > indicates Echo is enabled.
COMM
PROT
PROG
Echo :
String:
<
[
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
ECHO
>
]
Press TAB to select the String parameter.
The String parameter defines the data you wish to
echo to the COMM 1 port.
HOST:
COMM
PROT
PROG
The String text box can hold up to 50 characters
(data characters, format characters, literals, and
parse flags). However, the echoed string can
contain up to 100 characters after formatting and
text substitution (including control characters like
ASCII carriage returns and line feeds).
Echo :
String:
<
[
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
ECHO
>
]
Type the desired echo string in the text box.
See examples, below.
•
Use parse flag %#Q to echo a specific field in the pattern,
where # represents the field number 01 through 999.
•
Use parse flag %###C to echo a single ASCII character,
where ### is the decimal equivalent of the ASCII character.
Refer to Appendix B: ASCII Character Cross Reference for details.
•
•
Use the switch \r (or \R) to echo an ASCII carriage return.
Use the switch \n (or \N) to echo an ASCII carriage return and an ASCII line feed.
Examples: Suppose the pattern printed field 01, field 02, and field 03 as:
If the String parameter is defined as:
[DATA=%1Q;%2Q%13C%10C
The data echoed out of the COMM 1 port would be:
If the String parameter is defined as:
247-14:06
TELESIS
]
DATA=SN:2008;247-14:06<CR><LF>
[DATA=%2Q;%3Q%\R
The data echoed out of the COMM 1 port would be:
]
DATA=247-14:06; TELESIS<CR>
To SAVE the Host Properties settings, press F1 (SAVE).
To RESET all Host Properties settings to their default settings:
•
•
SN:2008
Press F2 (DEFAULTS)
Press F1 (SAVE)
34700D.DOC
3-21
TMC470 Controller Operation
3.10.3 Programmable Protocol Examples
This section illustrates the use of the various message types used with Programmable Protocol communications.
The Programmable Protocol parameters define which
characters to extract from the data string transmitted
from the host and how to use the data it extracts.
The Position parameter identifies the location in the
string of the first character you wish to extract.
HOST:
The remaining data to be extracted can be identifying by
naming a terminator character (where to stop extracting),
or by defining the length of the string (total number of
characters to extract). See examples below.
Start Char:[0 ]
Position :[1 ]
Ignore
:[10 ]
The Message Type parameter tells the software how to use
the data it extracts – load a pattern (P), update a text field
(V or 1), or update a query buffer (Q). When you use one
of these message types, the system will process all data
extracted in the same manner until you change the
message type setting.
COMM
F1 SAVE
PROT
PROG
Terminator:[13 ]
Length
:[0 ]
Msg Type :[see examples]
F2 DEFAULTS
These parameters tell the
software which characters to
extract from the transmitted string.
Message Type 0 (zero) allows the host to specify how to
use the data. Message Type 0 allows more flexibility
because you can change message types with each
transmitted string if you wish. See example Message Type
Defined By Host.
ECHO
This parameter tells
the software how to
use the extracted data.
Data Defined By Terminator
In this example, we will use the default Programmable Protocol parameter settings:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Start Character = 0 (i.e., no starting character)
Terminator Character = 13 (ASCII Carriage Return)
Position = 1 (start extracting from first character)
Length = 0* (total number of characters to extract)
Ignore Character = 10 (ASCII Line Feed)
Message Type (see examples, below)
*Note: If the Length parameter is set to zero, the software extracts data until it encounters the terminator character.
Let’s assume the transmitted string looks like this:
Character Position:
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
Transmitted String:
E
X
A
M
P
L
E
1
<CR>
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
The system will start extracting characters from the transmitted string at position 1 and stop when it reaches the
terminator character (CR). In this example, the system will extract the string: EXAMPLE1.
The system will use the extracted string in one of these ways, depending on the selected Message Type:
Message Type P: The system looks in controller memory for a pattern named EXAMPLE1. If the pattern exists, the
system will automatically load (open) the pattern. If the pattern does not exist, the system will issue an error message.
Message Type V: The system updates the first variable text flag (%V) in the pattern with the text (EXAMPLE1). If
the variable text field is defined to hold less than the number of characters extracted (say %6V), the system will
truncate the extracted text when it inserts it into the field (e.g., EXAMPL). Ensure the variable text field is
sufficiently defined to accept all characters extracted from the transmitted string.
Message Type 1: The system inserts the text (EXAMPLE1) into the first text-based object in the pattern. Text-based
objects include Text fields, 2D Matrix symbols, QR Code symbols, MicroQR Code symbols, and Arc Text fields. Any data
already residing in the text-based field will be overwritten by the extracted data. Note that if the field contains a
variable text flag, the flag will also be overwritten (not updated). Compare this result with Message Type V, above.
Message Type Q: The system inserts the text (EXAMPLE1) into the first query text buffer. Any data already
residing in the buffer will be overwritten by the extracted data.
3-22
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
Programmable Protocol Examples (continued)
Data Defined By Length
In this example, we will change the Programmable Protocol parameter settings to define the data string in terms of its
length. We’ll also define a Start Character and include an Ignore character in the transmitted string to show how the
system handles them.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Start Character = 2 (ASCII STX character)
Terminator Character = 13* (ASCII Carriage Return)
Position = 5 (start extracting from fifth character)
Length = 8* (extract a total of 8 characters)
Ignore Character = 10 (ASCII Line Feed)
Message Type (see examples, below)
HOST:
COMM
PROT
PROG
Start Char:[2 ]
Position :[5 ]
Ignore
:[10 ]
*Note: Since we are using the Length parameter,
characters beyond the specified length and up
to the terminator character will be ignored.
F1 SAVE
ECHO
Terminator:[13 ]
Length
:[8 ]
Msg Type :[see examples]
F2 DEFAULTS
Let’s assume the transmitted string looks like this:
Character Position:
Transmitted String:
<STX>
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
T
E
S
T
E
X
A
M
P
L
E
<LF>
2
[
T
W
0
]
<CR>
The STX character identifies the start of the string. Position #1 begins immediately after the STX character.
The Carriage Return (CR) identifies the end of the string. However, we have instructed the system to extract only eight
(8) characters starting at position 5. In this example, the system will extract the string: EXAMPLE2.
Note that the characters before position 5 (TEST), the Line Feed character (LF), and the remaining characters in the
string ([TWO]) are ignored.
The system will use the extracted string in one of these ways, depending on the selected Message Type:
Message Type P: The system looks in controller memory for a pattern named EXAMPLE2. If the pattern exists, the
system will automatically load (open) the pattern. If the pattern does not exist, the system will issue an error message.
Message Type V: The system updates the first variable text flag (%V) in the pattern with the text (EXAMPLE2). If
the variable text field is defined to hold less than the number of characters extracted (say %6V), the system will
truncate the extracted text when it inserts it into the field (e.g., EXAMPL). Ensure the variable text field is
sufficiently defined to accept all characters extracted from the transmitted string.
Message Type 1: The system inserts the text (EXAMPLE2) into the first text-based object in the pattern. Text-based
objects include Text fields, 2D Matrix symbols, QR Code symbols, MicroQR Code symbols, and Arc Text fields. Any data
already residing in the text-based field will be overwritten by the extracted data. Note that if the field contains a
variable text flag, the flag will also be overwritten (not updated). Compare this result with Message Type V, above.
Message Type Q: The system inserts the text (EXAMPLE2) into the first query text buffer. Any data already
residing in the buffer will be overwritten by the extracted data.
34700D.DOC
3-23
TMC470 Controller Operation
Programmable Protocol Examples (continued)
Message Type Defined By Host
In this example, we will show how the transmitted string can be used to supply both the data and the message type.
Message Type 0 (zero) allows the host to specify how to use the data. This features allows more flexibility because you can
change message types with each transmitted string if you wish.
For simplicity, we will use the default Programmable Protocol parameter settings. The only difference is setting the
Message Type parameter to 0 (zero).
•
•
•
•
•
•
Start Character = 0 (ASCII NULL, i.e., no start character)
Terminator Character = 13 (ASCII Carriage Return)
Position = 1 (start extracting from first character)
Length = 0* (total number of characters to extract)
Ignore Character = 10 (ASCII Line Feed)
Message Type = 0 (i.e., the Host will supply the type)
HOST:
COMM
PROT
Start Char:[0 ]
Position :[1 ]
Ignore
:[10 ]
*Note: If the Length parameter is set to zero, the
software extracts data until it encounters the
terminator character.
F1 SAVE
PROG
ECHO
Terminator:[13 ]
Length
:[0 ]
Msg Type :[0 ]
F2 DEFAULTS
The examples that follow show how each host-supplied message type and data is used by the system.
Load a Pattern
The transmitted string may look like this:
Character Position:
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
Transmitted String:
P
E
X
A
M
P
L
E
3
<CR>
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
The system will start extracting characters from the transmitted string at position 1 and stop when it reaches the
terminator character (CR). In this example, the system will extract the string: PEXAMPLE3.
The first character (P) identifies the Message Type. The remaining characters identify the name of the pattern. The
system looks in controller memory for a pattern named EXAMPLE3. If the pattern exists, the system will automatically
load (open) the pattern. If the pattern does not exist, the system will issue an error message.
Update a Specific Variable Text Field
The transmitted string may look like this:
Character Position:
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
Transmitted String:
V
0
2
E
X
A
M
P
L
E
4
<CR>
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
The system will start extracting characters from the transmitted string at position 1 and stop when it reaches the
terminator character (CR). In this example, the system will extract the string: V02EXAMPLE4.
The first character (V) identifies the Message Type. The next two characters (02) identify the variable text field in the
pattern that you wish to update (in this example, the second variable text field). The remaining characters (EXAMPLE4)
identify the data.
The system updates the specified variable text flag (%V) in the pattern with the string (EXAMPLE4). If the variable text
field is defined to hold less than the number of characters extracted (say %6V), the system will truncate the extracted
text when it inserts it into the field (e.g., EXAMPL). Ensure the variable text field is sufficiently defined to accept all
characters extracted from the transmitted string.
Note that when the Message Type parameter (on the Host Screen, above) is set to V, the system always updates the
first variable text field in the pattern. However, when the Message Type parameter is set to 0 (zero) and the host
supplies the message type within the transmitted string, it can identify a specific variable text field to update.
3-24
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
Programmable Protocol Examples (continued)
Update a Specific Field
The transmitted string may look like this:
Character Position:
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
Transmitted String:
1
0
3
E
X
A
M
P
L
E
5
<CR>
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
The system will start extracting characters from the transmitted string at position 1 and stop when it reaches the
terminator character (CR). In this example, the system will extract the string: 103EXAMPLE5.
The first character (1) identifies the Message Type. The next two characters (03) identify the text-based object in the
pattern that you wish to update (in this example, the third text-based object). Text-based objects include Text fields,
2D Matrix symbols, QR Code symbols, MicroQR Code symbols, and Arc Text fields. The remaining characters
(EXAMPLE5) identify the data.
The system inserts the string (EXAMPLE5) into the specified text-based field. Any data already residing in the field will
be overwritten by the extracted data. Note that if the field contains a variable text flag, the flag will also be overwritten
(not updated). Compare this result with Update a Specific Variable Text Field, above.
Note that when the Message Type parameter (on the Host Screen, above) is set to 1, the system always updates the
first text-based field in the pattern. However, when the Message Type parameter is set to 0 (zero) and the host
supplies the message type within the transmitted string, it can identify a specific text-based field to update.
Update a Specific Query Text Buffer
The transmitted string may look like this:
Character Position:
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
Transmitted String:
Q
0
4
E
X
A
M
P
L
E
6
<CR>
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
The system will start extracting characters from the transmitted string at position 1 and stop when it reaches the
terminator character (CR). In this example, the system will extract the string: Q04EXAMPLE6.
The first character (Q) identifies the Message Type. The next two characters (04) identify the Query Text Buffer you
wish to update (in this example, the fourth buffer). The remaining characters (EXAMPLE6) identify the data.
The system inserts the string (EXAMPLE6) into the specified query text buffer. Any data already residing in the buffer
will be overwritten by the extracted data.
Note that when the Message Type parameter (on the Host Screen, above) is set to Q, the system always updates the
first query text buffer. However, when the Message Type parameter is set to 0 (zero) and the host supplies the
message type within the transmitted string, it can identify a specific buffer to update.
34700D.DOC
3-25
TMC470 Controller Operation
3.10.4 Extended Protocol Parameters
Extended Protocol provides two-way communication with error checking. It is designed to provide secure communications
with an intelligent host device using pre-defined message formats, response formats, and message types. It also
provides hand-shaking to detect faults in the transmitted messages, effectively verifying the data is properly received.
See Extended Protocol Examples for illustrations on using these features.
Extended Protocol allows for multi-drop communications so that the multiple markers may be networked through a host
computer. If Extended Protocol is chosen, you may use up to 31 markers controlled by one host computer using
RS-485 communications. All communications are carried out in a parent/child relationship. Only the host has the ability
to initiate communications. The marker communicates only in response.
Perform the following procedures to configure the Comm 1 interface for use with Extended Protocol.
From the Supervisor Main Screen, press F5 (SETUP).
The system will display the Setup Menu.
Press F8 to toggle the PROPERTIES selection to HOST.
Press F4 (PROPERTIES) to access the Host Screen.
The Host parameters are displayed on four pages
(Comm, Protocol, Programmable, and Echo).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
F1:LEVEL
F6:<SUPERVISOR>
F2:QUERY TEXT
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
]
F7:<UNITS>
F3:DESIGN
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
F4:PROPERTIES
F8:<HOST
>
003:[
]
F5:MANAGEMENT
004:[
]
005:[
]
The first page (COMM) provides the basic
communication parameters required for all Host
interfaces. See Primary Communication Parameters
for details.
Press PAGE DOWN until the Protocol Screen is displayed.
Verify the cursor is on the Protocol parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
HOST:
The Protocol parameter identifies how your marker will
pass information to and from other serial devices.
Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key until EXTENDED
is displayed.
Press TAB to select the Type parameter.
The Type parameter identifies the serial format you
intend to use (RS232 or RS485). You must choose RS485 if more than one controller is connected in a multidrop network. See ID parameter (below).
3-26
Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key until the desired
format type is displayed.
Press TAB to select the 485 Rx Tx Delay parameter.
Since RS485 communications transmit and receive
signals on the same line, a delay is required to manage
the signal traffic. This parameter defines the delay
between transmissions, thus allowing time for the port
to switch from receive-mode to transmit-mode, and
vice versa.
Type the desired delay (in milliseconds) in the text box.
Set the value to match the customer-supplied RS485 device.
34700D.DOC
COMM
PROT
PROG
ECHO
Protocol:
<EXTENDED>
Type:
<232>
485 Rx Tx Delay: [3 ]ms
Id:
[0 ]
F1 SAVE
HOST:
F2 DEFAULTS
COMM
PROT
PROG
ECHO
Protocol:
<PROGRAM >
Type:
<232>
485 Rx Tx Delay: [3 ]ms
Id:
[0 ]
F1 SAVE
HOST:
F2 DEFAULTS
COMM
PROT
PROG
ECHO
Protocol:
<PROGRAM >
Type:
<485>
485 Rx Tx Delay: [3 ]ms
Id:
[0 ]
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
TMC470 Controller Operation
Extended Protocol Parameters (continued)
Press TAB to select the ID parameter.
This parameter is typically used to identify a
controller when multiple controllers are connected
in a multi-drop network. Each controller must be
identified by a unique ID number (0 through 31).
The host may download a message and direct it to
a particular controller. The station ID is sent at
the beginning of a message and only the controller
with that station ID number receives the message.
HOST:
PROT
PROG
ECHO
Protocol:
<PROGRAM >
Type:
<485>
485 Rx Tx Delay: [3 ]ms
Id:
[1 ]
F1 SAVE
Type the station ID for this controller in the text box.
You must use ID zero (0) if only one controller is
used.
To SAVE the Host Properties settings, press F1 (SAVE).
To RESET all Host Properties settings to their default settings:
•
•
COMM
F2 DEFAULTS
Press F2 (DEFAULTS)
Press F1 (SAVE)
3.10.5 Extended Protocol Examples
The following sections illustrate the use of message formats, response formats, message types, and block check code
(BCC) calculations used with Extended Protocol communications.
Message Format
Messages from the host to the controller are transmitted in the following format:
SOH TYPE [##] STX [DATA] ETX [BCC] CR
where:
SOH
ASCII Start of Header character (001H). The marking system ignores all characters received prior to the
SOH.
TYPE
A single printable ASCII character that defines the message type of the current message.
See Message Types (below) for details.
[##]
Two ASCII decimal digits that specify the Station ID number of the controller.
•
If only one controller is used, the Station ID may be eliminated and "00" will be assumed.
•
For multi-drop network applications that use more than one controller, the Station ID uniquely
identifies the individual controllers (from 01 to 31).
STX
ASCII Start of Text character (002H).
[DATA]
This field contains the actual data of the message. This field is required for certain types of messages.
See Message Types (below) for details.
ETX
ASCII End of Text character (003H).
[BCC]
A Block Check Code (BCC) generated and sent to improve link reliability by providing fault detection.
CR
ASCII Carriage Return character (00DH).
34700D.DOC
3-27
TMC470 Controller Operation
Extended Protocol Examples (continued)
Response Format
The controller may respond to the host in one of two ways.
If the host transmission is error free, the controller responds with an acknowledge (ACK) message in the form:
SOH TYPE [##] ACK STX [DATA] ETX BCC CR
If an error is encountered, the controller responds with a negative-acknowledge (NAK) message in the form:
SOH TYPE [##] NAK STX [DATA] ETX BCC CR
where:
SOH
ASCII Start of Header character (001H).
TYPE
The Type returned is the same message type as sent by the host.
[##]
The Station ID number of the responding controller.
The ID should match the Station ID of the host message. If the controller ID is "00", it is not sent.
ACK
ASCII Acknowledge character (006H). Sent if the message was received in the correct format with no
errors. Note: This only acknowledges that the communication link was successful. This does not indicate
that the requested action was successfully completed.
NAK
ASCII Negative-Acknowledge character (015H). Sent if the message was received with an error.
STX
ASCII Start of Text character (002H).
[DATA] A conditional text string that may be returned for certain message types that request a response (e.g.,
Message Type I or S). See Message Types (below) for details.
ETX
ASCII End of Text character (003H).
[BCC]
A Block Check Code (BCC) generated and sent to improve link reliability by providing fault detection.
CR
ASCII Carriage Return character (00DH).
Key Point…
If the host does not receive a response from the controller within three seconds, the host should
transmit the original message again. If no response is received after three tries, the host should
abort the sequence and declare the link to be down.
3-28
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
Extended Protocol Examples (continued)
Message Types
The following message types may be used with Extended Protocol.
Type 1
This type of message can be used to supply the system with data or to poll the system for information.
Supplying Data. When used to supply data, this message type overwrites the content of the specified
field with the data sent from the host. Note that if the field contains message flags, they will be
overwritten, not updated.
To supply data to a specific field, use the format:
SOH 1 STX nn<string> ETX [BCC] CR
where:
1
=
nn
=
<string> =
message type
two-digit number of the field in the pattern (leading zero required for 01 through 09)
data that will be inserted into the specified field
Polling Data. When used to poll for data, this message type requests the content of the specified field.
You may request the actual content of the field (as defined by the pattern designer) or you may request
the parsed (real-time) data in the field. For example, if the field contains a date/time flag, the actual
content might be “%C”, but the parsed (real-time) data might be “03/08/06 12:45”.
To poll the data in a specific field, use one of these formats:
SOH 1 STX ?nn ETX [BCC] CR
or
SOH 1 STX <nn ETX [BCC] CR
where:
1
?
<
nn
Type G
=
=
=
=
message type
request for actual data (e.g., %C)
request for parsed (real-time) data (e.g., 03/08/06 16:43)
two-digit number of the field in the pattern (leading zero required for 01 through 09)
This type of message allows the host to initiate a print cycle. Use the format:
SOH G STX ETX [BCC] CR
Type I
This message type requests the controller return the status of standard output and input signals.
Use the format:
SOH
I STX ETX [BCC] CR
The controller will return a hexadecimal code for the 6 output signals and 12 input signals
in the following format:
OO;III
where:
bit 1
READY
0x01
bit 2
DONE
0x02
bit 3
PAUSED
0x04
bit 4
NO_FAULT
0x08
bit 5
SPARE_1
0x10
bit 6
SPARE_2
0x20
bit
bit
bit
bit
bit
bit
bit
bit
bit
bit
bit
bit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
START
STOP
SEL_0
SEL_1
SEL_2
SEL_3
SEL_6 *
SEL_4
SEL_5
SPARE_1
SPARE_2
SPARE_3
0x001
0x002
0x004
0x008
0x010
0x020
0x040
0x080
0x100
0x200
0x400
0x800
* may be configured to place machine online (default) or for Remote Pattern Selection.
34700D.DOC
3-29
TMC470 Controller Operation
Extended Protocol Examples (continued)
Type O
This type of message places the machine online. This allows a marking system that is unattended to
recover from a power outage by supplying the online command from the host. Use the format:
SOH O STX ETX [BCC] CR
Type P
This type of message can be used to supply the system with data or to poll the system for information.
Supplying Data. When used to supply data, the host sends the name of the pattern to be loaded.
To supply a pattern name for loading, use the format:
SOH P STX <string> ETX [BCC] CR
where:
P
=
<string> =
message type
name of the pattern to be loaded (the pattern must already exist in controller)
Polling Data. When used to poll for data, this message type requests the name of the pattern currently
loaded in the controller.
To poll the controller for the current pattern name, use one of these formats:
SOH P STX ? ETX [BCC] CR
or
SOH P STX ETX [BCC] CR
where:
P
?
Type Q
=
=
message type
(optional) request for current pattern name
This type of message updates text in the specified query text buffer with the data sent from the host.
To supply data to a specific query text buffer, use the format:
SOH Q STX nn<string> ETX [BCC] CR
where:
Q
=
nn
=
<string> =
3-30
message type
buffer number in query text lookup table (leading zero required for 01 through 09)
data that will be inserted into the specified buffer
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
Extended Protocol Examples (continued)
Type S
This message type requests the error status of the marking system. Use the format:
SOH
S STX ETX [BCC] CR
The controller will return a value that represents a particular type of error. Each error type has one or
more messages that may be displayed on the controller when an error occurs. Refer to the following
table.
For details on error messages, their possible causes and resolutions refer to Chapter 4 System Messages.
Returned
Value
TYPE OF ERROR
Displayed Error Message(s)
0x0000
(no error)
0x0001
ONLINE_ERROR
Timeout… Cannot Find Home Position!
0x0002
PATTERN_LOAD_ERROR
Error Loading Pattern (Host)!
Pattern Not Found (Host) : <pattern_name>
0x0004
DISALLOWED_NO_PATTERN
No Pattern is Loaded!
No Pattern is Loaded for Print!
No Pattern Loaded. Pre-position What?
0x0008
DISALLOWED_OFFLINE
Disallowed! Marker is Offline!
Denied! Marker is Offline!
Cannot Park on Load! Marker is Offline!
0x0010
PATTERN_FIELD_ERROR
Variable Text Not Found!
Text / ArcText / Matrix Field Not Found!
0x0020
MARKER_ABORTED_ERROR
Marker Has Been Aborted!
0x0040
(not used)
0x0080
PIX_OUT_OF_RANGE_ERROR
Pattern Pixel Range Error!
Field <number> – Range Error!
0x0100
RAM_ERROR
Ram Error… Default Parameters Loaded!
Ram Error… Existing Patterns Erased!
0x0200
SN_RANGE_ERROR
Error! Serial Number Range Warning!
0x0400
(not used)
0x0800
OVER_TEMP_ERROR
Marker Aborted! OVER TEMPERATURE Fault
or
Error! OVER TEMPERATURE Fault detected
34700D.DOC
3-31
TMC470 Controller Operation
Extended Protocol Examples (continued)
Type V
This type of message can be used to supply the system with data or to poll the system for information.
Supplying Data. When used to supply data, this message type updates the variable text in the specified
field with the data sent from the host. The specified field must contain a variable text flag (%#V or %#v).
To avoid data truncation, the data supplied to each field must be compatible with the maximum number
of characters allowed for that field.
You may supply data to a single variable text field or to multiple variable text fields. See examples below.
When supplying data to multiple fields:
• If you attempt to supply data to more variable text fields than exist in the pattern,
the extra data will be ignored.
• If you supply data for fewer variable text fields than exist in the pattern,
the extra variable text fields will be cleared of their data (but will retain their variable text flags).
Single Field. To supply data to a single variable text field, use the format
SOH V STX nn<string> ETX [BCC] CR
where:
V
=
nn
=
<string> =
message type
field number in pattern (leading zero required fields 01 through 09)
data that will be inserted into the specified field
Multiple Fields. To supply data to multiple variable text fields, use the format
SOH V STX !<string>|<string> ETX [BCC] CR
where:
V
!
<string1>
|
<string2>
=
=
=
=
=
message type
command for multiple fields
data that will be inserted into the 1st field containing variable text flag
field data separator
data that will be inserted into the 2nd field containing variable text flag
Polling Data. When used to poll for data, this message type requests the user-supplied text that is
contained in a specific variable text field.
Suppose a field contains both fixed text and variable text (e.g., MODEL %5V), and the user has supplied
the text “12345”. This message type will return only the value of the user-supplied text “12345”.
To poll the data in a specific field, use the format
SOH V STX ?nn ETX [BCC] CR
where:
V
?
nn
3-32
=
=
=
message type
request for user-supplied text
field number in pattern (a leading zero is required for fields 01 through 09)
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
Extended Protocol Examples (continued)
Block Check Code
A Block Check Code (BCC) is calculated by performing eight-bit-addition of the TYPE and DATA characters in the
transmitted string and encoding the result as a three-digit ASCII decimal number (000 to 255). If the sum is greater
than 255, the most significant bit overflows and is discarded. If the host is incapable of generating the BCC, it may be
omitted at the risk of undetected transmission errors.
The following is an example of a typical transmission that includes the Block Check Code calculation:
To download the character string "ABC123" for marking in the first field on the next item, you must wait until the
current marking cycle is complete.
The host sends the following message. (Note that all data is shown in hexadecimal).
SOH 1 STX 01ABC123 ETX 238 CR
where:
1
01
ABC123
238
is
is
is
is
the
the
the
the
Message Type
field number
text string
Block Check Code (BCC)
The BCC is calculated as follows:
1. Add Message Type character + DATA characters (1+01+ABC123):
Character
Hex Value
Description
1
0
1
A
B
C
1
2
3
031H
030H
031H
041H
042H
043H
031H
032H
033H
Message Type
First digit of field number
Second digit of field number
First character of text string
Second character of text string
Third character of text string
Fourth character of text string
Fifth character of text string
Sixth character of text string
1EEH
BCC Sum
2. The system is only interested in the lower eight bits, so it discards the first digit of the sum and keeps the lower
two, resulting in a BCC of EE. It then converts the hexadecimal value to decimal:
EE hexadecimal = 238 decimal
3. The decimal value is then converted into its equivalent ASCII representation (where 2=032H, 3=033H, and
8=038H). This is the transmitted BCC. The actual data transmitted by the host for the entire message is (in
hexadecimal):
001H 031H 002H 030H 031H 041H 042H 043H 031H 032H 033H 003H 032H 033H 038H 00DH
4. The marking system will respond with a transmission of:
001H 031H 006H 002H 003H 030H 034H 039H 00DH
which equates to the following ASCII message:
SOH 1 ACK STX ETX 049 CR
Note that if the system had detected an error in receiving the message from the host, it would respond with a NAK (015H)
character in place of the ACK (006H). However, the BCC would be unaffected by this since the ACK/NAK character is not
included in the BCC calculation. Note also that this example does not include requested response data that would be
returned with certain message types (e.g., Type I or S).
34700D.DOC
3-33
TMC470 Controller Operation
3.11 SERIAL2 COMMUNICATION PROPERTIES
The Serial2 communication parameters allow you to configure the TMC470 Comm 2 port. The Comm 2 port is a serial
interface. It may be used to transmit data, select patterns for printing, and control marker operation via remote devices
such as host computers, terminals, or bar code scanners.
Only RS232 devices may be connected to the Comm 2 interface and they may use only Programmable Protocol.
Perform the following procedures to configure the Comm 2
interface communication parameters.
From the Supervisor Main Screen, press F5 (SETUP).
The system will display the Setup Menu.
Press F8 to toggle the PROPERTIES selection to SERIAL2.
Press F4 (PROPERTIES) to access the Host2 Screen.
The Host2 parameters are displayed on three pages
(Comm, Programmable, and Echo).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
F1:LEVEL
F6:<SUPERVISOR>
F2:QUERY TEXT
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
]
F3:DESIGN
F7:<UNITS>
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
F4:PROPERTIES
F8:<SERIAL2 >
003:[
]
F5:MANAGEMENT
004:[
]
005:[
]
The first page (COMM) provides the primary
communication parameters required for all Host
interfaces connected to the Comm 2 serial port.
Verify the cursor is on Serial Tool check box.
If not, press TAB to select it.
HOST 2:
The Serial Tool must be enabled (ON) if you wish to
include Serial commands in your patterns.
COMM
SERIAL TOOL
Press ENTER to toggle the option ON or OFF.
⌧ indicates the Serial Tool is enabled.
indicates the Serial Tool is disabled.
Baud:
< 9600 >
Parity:
<NONE>
Bits:
<8>
Stop Bits:<1>
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
HOST 2:
COMM
Press TAB to select the parameter.
Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key to select the
desired setting, then press ENTER.
BAUD defines the number of data bits
transferred per second. The Baud parameter must
be set to match the baud rate of the connected
device.
Note: If given a choice, use the highest possible
value. Transmission distances greater than
50 ft. (25 ft. for 19200 baud) may require
a modem or a lower baud rate selection.
PARITY identifies an extra bit at the end of a
message that checks for problems in the data
transmission. The Parity parameter must be set to
match the value required by the connected device.
BITS must be set to match the value required by
the connected device.
STOP BITS represent the space between
characters as they are sent during a transmission.
The Stop Bits parameter must be set to match the
value required by the connected device.
3-34
ECHO
Set each of the primary communication parameters as
required for your application.
•
•
PROG
Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
34700D.DOC
SERIAL TOOL
F1 SAVE
PROG
ECHO
Baud:
< 9600 >
Parity:
<NONE>
Bits:
<8>
Stop Bits:<1>
F2 DEFAULTS
TMC470 Controller Operation
Serial2 Communication Properties (continued)
The second page (PROG) allows you to define which characters to extract from the transmitted data string and how to
process the data during marker operations. See Programmable Protocol Examples for illustrations on using these
features.
NOTE
The host message may contain ASCII characters that define the Start Character,
the Terminator, and the Ignore Character within the transmitted data string. To
identify these ASCII characters, you must specify their decimal equivalents when
setting up the following parameters. Refer to Appendix B: ASCII Character Cross
Reference to view decimal and hexadecimal equivalents of ASCII characters.
Start Char identifies the decimal equivalent of the
ASCII character in the host message where the
marking system should begin to count character
positions. (e.g., decimal 0 = no starting character or
decimal 2 = ASCII Start of Text)
Terminator identifies the decimal equivalent of the
ASCII character in the host message that signals the
end of the string. The terminator is usually a carriage
return. (e.g., decimal 13 = ASCII Carriage Return)
HOST 2:
COMM
PROG
Start Char:[0 ]
Position :[1 ]
Ignore
:[10 ]
F1 SAVE
ECHO
Terminator:[13 ]
Length
:[0 ]
Msg Type :[V ]
F2 DEFAULTS
Position identifies the physical position in the data
string where the marking system will begin to extract
data from the host message.
Length identifies the number of characters to extract from the host message. The system used the Position
parameter and Length parameter determine which characters to extract from the host message. Note: This
parameter is optional when a Terminator (see above) is used in the host message.
Ignore identifies the decimal equivalent of the ASCII character in the host message that the marking system
should ignore. (e.g., decimal 10 = ASCII Line Feed)
Msg Type defines how the marking system will use the data it extracts from the host message. Valid message
types are: P, V, 1, Q, and 0 (zero).
P
loads a specific pattern using the pattern name extracted from the host message.
V
updates the first variable text field of the pattern with data extracted from the host message.
1 overwrites the content of the first text field in the pattern with data extracted from the host message.
Note that if the field contains message flags, the flags will overwritten (deleted), not updated.
Q
updates the text in the first query text buffer with data extracted from the host message.
0 (zero) indicates that the host message will provide the message type, field number (if applicable), and data.
This option allows more flexibility by delegating the message type selection to the host on a message-bymessage basis. The host message must use the format Tnn<string> where:
T
nn
= P, V, 1, or Q to indicate the message type.
= two-digit number to indicate the field number (01 through 99) or
query text buffer (01 through 20) where the data will be placed.
Note: Do not specify a number with Message Type P.
<string> = pattern name (Message Type P) or field data (Message Types V, 1, or Q), as applicable.
Set each of the programmable protocol parameters as required for your application.
•
•
Press TAB to select the parameter.
Type the appropriate value in the text box.
Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
34700D.DOC
3-35
TMC470 Controller Operation
Serial2 Communication Properties (continued)
The third page (ECHO) allows you to enable and configure the Echo feature. The Echo feature allows you to send
(echo) a message string (from the controller COMM 2 port) after the pattern is printed. The Echo feature constructs the
transmitted (echoed) message using ASCII characters and special parse flags to extract data from the pattern.
Verify the cursor is on the Echo parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
HOST:
Press ENTER to toggle the Echo option ON or OFF.
<
> indicates Echo is disabled.
< * > indicates Echo is enabled.
COMM
ECHO
Echo :
String:
<
[
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
>
]
Press TAB to select the String parameter.
The String parameter defines the data you wish to
echo to the COMM 2 port.
HOST:
COMM
The String text box can hold up to 50 characters
(data characters, format characters, literals, and
parse flags). However, the echoed string can
contain up to 100 characters after formatting and
text substitution (including control characters like
ASCII carriage returns and line feeds).
Echo :
String:
<
[
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
PROG
ECHO
>
]
Type the desired echo string in the text box.
See examples, below.
•
Use parse flag %#Q to echo a specific field in the pattern,
where # represents the field number 01 through 999.
•
Use parse flag %###C to echo a single ASCII character,
where ### is the decimal equivalent of the ASCII character.
Refer to Appendix B: ASCII Character Cross Reference for details.
•
•
Use the switch \r (or \R) to echo an ASCII carriage return.
Use the switch \n (or \N) to echo an ASCII carriage return and an ASCII line feed.
Examples: Suppose the pattern printed field 01, field 02, and field 03 as:
If the String parameter is defined as:
If the String parameter is defined as:
247-14:06
TELESIS
]
DATA=SN:2008;247-14:06<CR><LF>
[DATA=%2Q;%3Q%\R
The data echoed out of the COMM 2 port would be:
To SAVE the Serial2 Properties settings, press F1 (SAVE).
To RESET all Serial2 Properties settings to their default settings:
Press F2 (DEFAULTS)
Press F1 (SAVE)
34700D.DOC
]
DATA=247-14:06; TELESIS<CR>
•
•
SN:2008
[DATA=%1Q;%2Q%13C%10C
The data echoed out of the COMM 2 port would be:
3-36
PROG
TMC470 Controller Operation
3.12 ETHERNET/MERLIN COMMUNICATION PROPERTIES
The Ethernet communication parameters allow you to configure the TMC470 Ethernet port for connecting the controller
to a remote device or application over a TCP/IP network. Optionally, this may include connecting to the Telesis
Merlin®III Visual Design Software, either over the network or directly to the computer running the Merlin III software.
NOTICE
Ensure the TMC470 Controller is properly connected to the host or the network, as applicable.
Refer to the TMC470 Installation/Maintenance Manual (see Ethernet/Merlin Connection) for critical details.
Obtain the IP Address of the computer running Merlin III
•
•
Turn the TMC470 on.
Turn the PC on and allow Windows® Explorer to complete its startup.
If the TMC470 is connected directly to the computer, this make take a few extra minutes while Windows®
prepares the network connections.
•
•
•
•
Click the Start icon in the lower left corner of the Explorer window.
•
At the command prompt, type EXIT and press ENTER.
Select All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt.
At the command prompt, type IPCONFIG and press ENTER.
Record the following information:
IP Address:
____________________ (e.g., 010.001.0.140 or 169.254.211.247)
Subnet Mask:
____________________ (e.g., 255.255.0.0)
From the Supervisor Main Screen, press F5 (SETUP).
The system will display the Setup Menu.
Press F8 to toggle the PROPERTIES selection to
ETHERNET.
Press F4 (PROPERTIES) to access the Net Screen.
The Net parameters are displayed on two pages
(IP and Protocol).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
F1:LEVEL
F6:<SUPERVISOR>
F2:QUERY TEXT
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
]
F7:<UNITS>
F3:DESIGN
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
F4:PROPERTIES
F8:<ETHERNET>
003:[
]
F5:MANAGEMENT
004:[
]
005:[
]
The first page (IP) provides parameters to identify
the Controller on the TCP/IP network.
Verify the cursor is on the Local IP parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
NET:
The Local IP parameter defines the Internet Protocol
(IP) address of the TMC470 Controller.
STOP !
If you are connecting the TMC470 to a network hub
or a network switch, you must obtain a new Local IP
Address for the TMC470 Controller. Contact your
LAN administrator for details before continuing.
IP
PROT
Local IP: [010.000.000.031 ]
Remote IP: [010.000.000.035 ]
Subnet
: [255.000.000.000 ]
Port
: [2000 ]
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
Do one of the following, as applicable
•
Network Connection to Computer
In the Local IP text box, enter the IP Address obtained from your LAN administrator.
or
•
Direct Connection to Computer
Locate the IP Address of the computer running Merlin III (recorded above). ..... e.g., 169.254.211.247
Add 1 to the last group of numbers in the IP Address. .................................... e.g., 169.254.211.247+1
Enter the resulting number into the Local IP text box.................................... e.g., 169.254.211.248
34700D.DOC
3-37
TMC470 Controller Operation
Ethernet/Merlin Communication Properties (continued)
Press TAB to select the Remote IP parameter.
The Remote IP parameter defines the IP address where
the TMC470 Controller will attempt to connect.
Enter the IP Address that you recorded above into the
Remote IP text box.
For example: 010.001.0.140 or 169.254.211.247
Note: You may need to use ".000" instead of ".0".
Enter the Subnet Mask that you recorded above into
the Subnet text box (e.g., 255.255.000.000).
For example: 255.255.000.000
Note: You may need to use ".000" instead of ".0".
IP
PROT
Local IP: [010.000.000.031 ]
Remote IP: [010.000.000.035 ]
Subnet
: [255.000.000.000 ]
Port
: [2000 ]
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
NET:
PROT
Press TAB to select the Subnet parameter.
The Subnet parameter defines the subnet mask
address of the network.
NET:
IP
Local IP: [010.000.000.031 ]
Remote IP: [010.000.000.035 ]
Subnet
: [255.000.000.000 ]
Port
: [2000 ]
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
NET:
PROT
Make note of the Port parameter value: __________.
If connecting to Merlin, this number must match the
Port number defined in Merlin III under Controller
Communications. Refer to the Merlin III Operating
Instructions (available via the Merlin Help menu
under Help Topics).
The Port parameter identifies the host socket
assigned to the marking system. This number must
be greater than or equal to 2000.
IP
Local IP: [010.000.000.031 ]
Remote IP: [010.000.000.035 ]
Subnet
: [255.000.000.000 ]
Port
: [2000 ]
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
Note: If more than one marking system is installed
in a network configuration, each system must use a
separate and unique port number.
Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
The second page (PROT) provides parameters to select and
configure the protocol to be used with the TCP/IP network.
Verify the cursor is on the Protocol parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
The Protocol parameter identifies how the
controller will pass information to and from other
devices on the network.
NET:
IP
PROT
Protocol:
Type
:
< Bidirectional >
< Client >
Bidirectional protocol must be selected to connect
to the Merlin III software.
Extended protocol provides two-way communication
with error checking. It is designed to provide secure
communications with an intelligent host device using
pre-defined message formats, response formats, and
message types. It also provides hand-shaking to
detect faults in the transmitted messages, effectively
verifying the data is properly received. Refer to
Extended Protocol Parameters for details.
3-38
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key until the desired protocol is displayed.
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
Ethernet/Merlin Communication Properties (continued)
Press TAB to select the Type parameter.
The Type parameter identifies the role of the
TMC470 Controller on the network.
NET:
Client must be selected to connect to the Merlin III
software. This selection indicates the TMC470 will
be used as a client on the network and will attempt
to connect to the host at the Remote IP Address on
the specified port (socket).
Protocol:
Type
:
Server indicates the TMC470 will be used as a
server and will be listening for clients on the
network attempting to connect to its Local IP
address.
IP
F1 SAVE
PROT
< Bidirectional >
< Client >
F2 DEFAULTS
Disabled indicates the controller is not trying to
connect to a server on the network and is not listening for a client on the network to connect.
Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key until the desired format is displayed.
To SAVE the Ethernet Properties settings, press F1 (SAVE).
To RESET all Ethernet Properties settings to their default settings:
• Press F2 (DEFAULTS)
• Press F1 (SAVE)
Verify Connection and Control
Ensure the PC is ON but is not yet running the Merlin III software.
Verify the lower right corner of the Merlin III main screen displays Connected in the System Status bar.
Ensure the TMC470 is ON.
Start the Merlin III software on the PC.
After a short delay, the system should display a message indicating it is connecting.
Verify the second line on the TMC470 display begins with M3.
If the Merlin III software shows Connected and the TMC470 displays M3, connection is complete.
For operational information while Merlin III is connected to the TMC470 controller:
• Refer to Using the Merlin III Interface (Chapter 1) for an overview of operational issues.
• Refer to the Merlin III Operating Instructions (available via the Merlin Help menu under Help Topics).
If the Merlin III software failed to connect to the TMC470 Controller:
Verify physical connections are correct.
• Direct connection to the PC requires a crossover adapter or a crossover cable.
• Network connection to the PC via a network hub or network switch does not use a crossover cable or adapter.
Verify the TMC470 Net Port parameter and the Merlin III/TMC470 Port Number parameter agree.
These values must be identical.
• Refer to the procedures above to check the Net Port parameter value.
• Refer to the Merlin III Operating Instructions (available via the Merlin Help menu under Help Topics).
See Controller Communications parameters.
Verify Local IP Address is correct. (either as supplied or as assigned).
• For direct connection to the PC, use the IP Address of the PC running Merlin +1 (e.g., 169.254.211.247+1).
• For network connections to the PC, use the IP Address provided by your LAN administrator.
Verify the Remote IP Address is correct. Use the IP Address of the PC running the Merlin III software.
Verify the Subnet parameter is correct. Use the Subnet Mask of the PC running the Merlin III software.
Verify Bidirectional Protocol and Client are selected in the TMC470 Ethernet/Merlin Communication parameters.
34700D.DOC
3-39
TMC470 Controller Operation
3.13 CLOCK AND CALENDAR PROPERTIES
Although the time and date parameters are set at the factory, you can adjust the system clock and calendar, as
required. The system uses the Clock parameters as source data when it inserts real-time information into the pattern.
When the system encounters a time or date flag in the pattern, it uses its internal clock/calendar to insert the
appropriate time and date into the text string.
From the Supervisor Main Screen, press F5 (SETUP).
The system will display the Setup Menu.
Press F8 to toggle the PROPERTIES selection to
CLOCK.
Press F4 (PROPERTIES) to access the Clock Screen.
The Clock parameters are displayed on two
separate pages (Date and Time).
Verify the cursor is on the Month parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
CLOCK:
Type the current month in the text box.
Press TAB to select the Date parameter and enter
the current day of the month.
Press TAB to select the Year parameter and enter
the current year.
Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
Verify the cursor is on the Hours parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
Note: The Hours parameter is based on a 24-hour
clock (e.g., 00=midnight, 01=1 a.m.,
12=noon, 13=1 p.m., etc.).
DATE
TIME
Month:
Day:
Year:
[6 ]
[20]
[2008]
F1 SAVE
Type the current hour of the day in the text box.
Press TAB to select the Minutes parameter and
enter the current minutes.
Press TAB to select the Seconds parameter and
enter the current seconds.
Press F1 (SAVE) to save the clock and calendar settings.
3-40
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
F1:LEVEL
F6:<SUPERVISOR>
F2:QUERY TEXT
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
]
F3:DESIGN
F7:<UNITS>
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
F4:PROPERTIES
F8:<CLOCK
>
003:[
]
F5:MANAGEMENT
004:[
]
005:[
]
CLOCK:
TIME
Hours:
[13]
Minutes: [49]
Seconds: [40]
F1 SAVE
34700D.DOC
DATE
TMC470 Controller Operation
3.14 UNITS OF MEASURE
Key Point…
The units of measurement used by the system may be set by Designer-level and Supervisor-level personnel.
The Units parameter allows you to select which units of measure (English or Metric) the system uses to define location
coordinates, size, distance, and air pressure.
If you prefer, you can change the units to either English or Metric as follows.
From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen, press
F5 (SETUP).
The system will display the Setup Menu.
Press F7 to toggle the DESIGN selection to UNITS.
Press F3 (DESIGN) to display the Marker Units Screen.
Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key to select the
desired units, then press ENTER.
ENGLISH configures the system to use inches and
pounds per square inch (psi).
METRIC configures the system to use millimeters
and bars.
Press F1 (SAVE) to save the units selection.
34700D.DOC
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
F1:LEVEL
F6:<SUPERVISOR>
F2:QUERY TEXT
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
]
F3:DESIGN
F7:<UNITS>
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
F4:PROPERTIES
F8:<MARKER >
003:[
]
F5:MANAGEMENT
004:[
]
005:[
]
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
MARKER UNITS
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
Units: English:
Metric:
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
003:[
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
004:[
005:[
]
]
]
]
]
3-41
TMC470 Controller Operation
3.15 ENABLE / DISABLE IMPACT PIN
Key Point…
Both Designer-level and Supervisor-level personnel may enable and disable the marking pin for the system.
The impact pin must be enabled to print a pattern. If disabled, the marker will not fire the pin.
You can disable the pin to prevent the marker from being used or to test print a pattern without actually marking.
To disable (or re-enable) the impact pin:
From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen, press
F4 (MARKER).
The system will display the Marker Menu.
Press F7 to toggle the PIN selection to the desired mode.
ENABLED allows the pin to be fired.
The pin must be enabled to a print pattern.
DISABLED prevents the pin from being fired.
The system may be used to test a pattern and move
through the required motions, but the system will
not print while the pin is disabled.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline–
:002
F1:ABOUTPattern:SAMPLE_02
F2:PIN
F7:<ENABLED >
*001:[TEXT:
User Text:
F8:<JOG >
F3:MAINT
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
003:[
004:[
005:[
]
]
]
]
]
Press F2 (PIN) to activate the selected pin mode.
Key Point…
Initiating a print cycle with the pin disabled will update the serial number parameter values. If you wish to test
print the pattern without changing the parameter values, use the Dry Run feature instead. Refer to Chapter 1
for details.
3-42
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
3.16 Z-AXIS PROPERTIES
If your system uses an optional Z-axis, it must be enabled and configured before it can be used. Refer to the following
sections for details on setting up the Z-axis properties.
3.16.1 Overview
The Z-axis features work in conjunction with the Telesis Z-axis tool post. The tool post is a mounting fixture for the
marking head that includes an electromechanical carriage to position the marker on the Z-axis. Using the system
software, the operator can interactively move the marker along the axis, or the system can be programmed to move the
marker as part of the pattern print cycle.
Two factors control the vertical travel limits of the carriage on the tool post.
Upper Travel Limit. An adjustable limit switch mounted on the tool post determines the upper travel limit. This
location is the Home position for the Z-axis.
Lower Travel Limit. The lower travel limit is controlled by a parameter setting in the software: the Zero Offset.
Some things to keep in mind when using the Z-axis tool post..
•
Never manually push or pull the carriage to reposition it on the tool post. Use the Jog feature or the hand
crank (if equipped) to reposition the carriage on the tool post.
•
If your tool post is equipped with a hand crank, never use the crank to position the carriage while power is
applied to the system. This will result in a loss of position for the system software.
•
Always use the Jog feature to move the carriage when power is applied, or remove power before using the
hand crank.
The following procedures assume your marking head has been installed on the Telesis Z-axis tool post and that all related
equipment has been properly installed and connected. Refer to the Auxiliary Axis Installation Supplement for details.
3.16.2 Enable / Disable the Z-axis
The Z-axis must be enabled and configured before it can be used. If you disable the axis, none of the Z-axis features
will be displayed or available for use.
From the Supervisor Main Screen, press F5 (SETUP).
The system will display the Setup Menu.
Press F8 to toggle the PROPERTIES selection to Z.
Press F4 (PROPERTIES) to access the Z-axis Screen.
Verify the cursor is on the Enabled parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
F1:LEVEL
F6:<SUPERVISOR>
F2:QUERY TEXT
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
]
F3:DESIGN
F7:<UNITS>
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
F4:PROPERTIES
F8:<Z
>
003:[
]
F5:MANAGEMENT
004:[
]
005:[
]
Z:
Press ENTER to toggle the setting ON or OFF.
GENERAL
Enabled:
Zero Offset: [
Speed Rate:
<
indicates the Z-axis is disabled.
⌧ indicates the Z-axis is enabled.
F1 SAVE
0.00]
>:100%
F2 DEFAULTS
Press F1 (SAVE) to store the parameter settings.
If the Z-axis needs to be configured, proceed to Adjust the Limit Switch and Define the Zero Offset.
34700D.DOC
3-43
TMC470 Controller Operation
3.16.3 Adjust the Limit Switch
The limit switch determines the Home position for the Z-axis. This feature allows you to redefine the Home position
closer to the part being marked. Doing so will reduce the amount of travel when the marker is placed online or is reset.
Key Point…
Although the switch location is adjustable, its position should not need to be changed once it is established for
your particular application.
Each time you change the location of the upper limit switch, you must redefine the zero offset.
Procedures for defining the Zero Offset parameter are listed in the following section.
Typical Z-axis Tool Post Mounting
Ensure the Z-axis is enabled (see procedure, above).
Press the JOG key
Press ESC to return to the Main Screen.
Place the machine online.
and jog the Z-axis until the carriage is lower than the desired location of the limit switch.
Place the machine offline.
Loosen the set screw in the limit switch housing to allow the switch to move freely.
CAUTION
Never position the limit switch below the level of the carriage.
Damage to the limit switch and carriage will result if so positioned.
3-44
Slide the limit switch to the desired location.
Tighten the set screw to secure the limit switch in the new position.
Proceed to Defining the Zero Offset to establish the Z-axis reference plane.
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
3.16.4 Define the Zero Offset
The zero offset is the distance from the Z-axis Home position (i.e., upper travel limit). It represents the lowest point
the carriage will be allowed to travel downward from the upper limit switch. More importantly, it establishes the
baseline reference plane (0.0) for the Z-axis. Once this location is defined, all Z-axis coordinates will be represented as
positive values upward from 0.0.
Defining the Z-axis Home position close to the part to be marked will minimize the required vertical movement. This will
help to reduce the marking cycle time. However, if you set the lower limit too low, the marker may “bottom out” and
will not have enough room for the pin to properly fire. You should consider the desired pin stroke before establishing
the zero offset. Refer to the marker-specific Operation Supplement for details.
Key Point…
Each time you change the location of the upper limit switch, you must redefine the zero offset.
Defining the Zero Offset
Refer to the procedures on the following page to set the zero offset parameter and define the Z-axis lower limit.
34700D.DOC
3-45
TMC470 Controller Operation
Define the Zero Offset (continued)
Ensure the limit switch location is established and secure before proceeding (see procedure, above).
From the Supervisor Main Screen, press F5 (SETUP).
Place the machine online.
The system will display the Setup Menu.
Press F8 to toggle the PROPERTIES selection to Z.
Press F4 (PROPERTIES) to access the Z-axis Screen.
Press TAB to select the Zero Offset parameter.
Z:
Specify the Zero Offset distance.
Do one of the following:
•
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
F1:LEVEL
F6:<SUPERVISOR>
F2:QUERY TEXT
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
]
F7:<UNITS>
F3:DESIGN
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
F4:PROPERTIES
F8:<Z
>
003:[
]
F5:MANAGEMENT
004:[
]
005:[
]
If you know the exact distance, type the value
(as a negative number) in the text box.
Note: You must enter a negative value to identify
the distance down from the upper limit switch.
GENERAL
Enabled:
Zero Offset: [
Speed Rate:
<
F1 SAVE
0.00]
>:100%
F2 DEFAULTS
or
•
If you do not know the exact distance, follow these
steps the allow the system to calculate it.
Place a sheet of paper between the impact pin and the marking surface.
Press the JOG key
.
Note: You may want to set the resolution to Coarse until the carriage is close to the desired position,
then reduce the resolution to Fine or Single to precisely define the location.
Press the ARROW_DOWN key to jog the carriage to the desired position.
As you lower the marker, move the paper around under the impact pin.
When you feel resistance between the paper and the impact pin, stop jogging the marker.
Press F1 (ACCEPT).
The system will exit the Jog Screen and redisplay the Z-axis Screen.
The system will automatically enter the calculated zero offset in the text box (displayed as a negative value
to represent the distance down from the upper limit switch).
Press F1 (SAVE) to save the parameters settings.
Press ESC to return to the Main Screen.
Place the machine offline, then online.
This allows the system to calibrate the Z-axis reference plane (0.0).
3-46
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
3.16.5 Adjust the Z-axis Speed
The Z-axis Speed parameter controls the travel rate along the vertical axis. This parameter allows you to set the
default speed rate that will be used whenever a new pattern is created. Note that changing the system default speed
rate will not affect the settings already defined for existing patterns.
Key Point…
A pattern-specific speed rate may be set and saved with the pattern.
The pattern-specific value stored with each pattern will override the default setting defined for the system.
From the Supervisor Main Screen, press F5 (SETUP).
The system will display the Setup Menu.
Press F8 to toggle the PROPERTIES selection to Z.
Press F4 (PROPERTIES) to access the Z-axis Screen.
Press TAB to select the Speed Rate parameter.
Press ENTER to increase the Z-axis speed rate.
Press CTRL + ENTER to decrease the Z-axis speed rate.
The pointer indicates the selected speed rate
from 10% to 100%.
Press F1 (ACCEPT) to save the default speed setting.
34700D.DOC
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
F1:LEVEL
F6:<SUPERVISOR>
F2:QUERY TEXT
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
]
F7:<UNITS>
F3:DESIGN
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
F4:PROPERTIES
F8:<Z
>
003:[
]
F5:MANAGEMENT
004:[
]
005:[
]
Z:
GENERAL
Enabled:
Zero Offset: [
Speed Rate:
<
F1 SAVE
0.00]
>:100%
F2 DEFAULTS
3-47
TMC470 Controller Operation
3.17 THETA-AXIS PROPERTIES
If your system uses an optional Theta-axis, it must be enabled and configured before it can be used. Refer to the
following sections for details on setting up the Theta-axis properties.
3.17.1 Overview
The Theta-axis, named for the eighth letter of the Greek alphabet, is used in geometry to represent angular
measurement. The Theta-axis features work in conjunction with the Telesis Rotary Drive Fixture to mark cylindrical
parts or to mark multiple flats on square or hexagonal parts.
The drive fixture is an electromechanical chuck that holds and rotates the part being marked. The jaws of the chuck
may be adjusted to accommodate parts of various diameters. Refer to the Auxiliary Axis Installation Supplement for
information on installing and adjusting the jaws in the drive fixture chuck.
These procedures assume the Telesis Rotary Drive Fixture and all related equipment has been properly installed and
connected. Refer to the Auxiliary Axis Installation Supplement for details.
3.17.2 Enable / Disable the Theta-axis
The Theta-axis must be enabled and configured before it can be used. If you disable the axis, none of the Theta-axis
features will be displayed or available for use.
From the Supervisor Main Screen, press F5 (SETUP).
The system will display the Setup Menu.
Press F8 to toggle the PROPERTIES selection to THETA.
Press F4 (PROPERTIES) to access the Theta-axis
Screen.
Verify the cursor is on the Enabled parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
F1:LEVEL
F6:<SUPERVISOR>
F2:QUERY TEXT
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
]
F3:DESIGN
F7:<UNITS>
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
F4:PROPERTIES
F8:<THETA
>
003:[
]
F5:MANAGEMENT
004:[
]
005:[
]
THETA:
Press ENTER to toggle the setting ON or OFF.
Enabled:
Type: One 5
Two 3
Mounting Angle: [ 0.00 ]°
Part Diameter:
[ 1.00 ]in
Speed Rate:
<
>:100%
indicates the Theta-axis is disabled.
⌧ indicates the Theta-axis is enabled.
F1 SAVE
Press TAB to select the Type parameter.
THETA:
The Type parameter identifies the rotary drive
fixture model installed with your system.
Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key to select the
desired device, then press ENTER.
ONE 5
GENERAL
indicates the larger RD5 unit (5-in. chuck).
TWO 3 indicates the smaller RD3 unit (3-in. chuck).
F2 DEFAULTS
GENERAL
Enabled:
Type: One 5
Two 3
Mounting Angle: [ 0.00 ]°
Part Diameter:
[ 1.00 ]in
Speed Rate:
<
>:100%
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
Press F1 (SAVE) to store the parameter settings.
If the Theta-axis needs to be configured, proceed to Define the Part Diameter and Define the Mounting Angle.
3-48
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
3.17.3 Define the Part Diameter
The part diameter setting defines the size (diameter) of the part being marked. The system uses the part diameter to
determine the circumference of the part and to calculate the amount of rotation required for marking. The part
diameter is a factor when marking in Perpendicular Mode and, for text fields, when marking in Character Index Mode.
This parameter allows you to set the default diameter setting that will be used whenever a new pattern is created. Note
that changing the system default part diameter will not affect the settings already defined for existing patterns.
Key Point…
A pattern-specific part diameter may be set and saved with the pattern.
The pattern-specific value stored with each pattern will override the default setting defined for the system.
From the Supervisor Main Screen, press F5 (SETUP).
The system will display the Setup Menu.
Press F8 to toggle the PROPERTIES selection to THETA.
Press F4 (PROPERTIES) to access the Theta-axis
Screen.
Press TAB to select the Part Diameter parameter.
In the Part Diameter box, type the diameter of the
part to be marked.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
F1:LEVEL
F6:<SUPERVISOR>
F2:QUERY TEXT
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
]
F3:DESIGN
F7:<UNITS>
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
F4:PROPERTIES
F8:<THETA
>
003:[
]
F5:MANAGEMENT
004:[
]
005:[
]
THETA:
GENERAL
Note: If the part is inconsistent in diameter, use the
measurement nearest the area to be marked.
Enabled:
Type: One 5
Two 3
Mounting Angle: [ 0.00 ]°
Part Diameter:
[ 1.00 ]in
Speed Rate:
<
>:100%
Press F1 (SAVE) to store the parameter settings.
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
3.17.4 Define the Theta-axis Speed
The Speed Rate setting controls the rotational rate of the rotary drive fixture. This parameter allows you to set the
default speed rate that will be used whenever a new pattern is created. Note that changing the system default speed
rate will not affect the settings already defined for existing patterns.
Key Point…
A pattern-specific speed rate may be set and saved with the pattern.
The pattern-specific value stored with each pattern will override the default setting defined for the system.
From the Supervisor Main Screen, press F5 (SETUP).
The system will display the Setup Menu.
Press F8 to toggle the PROPERTIES selection to THETA.
Press F4 (PROPERTIES) to access the Theta-axis
Screen.
Press ENTER to increase the speed rate.
Press CTRL + ENTER to decrease the speed rate.
THETA:
GENERAL
Enabled:
Type: One 5
Two 3
Mounting Angle: [ 0.00 ]°
Part Diameter:
[ 1.00 ]in
Speed Rate:
<
>:100%
The pointer indicates the selected speed rate
from 10% to 100%.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
F1:LEVEL
F6:<SUPERVISOR>
F2:QUERY TEXT
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
]
F3:DESIGN
F7:<UNITS>
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
F4:PROPERTIES
F8:<THETA
>
003:[
]
F5:MANAGEMENT
004:[
]
005:[
]
Press F1 (SAVE) to store the parameter settings.
F1 SAVE
34700D.DOC
F2 DEFAULTS
3-49
TMC470 Controller Operation
3.17.5 Define the Mounting Angle
The physical installation of the rotary drive fixture determines its mounting angle. Typically, the fixture is mounted with
the rotational axis parallel to the marking window X-axis (0° mounting angle). Optionally, the fixture may be mounted
at a different angle to provide better positioning of the part within the window. If so mounted, the Theta-axis mounting
angle parameter can be configured to recognize the actual mounting angle.
This parameter allows you to set the default mounting angle that will be used whenever a new pattern is created. Note
that changing the system default mounting angle will not affect the settings already defined for existing patterns.
Key Point…
A pattern-specific mounting angle may be set and saved with the pattern.
The pattern-specific value stored with each pattern will override the default setting defined for the system.
NOTICE
Do not perform this procedure if the mounting angle is parallel to the marking window X-axis.
Place the marker online.
From the Supervisor Main Screen, press F5 (SETUP).
The system will display the Setup Menu.
Press F8 to toggle the PROPERTIES selection to THETA.
Press F4 (PROPERTIES) to access the Theta-axis
Screen.
Press TAB to select the Mounting Angle parameter.
Do one of the following:
•
If you know the exact mounting angle, type the
value (in degrees) in the text box. See illustration.
or
•
3-50
THETA:
Secure a sample part to be marked in the
jaws of rotary drive fixture.
34700D.DOC
GENERAL
Enabled:
Type: One 5
Two 3
Mounting Angle: [ 0.00 ]°
Part Diameter:
[ 1.00 ]in
Speed Rate:
<
>:100%
F1 SAVE
If you do not know the exact mounting angle,
follow these steps to calculate it.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
F1:LEVEL
F6:<SUPERVISOR>
F2:QUERY TEXT
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
]
F7:<UNITS>
F3:DESIGN
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
F4:PROPERTIES
F8:<THETA
>
003:[
]
F5:MANAGEMENT
004:[
]
005:[
]
F2 DEFAULTS
TMC470 Controller Operation
Define the Mounting Angle (continued)
Press the JOG key
.
We’ll use the Jog features to move the
marker along the length of the part
and identify two X/Y locations (Point A
and Point B). See illustration.
Define Point A:
1. Jog the marker to position the impact
pin directly over the centerline of the
part, close to the chuck.
See illustration.
2. Record the X-coordinate as X1.
3. Record the Y-coordinate as Y1.
Define Point B:
1. Jog the marker to position the impact
pin directly over the centerline of the
part, furthest from the chuck.
See illustration.
2. Record the X-coordinate as X2.
3. Record the Y-coordinate as Y2.
Press ESC to return to the Theta-axis Screen.
Substitute the X/Y coordinate values (recorded above) into the following equation:
tan
= (Y2 - Y1) ÷ (X2 - X1)
The resulting value represents the tangent of the Mounting Angle.
Using a trigonometric table or a scientific calculator, look up the exact angular measurement.
This is the calculated mounting angle.
Enter the angle in the Mounting Angle text box.
Press F1 (SAVE) to store the settings.
34700D.DOC
3-51
TMC470 Controller Operation
3.18 RESET SYSTEM PARAMETERS
The Manager Screen allows you to reset all system parameters to their default values.
CAUTION
The following procedure will reset the system parameters to their factory–default settings.
All parameters that have been specifically configured for your system will be lost and unrecoverable.
NOTICE
The system must be placed in Supervisor mode to access the Manager Screen.
From the Supervisor Main Screen, press F5 (SETUP).
The system will display the Setup menu.
From the Setup menu, press F5 (MANAGEMENT).
The system will display the Manager Screen.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
F1:LEVEL
F6:<SUPERVISOR>
F2:QUERY TEXT
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
]
F3:DESIGN
F7:<UNITS>
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
F4:PROPERTIES
F8:<MARKER>
003:[
]
F5:MANAGEMENT
004:[
]
005:[
]
MANAGER(0053248) Total:012 Page:01 of 03
F1-[QUERY
]:08/20/09;13:53:21
F2-[HOST
]:08/20/09;15:53:21
F3-[HOST2
]:08/20/09;13:53:21
F4-[HOST3
]:08/20/09;13:53:21
F5-[NET
]:08/20/09;13:53:21
F6 CLEAN F7 <PARAMS>
F8 SIZE
Press F7 until the PARAMS selection is displayed.
MANAGER(0053248) Total:012 Page:01 of 03
Press F6 (CLEAN).
The system will prompt you to confirm your command.
3-52
Do one of the following:
F1-[QUERY
]:08/20/09;13:53:21
F2-[HOST
]:08/20/09;15:53:21
F3-[HOST2
]:08/20/09;13:53:21
F4-[HOST3
]:08/20/09;13:53:21
F5-[NET
]:08/20/09;13:53:21
F6 CLEAN F7 <PARAMS>
F8 SIZE
MANAGER(0053248) Total:012 Page:01 of 03
•
Press F1 (YES) to restore the factory default settings.
or
•
Press F2 (CANCEL) to withdraw the request.
Press ESC to return to the Supervisor Main Screen.
34700D.DOC
F1-[QUERY
]:08/20/09;13:53:21
Delete parameters
and load defaults?
F2-[HOST
]:08/20/09;15:53:21
F3-[HOST2
]:08/20/09;13:53:21
F1-Yes
F2-No
F4-[HOST3
]:08/20/09;13:53:21
F5-[NET
]:08/20/09;13:53:21
F6 CLEAN F7 <PARAMS>
F8 SIZE
TMC470 Controller Operation
3.19 BACKUP & RESTORE PATTERNS, FONTS, PARAMETERS
Using the TMC470 USB port, the system allows you to backup pattern, block, font, and parameter files from controller
flash memory to a USB drive. You may also restore the files from the USB drive to controller flash memory.
Key Points…
There is no directory structure in controller flash memory.
You must identify the target location on the USB drive first, before copying files from controller flash memory
You may copy (backup) pattern, block, font, and parameter files from controller flash memory to the USB drive.
You may copy (restore) pattern, block, font, and parameter files from the USB drive to controller flash memory.
You may create new directories on the USB drive.
You may delete directories, pattern files, block files, font files, and parameter files from the USB drive.
You may delete only pattern files, block files, and font files from controller flash memory.
You cannot delete parameter files from controller flash memory.
Perform the following to access the USB Backup/Restore features.
Connect the USB drive to the USB port on the back panel of the TMC470 Controller.
Note: A compatible USB drive must be connected in order to display and access the USB Backup features.
Otherwise, the system will display an error message indicating the “Device is Not Mounted”.
From the Supervisor Main Screen, press F4 (MARKER).
The system will display the Marker Menu.
Press F4 (USB BACKUP) to access the Backup Screen.
The Backup screen can display either the directories and
files on the USB drive or files in controller flash memory.
Notice the indicator on the bottom line of the display
(adjacent to F7). When USB is displayed, the screen
shows directories and files on the USB drive. When
FLASH is displayed, the screen shows files in
controller flash memory.
Also notice that the screen displays only one type of
file at a time. Another indicator on the bottom line of
the display (adjacent to F6) shows which type of file
is displayed, where:
PAT = Telesis Pattern Files
BLK = Telesis Block Files
TFF = Telesis Font Files
DAT = Telesis Parameter Files
To access directories and files on the USB drive:
Press F7 until USB is displayed.
To access files in controller flash memory:
F7:<ENABLED >
F2:PIN
*001:[TEXT:
User Text:
F3:MAINT
F8:<JOG >
002:[TEXT:
Fixed
Text: ABCDE
F4:USB
BACKUP
003:[
004:[
005:[
BACKUP (3714564) Total:004 Page:01 of 01
[..
]:DIR
[MY_FONTS
]:DIR
[MY_PARAMETERS
]:DIR
[MY_PATTERNS
]:DIR
[
]:DIR
F1-ChDir F2-MkDir F3-<Single>
F4-Del
F5-Copy
F6-<PAT> F7-< USB >
F8-SIZE
Directories/Files on USB Drive
Press F7 until FLASH is displayed.
3.19.2 Choose Files to be Displayed
Files in Controller Flash Memory
The system will display only one type of file at a time.
]
]
]
]
]
BACKUP (0053248) Total:012 Page:01 of 03
[PATTERN1.PAT
]:09/30/08;08:16:05
[PATTERN2.PAT
]:09/29/08;08:41:12
[PATTERN3.PAT
]:10/03/08;14:07:33
[PATTERN4.PAT
]:10/06/08;10:15:26
[PATTERN5.PAT
]:10/03/08;16:32:17
F1F2F3-<Single>
F4-Del
F5-Copy
F6-<PAT> F7-<FLASH>
F8-DATE
3.19.1 Access Files
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline–
:002
F1:ABOUTPattern:SAMPLE_02
Press F6 until the preferred file type is displayed.
Choose: PAT, BLK, TFF, or DAT.
The backup and restore features are described in the following paragraphs.
34700D.DOC
3-53
TMC470 Controller Operation
USB Backup and Restore (continued)
3.19.3 Change Directory on USB Drive
Perform these steps to move down the directory structure.
Press F7 until USB is displayed.
Repeat as required to descend the directory tree.
Press PAGE DOWN or PAGE UP as needed to locate the directory.
If F3-SINGLE (single file mode) is displayed, press TAB to select the directory, then press ENTER (or F1-CHDIR).
If F3-BATCH (batch file mode) is displayed, press TAB until the cursor is on the directory name (not on the checkbox),
then press ENTER.
Perform these steps to move up the directory structure.
Press F7 until USB is displayed.
Repeat as required to ascend the directory tree.
If F3-SINGLE (single file mode) is displayed, press TAB to select the [.. ] directory, then press ENTER (or F1-CHDIR).
If F3-BATCH (batch file mode) is displayed, TAB until the cursor is on the [.. ] directory name (not on the checkbox),
then press ENTER.
3.19.4 Display File Size
Display the files you wish to view.
• For files on the USB drive, open the appropriate directory. See Change Directory on USB Drive for details.
• For files in controller flash memory, press F7 until FLASH is displayed.
Press F6 until PAT, BLK, TFF, or DAT is displayed, as applicable.
Press F8 (SIZE) to display the file size information.
3.19.5 Display File Timestamp
Display the files you wish to view.
• For files on the USB drive, open the appropriate directory. See Change Directory on USB Drive for details.
• For files in controller flash memory, press F7 until FLASH is displayed.
Press F6 until PAT, BLK, TFF, or DAT is displayed, as applicable.
Press F8 (DATE) to display the file timestamp information.
3.19.6 Backup a Single File
Open the target directory on the USB drive where the copied file will be saved.
See Change Directory on USB Drive for details.
Press F7 until FLASH is displayed.
Press F5 (COPY) to backup the file from controller flash memory to the USB drive.
3-54
Press F6 until PAT, BLK, TFF, or DAT is displayed, as applicable.
Press F3 until SINGLE is displayed.
Press TAB to select the file.
If necessary, press PAGE DOWN or PAGE UP to locate the file.
If the file already exists in the target directory, the system will prompt you before overwriting the file.
• Press F1 (YES) to overwrite the file.
• Press F2 (NO) to cancel the backup.
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
USB Backup and Restore (continued)
3.19.7 Backup Multiple Files
Open the target directory on the USB drive where the copied files will be saved.
See Change Directory on USB Drive for details.
Press F7 until FLASH is displayed.
Press F6 until PAT, BLK, TFF, or DAT is displayed, as applicable.
Press F3 until BATCH is displayed
Select the files to be copied.
• To select all files, press F1 (SELECT ALL).
• To select specific files:
Press TAB to move the cursor to the file.
If necessary, press PAGE DOWN or PAGE UP to locate the file.
Press ENTER to select it ⌧. (If you need to de-select it
Repeat until all desired files are selected.
, press ENTER again.)
Press F5 (COPY) to backup the selected files from controller flash memory to the USB drive.
If a file already exists in the target directory, the system will prompt you before overwriting the file.
• Press F1 (YES) to overwrite the file.
• Press F2 (NO) to cancel the backup of the file in question.
3.19.8 Restore a Single File
Open the directory where the file to be restored is saved. See Change Directory on USB Drive for details.
Press F5 (COPY) to restore the file from the USB drive to controller flash memory
Press F6 until PAT, BLK, TFF, or DAT is displayed, as applicable.
Press F3 until SINGLE is displayed.
Press TAB to select the file.
If necessary, press PAGE DOWN or PAGE UP to locate the file.
If the file already exists in controller flash memory, the system will prompt you before overwriting the file.
• Press F1 (YES) to overwrite the file.
• Press F2 (NO) to cancel restoration.
3.19.9 Restore Multiple Files
Open the directory where the files to be restored are saved. See Change Directory on USB Drive for details.
Press F6 until PAT, BLK, TFF, or DAT is displayed, as applicable.
Press F3 until BATCH is displayed.
Select the files to be copied.
• To select all files in the directory, press F1 (SELECT ALL).
• To select specific files in the directory:
Press TAB to move the cursor to the file.
If necessary, press PAGE DOWN or PAGE UP to locate the file.
Press ENTER to select it ⌧. (If you need to de-select it
Repeat until all desired files are selected.
, press ENTER again.)
Press F5 (COPY) to restore the selected files from the USB drive to controller flash memory
If a file already exists in controller flash memory, the system will prompt you before overwriting the file.
• Press F1 (YES) to overwrite the file.
• Press F2 (NO) to cancel restoration of the file in question.
34700D.DOC
3-55
TMC470 Controller Operation
USB Backup and Restore (continued)
3.19.10 Delete a Single File
Display the file you wish to delete.
• For files on the USB drive, open the appropriate directory. See Change Directory on USB Drive for details.
• For files in controller flash memory, press F7 until FLASH is displayed.
Press F6 until PAT, BLK, TFF, or DAT is displayed, as applicable.
Note: You cannot delete parameter (DAT) files from controller flash memory.
Press F3 until SINGLE is displayed
Press F4 (DEL) to delete the file
Press TAB to select the file.
If necessary, press PAGE DOWN or PAGE UP to locate the file.
At the prompt, verify your intention to delete the file.
• Press F1 (YES) to delete the file.
• Press F2 (NO) to cancel the deletion.
3.19.11 Delete Multiple Files
Display the file you wish to delete.
• For files on the USB drive, open the appropriate directory. See Change Directory on USB Drive for details.
• For files in controller flash memory, press F7 until FLASH is displayed.
Press F6 until PAT, BLK, TFF, or DAT is displayed, as applicable.
Note: You cannot delete parameter (DAT) files from controller flash memory.
Press F3 until BATCH is displayed.
Select the files to be deleted.
• To select all files, press F1 (SELECT ALL).
• To select specific files:
Press TAB to move the cursor to the file.
If necessary, press PAGE DOWN or PAGE UP to locate the file.
Press ENTER to select it ⌧. (If you need to de-select it
Repeat until all desired files are selected
, press ENTER again.)
Press F4 (DEL) to delete the selected files
At the prompt, verify your intention to delete the files.
• Press F1 (YES) to delete the files.
• Press F2 (NO) to cancel the deletion.
3.19.12 Delete a Directory on USB Drive
Note: There is no directory structure in controller flash memory. This procedure applies only to the USB drive.
Select the directory you wish to delete. See Change Directory on USB Drive for details.
Press F4 (DEL) to delete the selected directory from the USB drive
At the prompt, verify your intention to delete the directory.
• Press F1 (YES) delete the directory.
• Press F2 (NO) to cancel the deletion.
3.19.13 Create a Directory on USB Drive
Note: There is no directory structure in controller flash memory. This procedure applies only to the USB drive.
Open the directory under which the new directory will reside. See Change Directory on USB Drive for details.
Press F2 (MKDIR).
At the prompt, type the name of the new directory.
Press F1 (ACCEPT) to create the directory on the USB drive.
3.19.14 Exit the Backup/Restore Screen
After all backup and restore features are complete, press ESC to return to the Supervisor Main Screen.
3-56
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
3.20 MAINTENANCE TASKS
The following sections describe tests that check the operational performance of the marking system.
3.20.1 Test Output Signals
The Output tests allow you to check the transmission of output signals sent from the controller. Using the software, you
can set the signal states on or off, then verify the proper voltage at the appropriate connector pin to verify operation.
The output signals are transmitted through the I/O Port connector on the TMC470 back panel. Refer to the TMC470
Installation/Maintenance Manual for pin assignments and signal specifications.
WARNING
These procedures may require testing electrical circuits while
power is applied to the marking system. To avoid personal injury,
only experienced maintenance personnel should perform these
tests. Regardless of experience, caution should always be used
when working with energized electrical circuits.
From the Supervisor Main Screen, press F4 (MARKER).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline–
:002
F1:ABOUTPattern:SAMPLE_02
The system will display the Marker Menu.
Press F8 to toggle the MAINTENANCE selection to IO.
Press F3 (MAINT) to access the IO Screen.
The Output signals are displayed on the first page.
Press TAB to select the desired output signal.
Press ENTER to toggle the signal state ON or OFF.
Verify the proper voltage is present at the appropriate
connector pin.
F2:PIN
F7:<ENABLED >
*001:[TEXT:
User Text:
F3:MAINT
F8:<IO
>
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
003:[
004:[
005:[
IO:
OUTPUTS
Ready
Done
Paused
No Fault
:
:
:
:
<
<
<
<
]
]
]
]
]
INPUTS
OFF>
ON >
OFF>
ON >
Spare 1 :
Spare 2 :
< OFF>
< OFF>
ESC Exit
Refer to the TMC470 Installation/Maintenance
Manual for pin assignments and signal specifications.
Repeat the process to test the other output signals.
When finished, press ESC to exit the test screen.
34700D.DOC
3-57
TMC470 Controller Operation
3.20.2 Test Input Signals
The Input tests allow you to check the transmission of input signals received by the controller. You can activate the
signals from an external source by applying the proper voltage to the appropriate connector pins. The software will
display the signal states as on or off to verify proper operation.
Most input signals are received through the I/O Port connector on the TMC470 back panel, except as noted below. Refer
to the TMC470 Installation/Maintenance Manual for pin assignments and signal specifications.
WARNING
These procedures may require testing electrical circuits while
power is applied to the marking system. To avoid personal injury,
only experienced maintenance personnel should perform these
tests. Regardless of experience, caution should always be used
when working with energized electrical circuits.
From the Supervisor Main Screen, press F4 (MARKER).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline–
:002
F1:ABOUTPattern:SAMPLE_02
The system will display the Marker Menu.
Press F8 to toggle the MAINTENANCE selection to IO.
Press F3 (MAINT) to access the IO Screen.
Press PAGE DOWN to display the Inputs page.
F2:PIN
F7:<ENABLED >
*001:[TEXT:
User Text:
F3:MAINT
F8:<IO
>
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
003:[
004:[
005:[
This page shows the various input signals that can
be received by the controller.
Refer to the TMC470 Installation/Maintenance
Manual for pin assignments and signal specifications.
Note the following:
•
The Go and Abort signals may be received
through the I/O Port or the TTL Port.
•
The Online signal name is SEL_6. It may be
configured to remotely place the machine online
or to remotely select patterns for loading. Refer
to Startup (IO) Properties for details.
•
The Home 1 and Home 2 signals are received
through the Marker Port.
•
The Home 3 and Home 4 signals are received
through the (optional) Auxiliary Axis Port.
IO:
OUTPUTS
INPUTS
Select 0,1,2,3,4,5:
Go
:
Home 1,2,3,4:
Abort :
Spare 1,2,3:
Online:
Over Temp :
ESC Exit
Note: The Over Temp signal is an internal signal issued by the TMC470 CPU.
It cannot be tested externally and serves only as a status indicator.
CAUTION
If the Over Temp signal is ON (⌧), it indicates the controller temperature
has exceeded 65°C (149°F). This is a very serious condition. The software
will not allow any machine movement. If the Over Temp signal is ON, shut
down the controller immediately and contact Telesis Customer Support.
Activate the input signal to be tested.
Verify the proper signal state is displayed.
⌧ indicates the signal is ON.
indicates the signal is OFF.
3-58
Repeat the process to test the other input signals.
When finished, press ESC to exit the test screen.
34700D.DOC
]
]
]
]
]
TMC470 Controller Operation
3.20.3 Test Solenoids
The solenoid tests allow you pulse the solenoids to verify they are operating properly.
The solenoid signals are transmitted through the Marker Port connector on the TMC470 back panel. Refer to the
TMC470 Installation/Maintenance Manual for pin assignments and signal specifications.
WARNING
These procedures may require testing electrical circuits while
power is applied to the marking system. To avoid personal injury,
only experienced maintenance personnel should perform these
tests. Regardless of experience, caution should always be used
when working with energized electrical circuits.
From the Supervisor Main Screen, press F4 (MARKER).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline–
:002
F1:ABOUTPattern:SAMPLE_02
The system will display the Marker Menu.
Press F8 to toggle the MAINTENANCE selection to PULSE.
Press F3 (MAINT) to access the Pulse Screen.
Press TAB to select the desired solenoid (1 through 8).
Press ENTER to select (or de-select) the solenoid.
F2:PIN
F7:<ENABLED >
*001:[TEXT:
User Text:
F3:MAINT
F8:<PULSE>
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
003:[
004:[
005:[
]
]
]
]
]
PULSE
Pins 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8: ⌧
⌧ indicates the solenoid is selected.
indicates the solenoid is not selected.
Pin State: Idle
Repeat the process to select (or de-select) other
solenoids, as applicable.
Press F1 (PULSE) to activate the selected solenoid(s).
F1 PULSE
F2 STOP
The system will pulse the solenoids on and off.
The Pin State will display “Pulsing” while the test is run.
While the solenoids are pulsing, confirm they are physically operating as expected.
Press F2 (STOP) to end the pulsing test.
The system will stop pulsing the selected solenoid(s).
The Pin State will display “Idle”.
When finished, press ESC to exit the test screen.
34700D.DOC
3-59
TMC470 Controller Operation
3.20.4 Test Machine Movement
These tests allow you to check the marker motors and the machine range of travel.
WARNING
Stay clear of the marking system when jogging the machine to
avoid contact with the moving equipment.
From the Supervisor Main Screen, press F4 (MARKER).
The system will display the Marker Menu.
Press F8 to toggle the MAINTENANCE selection to JOG.
Press F3 (MAINT) to access the JOG Screen.
The first page automatically displays the Jog X/Y Screen.
This screen allows you to reposition the X/Y (lateral) axes.
If optional, auxiliary axes are installed and enabled, they
will be listed on the first line of the Jog Screen.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline–
:002
F1:ABOUTPattern:SAMPLE_02
F7:<ENABLED >
F2:PIN
*001:[TEXT:
User Text:
F3:MAINT
F8:<JOG >
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
003:[
004:[
005:[
]
]
]
]
]
Test the X/Y Axes
Select the size of movement.
•
Verify the cursor is on the Resolution parameter. If
not, press TAB to select it.
•
The Resolution parameter allows you to choose the
size of each Jog movement.
•
Press ENTER to toggle through the available
Resolution selections: Single, Fine, or Coarse.
THETA
Resolution: <COARSE >
X: [ 6.0000]in
Y: [ 6.0000]in
Arm: Alpha
Beta
F7 CW
F1 ACCEPT
F2 GOTO
F8 CCW
Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key to move the machine left or right along the X-axis.
Press the UP or DOWN ARROW key to move the machine back and forth along the Y-axis.
Press TAB to select the X-axis box.
Enter the X-axis coordinate where you wish to move the marker.
Press TAB to select the Y-axis box.
Enter the Y-axis coordinate where you wish to move the marker.
Press F2 (GOTO) to move the marker to the specified X/Y coordinate location.
(TMP6100 only) Alpha/Beta Arm Jog
Unique to the TMP6100 design, each X/Y jog
movement requires both motors in the marking head.
The Arm jog feature allows you to jog each motor
individually. The Alpha arm is the larger, upper
portion of the marking head that is attached to the
marker shoulder. The Beta arm is the smaller, lower
portion where the pin cartridge attaches.
•
•
•
3-60
Z
Move to a Specific X/Y Location
•
•
•
•
•
X/Y
Jog the X- and Y-axes.
Values displayed in the X and Y boxes show the
current marker position in the marking window. As the
machine moves, the system will update coordinates.
•
•
JOG:
Press TAB to select either the Alpha Arm or Beta Arm.
Press F7 (CW) to rotate the selected arm clockwise.
Press F8 (CCW) to rotate the selected arm counter-clockwise.
34700D.DOC
JOG:
X/Y
Z
THETA
Resolution: <COARSE >
X: [ 6.0000]in
Y: [ 6.0000]in
Arm: Alpha
Beta
F7 CW
F1 ACCEPT
F2 GOTO
F8 CCW
TMC470 Controller Operation
Test the Z (vertical) Axis
If installed and enabled, the optional Z-axis allows you to move the marking head up and down the Z-axis tool post.
Press PAGE DOWN until the Jog Z Screen is displayed.
Select the Size of Movement
•
Verify the cursor is on the Resolution parameter. If
not, press TAB to select it.
•
The Resolution parameter allows you to choose the
size of each Jog movement.
•
Press ENTER to toggle through the available
Resolution selections: Single, Fine, or Coarse.
X/Y
Z
THETA
Resolution: <COARSE >
Z: [ 0.0000]in
F1 ACCEPT
F2 GOTO
Jog the Z-axis
Values displayed in the Z-axis box shows the current marker
position on the Z-axis. As the machine moves, the system
will update the axis coordinate.
•
JOG:
Press the UP or DOWN ARROW key to move the marker
up or down the Z-axis tool post.
Move to a Specific Z-axis Location
•
•
•
Press TAB to select the Z-axis box.
Enter the Z-axis coordinate where you wish to move the marker.
Press F2 (GOTO) to move the marker to the specified Z-axis location.
Test the Theta (rotational) Axis
If installed and enabled, the optional Theta-axis allows you to rotate the rotary drive unit.
Press PAGE DOWN until the Jog Theta screen is displayed.
Select the Size of Movement
•
Verify the cursor is on the Resolution parameter. If
not, press TAB to select it.
•
The Resolution parameter allows you to define the
size of each Jog movement.
•
Press ENTER to toggle through the available
selections: Single (0.1°), Fine (1°), or Coarse (10°).
Z
THETA
Resolution: <COARSE >
Theta: [ 0.0000]degrees
F1 ACCEPT
F2 GOTO
Press the RIGHT or LEFT ARROW key to rotate the
drive unit clockwise or counterclockwise as viewed
from behind the fixture.
Move to a Specific Theta-axis Location
•
•
•
X/Y
Jog the Theta-axis
Values displayed in the Theta-axis box shows the current
marker position on the rotational axis. As the machine
moves, the system will update the axis coordinate.
•
JOG:
Press TAB to select the Theta-axis box.
Enter the Theta-axis coordinate where you wish to move the rotary device.
Press F2 (GOTO) to rotate the fixture to the specified Theta-axis location.
When finished, press ESC to exit the test screen.
34700D.DOC
3-61
TMC470 Controller Operation
3.20.5 Verify Marker Position
The Exercise test moves the marker through its range of motion, allowing the system to verify when the position flags
clear and engage the X-axis and Y-axis opto sensors.
Note: This test is not available for TMP6100 markers.
When
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
activated, the system will:
Home the marker.
Verify both opto sensors are engaged.
Move the pin to its limits around the boundaries of the marking window.
Verify the opto sensors are properly cleared and engaged as the marker moves.
Move the pin Home.
Verify both opto sensors are engaged.
Move the pin diagonally to its limits.
Verify both opto sensors are cleared.
Move the pin Home and stop.
Verify both opto sensors are engaged.
Upon completion of the test, the system will display the test results as PASSED of FAILED.
WARNING
When the Exercise Test is performed, the marking system equipment will automatically move
around the entire perimeter of the marking window. Stay clear of the marking system when
running the Exercise Test to avoid contact with the moving equipment.
CAUTION
Certain tests on the Maintenance/Test screen are provided to check the operation of the
circuit boards installed in the TMC470 Controller (MAIN, IO, AUX AXIS, and BURN-IN).
These tests require special test equipment. Accordingly, these tests are intended for use
by Telesis-authorized technicians only. Telesis strongly recommends that you do not
run these tests without the appropriate test equipment or without the consent of
Telesis Technologies, Inc. Contact Telesis Customer Support for more information.
From the Supervisor Main Screen, press F4 (MARKER).
The system will display the Marker Menu.
Press F8 to toggle the MAINTENANCE selection to TEST.
Press F3 (MAINT) to access the Test Screen.
Press PAGE DOWN until the Exercise Screen is
displayed.
To begin the tests, press the Start (Print) key:
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline–
:002
F1:ABOUTPattern:SAMPLE_02
F2:PIN
F7:<ENABLED >
*001:[TEXT:
User Text:
F3:MAINT
F8:<TEST >
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
003:[
004:[
005:[
TEST:
Exercise
Press the <
3-62
34700D.DOC
Start
> Button
]
]
]
]
]
TMC470 Controller Operation
Verify Marker Position (continued)
As the test progresses, the system will update the display
similar to the screen shown here.
•
The first line shows the target location (X/Y
coordinates) where the marker is going.
•
The second line shows the current location (X/Y
coordinates) where the marker actually is.
TEST:
Exercise
Move to 6.0, 4.0
Current location: 6.0, 4.0
TEST:
When the tests complete, the results of the exercise are
displayed on the bottom line.
•
PASSED indicates the system was able to confirm the
X-axis and Y-axis opto sensors were cleared and
engaged as expected.
•
FAILED indicates the system was unable to verify the
opto sensors were properly cleared and engaged.
For assistance, contact Telesis Customer Support.
To re-run the tests, press the Start (Print) key:
To exit the Test Screen and return to the Main Screen, press ESC.
34700D.DOC
Exercise
Move to 0.0, 4.0
Current location: 0.0, 4.0
Exercise PASSED
3-63
TMC470 Controller Operation
This page intentionally left blank.
3-64
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
Chapter 4
System Messages
The following pages provide an alphabetized list of the various messages that may be displayed during system
operation. Refer to this list for an explanation of the messages and to help clarify or resolve the situation.
2D Matrix Encode Error!
This message may be displayed when you are creating or editing a 2D matrix symbol. Ensure the Format
parameter selection matches the type of characters contained in the text string. Ensure the number of characters
do not exceed the maximum allowed for the type of matrix you are creating. See 2D Matrix Symbols (Chapter 2).
Character Index, Must Be 90/270 Degs!
This message applies to use of the optional Theta (rotational) axis. If you define a Text field and select Index Print
Mode, you must print the field at a right angle to the rotational axis. Edit the Text field and set the Angle
parameter to 90° or 270°, as applicable.
Delete Parameter(s) Is Not Allowed
You have attempted to delete a parameter file from controller flash memory. To protect the integrity of the marking
system software, the parameter files stored on the controller cannot be deleted. You may restore parameter files
using the USB Backup/Restore features or you may reset the system parameters to their factory-default settings.
Denied On an Empty Pattern!
This message is displayed if you attempt to Pre-Position the machine with a pattern that contains no objects. The
Pre-Position command moves the machine to the location of the first printable field of the pattern. Since the
pattern contains no objects, execution of the Pre-Position command is denied.
Denied! Marker Is Offline!
Certain features require the machine to be online before they can be executed. Place the machine online and
try again.
Device Is Not Formatted
The device connected to the controller USB port is either not properly formatted or is not compatible for use with
the TMC470 controller marking system.
Device Is Not Mounted
You have attempted to access the USB Backup features before connecting a USB device to the controller.
Connect a suitable USB device to the controller USB port and try again.
Error: 7 Bits / No Parity Is Not Supported!
This message is displayed if you attempt to configure the Host Communication parameters with incompatible
settings. If you set the Bits parameter to 7, you must set the Parity parameter to either Odd or Even. You cannot
use a 7-bit / No Parity configuration.
Error: Alpha SN Range Warning! (A-Z)
This error is displayed if you attempt to save the Omni serial number Alpha parameter with an invalid value. The
Alpha parameter value must be an uppercase, alphabetic character (A through Z).
34700D.DOC
4-1
TMC470 Controller Operation
Error: An Edit Field Needs Selected
You have attempted to edit a field that cannot be edited. Move the cursor to a valid field and try again.
Error: Cannot Copy an Empty Field
This message is displayed if you select the Edit/Copy command while the cursor is positioned on an empty line in the
pattern object list. Move the cursor to line that contains a valid field and try again.
Error: Cannot Cut an Empty Field
This message is displayed if you select the Edit/Cut command while the cursor is positioned on an empty line in the
pattern object list. Move the cursor to line that contains a valid field and try again.
Error: Cannot Save, Flash Disk Is Full
This message is displayed if you attempt to save a pattern to the controller and there is insufficient space
remaining in flash memory. If necessary, backup your pattern files to a USB device, then delete any obsolete or
unused patterns from the controller to free up space.
Error: ChDir Failed
The marking system software is unable to open the specified directory on the device connected to the UBS port.
Error: Copy Failed
The marking system software is unable to copy the selected file(s) to the target location.
Error: Copying Unknown Parameter File
This message is displayed if you attempt to copy an unknown parameter file from the USB device to controller flash
memory. To protect the integrity of the marking system software, only valid parameter files may be copied to the
controller. Note that if you attempt a batch copy, the system will not display this message. Instead, it will copy the
valid parameter files in the batch and ignore all unknown, invalid files.
Error: Delete Failed
The marking system software is unable to delete the selected file(s) from the target location.
Error: in Deleting the Pattern!
This indicates a System Error. The system was unable to delete the specified pattern. Try deleting the pattern
again. If the error continues, contact Telesis Customer Support.
Error: In Homing the Theta-axis
This message is displayed if the system is unable to move the rotary drive fixture to the Theta-axis Home position.
Ensure the drive fixture is properly connected and properly configured. Refer to the Auxiliary Axis Installation
Supplement. Ensure nothing is obstructing the device that would prevent its movement. Try placing the machine
offline, then online. If the error message continues to appear, contact Telesis Customer Support.
Error: In Homing the Z-axis
This message is displayed if the system is unable to move the Z-axis tool post to its Home position. Ensure the tool
post is properly connected and properly configured. Refer to the Auxiliary Axis Installation Supplement. Ensure
nothing is obstructing the tool post or carriage that would prevent its movement. Try placing the machine offline,
then online. If the error message continues to appear, contact Telesis Customer Support.
Error: in Loading Pattern!
This indicates a System Error. The system was unable to load the specified pattern. Try loading the pattern again.
If the error continues, contact Telesis Customer Support.
4-2
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
Error: in Saving Pattern!
This message indicates the system was unable to save this pattern into memory. There may be too many patterns
already stored in memory. Try saving the pattern again. If the error continues, contact Telesis Customer Support.
Error: Invalid Source
This error message is displayed if you attempt to copy or delete a single file and no file is selected. The cursor may
be accidentally positioned on a directory name. Ensure the cursor is on the desired file name, then try again.
Error: MkDir Failed
The marking system software is unable to create a new directory on the device connected to the UBS port.
Error: Over Temperature Fault Detected
This message is displayed if the controller temperature has exceeded 65°C (149°F) and you attempt to jog or
online the machine, or attempt to print a pattern. If an over temperature condition occurs, the software will set
the Over Temp signal to ON and will not allow any machine movement. See Test Input Signals (Chapter 3).
If an over temperature condition occurs, shut down the controller and contact Telesis Customer Support.
Error: Paste Buffer Is Empty
This message is displayed if you select the Edit/Paste command with nothing stored in the paste buffer. Cut (or copy)
the source again try pasting again.
Error: Pixel Is Out of Marker's Range
This message is displayed if you attempt to print a pattern and the system detects any portion of any field is
outside of the printable area of the marking window. Determine which field is out of range, edit the pattern to
relocate the field as required, then try again to print the pattern.
Error: Quiet Area Violation!
This message may be displayed while you are creating or editing a 2D matrix symbol. It indicates that you have
defined the symbol too close to the marking window boundary. To improve the quality of the mark, the marker
may need to extend beyond the edge of the symbol before it returns to print the next column of dots in the matrix.
If the matrix symbol is located such that the marker has to move outside the marking window, the system will
issue this message for you to correct the problem. You must relocate the matrix symbol (away from the edge of
the marking window) in order to continue.
Error: Serial Number Range Warning!
This message is displayed when the pattern serial number reaches its defined limit and the Halt printing option is
enabled. Reset the pattern serial number or change the printing option from Halt to Wrap.
This message may also be displayed while using the SN Editor. The current serial number (SN parameter value)
must be within the defined serial number range (i.e., between the Lower and Upper Limit parameters). If you
attempt to exit the SN Editor page, or attempt to save the parameter settings with the serial number out of range,
the system will display this error message.
Error: UNTITLED Is a Reserved Name!
You have attempted to save a pattern under the name "UNTITLED". This is the default name given to newly
created patterns and is reserved for system use. Select another name and try again. Note: When you save a new
pattern for the first time, be sure to use the File/Save As command instead of File/Save.
Field (nn) - User Font Error!
If you define a Text or ArcText field to use a custom User font, the User font must reside in controller memory. If
not, the system will issue this message when you test the pattern. See Test Patterns (Chapter 2). If you created a
custom font using the Telesis Logo/Font Generator software, ensure it is downloaded to the controller so it may be
used in your patterns.
34700D.DOC
4-3
TMC470 Controller Operation
F-Ram Error ... Initializing F-Ram
This error is displayed if there is a problem initializing the controller flash RAM.
Contact Telesis Customer Support for assistance.
Home Limit Error in X-axis
This error may indicate a faulty home limit switch in the X-axis. Contact Telesis Customer Support for assistance.
Home Limit Error in Y-axis
This error may indicate a faulty home limit switch in the Y-axis. Contact Telesis Customer Support for assistance.
I2C Error with F-Ram
This error is displayed if there is an I2C communication problem with the controller flash RAM.
Contact Telesis Customer Support for assistance.
I2C Error with RT Clock
This error is displayed if there is an I2C communication problem with the controller real-time clock.
Contact Telesis Customer Support for assistance.
I2C Interface Failed to Initialize!
This error is displayed if the I2C communication interface fails to initialize.
Contact Telesis Customer Support for assistance.
I2C RT Clock Low Battery Warning!
This error is displayed if the controller real-time clock battery voltage is low and needs to be replaced.
Contact Telesis Customer Support for assistance.
Marker Aborted!
This message is displayed after the STOP button on the keyboard is pressed or after receiving an STOP command
from the host computer or from a remote I/O controller. You must acknowledge the Marker Aborted message and
place the machine online to resume normal operations.
Marker Aborted! Over Temperature Fault
This message is displayed if the controller temperature exceeds 65°C (149°F) while a print cycle is in progress. If
an over temperature condition occurs, the software will set the Over Temp signal to ON, abort the current print
cycle, and will not allow any further machine movement. See Test Input Signals (Chapter 3).
If an over temperature condition occurs, shut down the controller and contact Telesis Customer Support.
No Pattern Loaded! Pre-position What?
A pattern must be loaded for the machine to execute a Pre-Position command.
4-4
34700D.DOC
Load a pattern and try again.
TMC470 Controller Operation
Memory Allocation Error
This message may appear if there is insufficient space remaining in controller flash memory to accommodate a
batch file copy. Before executing the batch copy, the system first calculates the space required to copy all files
from the selected directory on the USB drive. If there will not be sufficient space to store all files in controller flash
memory, the system will post this message and disallow batch copying from the selected directory. You may still
perform single file copying from the USB drive/directory (memory permitting), or you could try reducing the
number of files in the selected directory on the USB drive.
Micro QR Code Encode Error
This message may be displayed when you are creating or editing a Micro QR Code object. Ensure the Mode
parameter selection matches the type of characters contained in the text string. Ensure the number of characters do
not exceed the maximum allowed for the type of symbol you are creating. See Micro QR Code Symbols (Chapter 2).
Parameter Error! Defaults Loaded!
This message is displayed during power-up if an error is detected with controller memory. The system was unable
to load the user-defined parameters, so the system (factory) default parameters were loaded instead.
Password Error! **Access Denied**
You entered an invalid password while attempting to access the Designer mode or the Supervisor mode. Enter the
correct password and try again. Contact the system supervisor for further assistance.
Pattern Pixel Range Error! Field (nn)
This message is displayed during a pattern test if the system detects any portion of any field is outside of the
printable area of the marking window. See Test Patterns (Chapter 2). Determine which field is out of range,
relocate the field as required, then re-run the pattern test.
QR Code Encode Error
This message may be displayed when you are creating or editing a QR Code object. Ensure the Mode parameter
selection matches the type of characters contained in the text string. Ensure the number of characters do not exceed
the maximum allowed for the type of symbol you are creating. See QR Code Symbols (Chapter 2).
Serial Tool is Not Enabled
You have attempted to add a Serial command to a pattern while the Serial Tool feature is disabled.
Enable the Serial Tool and try again. See Serial2 Communication Properties (Chapter 3).
Timeout... Cannot Find Home Position!
The machine attempted to move to Home but was unable to verify the Home position. Place the machine online.
If the error continues, contact Telesis Customer Support.
Variable Text Field Not Found
This error message will be displayed if the Host attempts to download data to a pattern and it is unable to locate a
variable text field. Either the wrong pattern is loaded, no variable text fields exist in the pattern or, if you are using
Extended Protocol, the field number of the variable text field is improperly identified.
34700D.DOC
4-5
TMC470 Controller Operation
This page intentionally left blank.
4-6
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
Appendix A
Standard Telesis Fonts
The following pages illustrate the standard Telesis fonts and their complete character sets.
5x7 Font Character Set
●
●
●
●
●
●
● ●
● ●
● ●
● ●
● ●
●●●●●
● ●
●●●●●
● ●
● ●
●
●●●●
● ●
●●●
● ●
●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●
●●●●●
●
●
●
●●●
●
●●●
●
●
●●●
●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●
●● ●
● ● ●
● ● ●
● ● ●
● ● ●
●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
● ●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●
●
●
●●●●
●
●●●●●
●
●
●●●●
●
●
●
● ●
●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●●
●●
●
●
●
●●
●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
● ●
● ●
●
● ● ●
● ●
●● ●
●
●
●
●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
● ● ●
● ● ●
●● ●●
●
●
●●●
●
●
●
●●●
●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●
●
●
●
●
●●●
●
●
● ● ●
● ●●●
● ●●
●
●●●●
●
● ●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●●●●
●
●
●
●
●●●●
●
●
●
●
●●●●
●
●
● ●
●
● ●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●
●●●●●
●●
●●
●●
●●
●●
●●●●●
●●●
●
●
●
●●●●
●
●
●
●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●
●●●
●
●●●●
●
●
●●●●
●
●
●
●●
●
●
●●●
●
●
●●●●●
●
●●●●
●
●
●●●
●
●
●●●●●
●
●●●●
●
●
●
●●●●
●
●●●●●
●
●
●●●●
●
● ●
●●●●
●
●●●●●
●
●
●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
● ●
●
●
●
●
●
●
● ●
● ●
●●●●
●
●●●●●
●
●
●●●●
●
●
● ●
●
●
●
●
● ●
●●●●
●
●●●●●
●
●
●●●●
●
●
● ● ●
●●●
●
●●●
● ● ●
●
●
●
●●●●●
●
●
●●●
●
●
●
●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●
●●●●●
●
●
●●●●
●
●
●●●●●
●●●●●
●●
●●
●●
●●
●●
●●●●●
●
● ●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
● ● ●
● ●
●
● ●
●●●
●
●
●●●●●
●
●●●●
● ●
●●●
●
●
●●●●●
●
●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●
●
●
●
● ●
●
●●●
●
●
● ●●
● ● ●
●● ●
●
●
●●●
●
●●
●
●
●
●
●●●
●●●
●
●
●
●●
●
●
●●●●●
●●●●●
●
●
●●
●
●
●
●●●
●
● ●
● ●
● ●
●●●●●
●
●
●●●●●
●
●●●●
●
●
●
●
●●●
●●●
●
●
●●●●
●
●
●
●
●●●
●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●
●
●
●
●
●●●
●
●
●
●
●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●
●
●
● ●
● ●
●●
● ●
● ●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●
●
●
●● ●●
● ● ●
● ● ●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●● ●
● ● ●
● ●●
●
●
●
●
●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●
●●●●
●
●
●
●
●●●●
●
●
●
●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
● ● ●
● ●
●● ●
●●●●
●
●●●●●
●
●
●●●●
●
●
●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●
●●●●
●
●
●
●●●●
●
●
●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●
●●●●
●
●
●●●●
●
●●●●
●●●
●
●
●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●
●
● ●
●
●
●
● ●
●
● ●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
● ●
●
●
● ●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●
●
●
●●●●
●
●
●●●●●
● ●
● ●
●
●
●
●
●● ●
● ● ●
● ●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●
●
●
●
●●●
●
● ●
●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●
● ●
●●●
●
●
●
●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●
●
●
●
●●●●●
●
●●●●●
●
●
●●●●
●
●
●
●●●●
●
●
●
● ●●
●
●
●●●●
●
●
●
●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
● ●
●
● ●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●
●
●
●●●●
●
● ●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●
●
●
●
●●●●●
● ●
●
●
●
●
● ●
● ●
● ●
● ●
●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
● ●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●
●
●
●
●●●
●
●
●
●
● ●
● ●
●
● ●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●
●
●
●
●
● ●
● ●
●●●
●
●
●
●●●
●
●
●
●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●
●
●
●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●
●
●
●
●
●
● ●
●
●
●
●
●●●
●●●
●
●
●●●●
●
●
●
●
●●●
●●●●
●
●
●
●
●●●●
● ●
● ●
●
●
●
●
● ●
● ●
●●●
● ●
●
●
● ●
● ●
●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●
●
●
●
●
●
● ●
●
●
●
●
●●●
●
●
●
●
OCR Font Character Set
●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●
● ●
●●●
●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●
●●●
●
●
●
●
● ●●
● ● ●
●● ●
●
●
●
●
●●●
●●●
●
●
●
●
● ●
● ●
● ●
●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●
●
●
● ●
● ●
●●
●
●●
● ●
● ●
●
●
●●●
●
●
●
●
●●●
●●●●
●●●●
●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
● ●
● ●
● ●
●●●●●
●
●
●
●●●●
●
●
●
●●●●
●
●
●
●
●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●
●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●
● ●
● ●
● ●
●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●
●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
● ●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●
● ●
● ●
●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●● ●●
● ● ●
● ● ●
● ● ●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●● ●
●● ●
●
●
● ● ●
●
●
● ●●
● ●●
●
●
●
●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
● ●
● ●
●
●
●
●
●
●
● ●●
● ●●
● ●
●●●●
●
●
●
●
●●●●
●
●●
● ●
● ●
●
●
●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●
●●●●●
● ● ●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●
●●●
● ●
●
●
●
●
●
● ●
●
●
●
●
●
●
34700D.DOC
●●●
●●●
●●●
● ●
● ●
● ●
● ●
● ●
● ●
● ●
●●●
●●●●●
●
●
●
●●●
●
●
●
●●●●●
●●●●●
●
●
●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●
●
●
●
●
● ●●
●
●
●
●
●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●● ●
● ● ●
● ●●
●
●
● ●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
● ● ●
● ● ●
● ● ●
● ● ●
● ● ●
● ●
●
●
●
●
●
●
● ●
●
● ●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●
●
●
● ●
●
● ●
●
●
●●●●●
●
●
●
● ●
●
●
●
●
●
A-1
TMC470 Controller Operation
11x16 Font Character Set
●●●
●●●
●●●
●●●
●●●
●●●
●●●
●●●
●●●
●●●
●●●
●●
●●
●●
●●
●●
●●
●●
●●
●●
●●
●●
●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●●●●
● ●
●
● ●
●
● ●
●
● ●
●
●●●●●●●●●
●
● ●
●
● ●
●
● ●
●
● ●
●●●●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●
● ●
●●●
●
●●
● ●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●●●●●
●●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●●●●●
●●●●●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●
●
●●
● ●
● ●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●
●●●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●
●●●●●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●
●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●
●
● ●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●●●
●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●
●●●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●●●
●●●●●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●●●●●
●●●●●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●
●●●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●●●
● ●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●
●●●●●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
● ●
●
● ●
● ●
● ●
● ●
●●
●●
●
●
●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●● ●
●
●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●
●●●●●● ●
●●●
● ●
●●●
●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●
●
● ●
●
● ●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
● ●
●
● ●
●
●●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●
●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●
●
● ●
●
● ●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
● ●
●
● ●
●
●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●●●
●●
●●
●●
●●
●●
●●
●●
●●
●●
●●
●●
●●
●●
●●
●●●●●●●●●
●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●
●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
● ●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
● ●
●●
●●
●●●●●● ●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●●
●●●●●● ●
●
●
●●●●●●●●●●●
● ●●●●●
●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●
● ●●●●
● ●
●
●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●
●
● ●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●
●
●
●
●
●●●
●
● ●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●
●
●
●
●
●●●
●●
●●●
● ●
●●●
●
●
●
●●●●● ●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●
●●
●●
●●
●
● ●
●
●
●
●
●●
● ●
● ●
● ●
●●
●●
● ●
●
●
●
●
●
●
● ●
●
●●
●
●●
●
● ●
●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●
●
●
●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
● ●●●●●●
●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●
●
● ●
●
● ●●●●●
●●●● ●
●
● ●
●●
●
●
●
●
●●
●●●●● ●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●
●●
●●
●●
●
● ●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●
●●
●●
●●
●●
●●
●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
● ●
●
●
● ●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●●
●
●●●●●●●●
●●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
● ●
●
●
●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●
●
● ●
●
● ●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
● ●
●
● ●
●
●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●●●
●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●
●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●
●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●
●●●
● ●
●●●
34700D.DOC
●●●
● ●
●●●
●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
● ●
●
● ●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●
●●●●●● ●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●
●
●
● ●
●●
●
●
●
●
●
●●
●●
●●
●●
●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●
●●
●
● ●
●●
●●●
● ●
●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
● ●● ●
● ●
●●
●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
● ●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●●●●●
●●●●
●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●
●●
● ●
● ●
● ●
● ●
●
● ●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
● ●
● ● ●
●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●
●
●
●
● ●
●
● ●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●●●
●●
●●
●●
●●
●●
●●
●●
●●
●●
●●
●●
●●
●●
●●
●●●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●
●
●
●
●●●●
●●●●●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●●●●●
●
●
●●●●●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
● ●
● ●
●●
● ●
● ●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
● ●●●●●●
●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●
● ●
●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●
● ●
●●●
●●●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●●●
●
●●●●●●●●●●●
●●
●●
●●
●●
●●
●●●
●●
●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
A-2
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
● ●●●●●
● ●
●
●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
● ●
● ● ●
●●●
●
●●●
● ● ●
● ● ●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●
●●●●●● ●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●
●●●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●●●
●●
●●
●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●●
●●●●●● ●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●●
●●●●●● ●
●
● ●
●
●
●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●●●●●●●●●
●
●
●
●
●
●●
●●●●●● ●
TMC470 Controller Operation
Appendix B
ASCII Character Cross Reference
Standard ASCII Characters
This table may be convenient when devising communications between the controller and a host computer.
ASCII
DEC
HEX
ASCII
DEC
HEX
ASCII
DEC
HEX
ASCII
DEC
HEX
NULL
0
00
SPACE
32
20
@
64
40
'
96
60
ctrl A SOH
1
01
!
33
21
A
65
41
a
97
61
ctrl B STX
2
02
"
34
22
B
66
42
b
98
62
ctrl C ETX
3
03
#
35
23
C
67
43
c
99
63
ctrl D EOT
4
04
$
36
24
D
68
44
d
100
64
ctrl E ENQ
5
05
%
37
25
E
69
45
e
101
65
ctrl F ACK
6
06
&
38
26
F
70
46
f
102
66
ctrl G BEL
7
07
'
39
27
G
71
47
g
103
67
ctrl H BS
8
08
(
40
28
H
72
48
h
104
68
ctrl I HT
9
09
)
41
29
I
73
49
i
105
69
ctrl J LF
10
0A
*
42
2A
J
74
4A
j
106
6A
ctrl K VT
11
0B
+
43
2B
K
75
4B
k
107
6B
ctrl L FF
12
0C
,
44
2C
L
76
4C
l
108
6C
ctrl M CR
13
0D
-
45
2D
M
77
4D
m
109
6D
ctrl N SO
14
0E
.
46
2E
N
78
4E
n
110
6E
ctrl O SI
15
0F
/
47
2F
O
79
4F
o
111
6F
ctrl P DLE
16
10
0
48
30
P
80
50
p
112
70
ctrl Q DC1
17
11
1
49
31
Q
81
51
q
113
71
ctrl R DC2
18
12
2
50
32
R
82
52
r
114
72
ctrl S DC3
19
13
3
51
33
S
83
53
s
115
73
ctrl T DC4
20
14
4
52
34
T
84
54
t
116
74
ctrl U NAK
21
15
5
53
35
U
85
55
u
117
75
ctrl V SYN
22
16
6
54
36
V
86
56
v
118
76
ctrl W ETB
23
17
7
55
37
W
87
57
w
119
77
ctrl X CAN
24
18
8
56
38
X
88
58
x
120
78
ctrl Y EM
25
19
9
57
39
Y
89
59
y
121
79
ctrl Z SUB
26
1A
:
58
3A
Z
90
5A
z
122
7A
ctrl [ ESC
27
1B
;
59
3B
[
91
5B
{
123
7B
ctrl \ FS
28
1C
<
60
3C
\
92
5C
|
124
7C
ctrl ] GS
29
1D
=
61
3D
]
93
5D
}
125
7D
ctrl ^
RS
30
1E
>
62
3E
^
94
5E
~
126
7E
ctrl _ US
31
1F
?
63
3F
_
95
5F
DEL
127
7F
34700D.DOC
B-1
TMC470 Controller Operation
Extended ASCII Characters
Extended ASCII characters may be created using the Telesis Logo/Font Generator software.
ASCII
DEC
HEX
ASCII
DEC
HEX
ASCII
DEC
HEX
ASCII
DEC
HEX
160
A0
À
192
C0
à
224
E0
€
128
80
none
none
129
81
¡
161
A1
Á
193
C1
á
225
E1
‚
130
82
¢
162
A2
Â
194
C2
â
226
E2
ƒ
131
83
£
163
A3
Ã
195
C3
ã
227
E3
„
132
84
¤
164
A4
Ä
196
C4
ä
228
E4
…
133
85
¥
165
A5
Å
197
C5
å
229
E5
†
134
86
¦
166
A6
Æ
198
C6
æ
230
E6
‡
135
87
§
167
A7
Ç
199
C7
ç
231
E7
ˆ
136
88
¨
168
A8
È
200
C8
è
232
E8
‰
137
89
©
169
A9
É
201
C9
é
233
E9
Š
138
8A
ª
170
AA
Ê
202
CA
ê
234
EA
‹
139
8B
«
171
AB
Ë
203
CB
ë
235
EB
Œ
140
8C
¬
172
AC
Ì
204
CC
ì
236
EC
None
141
8D
-
173
AD
Í
205
CD
í
237
ED
None
142
8E
®
174
AE
Î
206
CE
î
238
EE
none
143
8F
¯
175
AF
Ï
207
CF
ï
239
EF
none
144
90
°
176
B0
Ð
208
D0
ð
240
F0
‘
145
91
±
177
B1
Ñ
209
D1
ñ
241
F1
’
146
92
²
178
B2
Ò
210
D2
ò
242
F2
“
147
93
³
179
B3
Ó
211
D3
ó
243
F3
”
148
94
´
180
B4
Ô
212
D4
ô
244
F4
•
149
95
µ
181
B5
Õ
213
D5
õ
245
F5
–
150
96
¶
182
B6
Ö
214
D6
ö
246
F6
—
151
97
·
183
B7
×
215
D7
÷
247
F7
˜
152
98
¸
184
B8
0
216
D8
0
248
F8
™
153
99
¹
185
B9
Ù
217
D9
ù
249
F9
š
154
9A
º
186
BA
Ú
218
DA
ú
250
FA
›
155
9B
»
187
BB
Û
219
DB
û
251
FB
œ
156
9C
¼
188
BC
Ü
220
DC
ü
252
FC
none
157
9D
½
189
BD
Ý
221
DD
ý
253
FD
None
158
9E
¾
190
BE
Þ
222
DE
þ
254
FE
Ÿ
159
9F
¿
191
BF
ß
223
DF
ÿ
255
FF
B-2
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
Index
1
11x16 font ....................................................................... A-2
1700/1710 selection.......................................................... 3-3
2
2D symbols
See matrix symbol
See MicroQR Code symbol
See QR code symbol
anchor point ......................................................................2-2
arcs
3 pt ............................................................................2-55
radius ........................................................................2-52
arctext
3 pt ............................................................................2-66
radius ........................................................................2-58
area of mark ......................................................................2-2
ASCII characters.............................................................. B-1
B
5
5x7 font ........................................................................... A-1
A
abort print ....................................................................... 1-14
accessing
designer mode ............................................................ 2-9
supervisor mode ......................................................... 3-1
adding
arcs, 3pt .................................................................... 2-55
arcs, radius................................................................ 2-52
arctext, 3pt................................................................ 2-66
arctext, radius ........................................................... 2-58
block objects............................................................. 2-92
boxes ........................................................................ 2-78
circles ....................................................................... 2-81
ellipses, 3pt............................................................... 2-88
ellipses, radius .......................................................... 2-84
goto commands ........................................................ 2-96
input commands ..................................................... 2-100
lines .......................................................................... 2-72
lines, 2pt ................................................................... 2-75
machine commands ................................................ 2-108
matrix symbols ......................................................... 2-20
MicroQR Code symbols ........................................... 2-41
output commands ................................................... 2-104
pattern instructions ................................................. 2-126
pause commands....................................................... 2-98
QR code symbols...................................................... 2-30
serial commands ..................................................... 2-105
text fields.................................................................. 2-14
adjusting
limit switch, z-axis ................................................... 3-44
mounting angle, theta-axis........................................ 3-50
part diameter, theta-axis ........................................... 3-49
pattern objects ........................................................ 2-116
speed (max.) ............................................................... 3-4
speed, marker ............................................................. 3-3
speed, theta-axis ....................................................... 3-49
speed, z-axis ............................................................. 3-47
zero offset, z-axis ..................................................... 3-45
alerts/messages ................................................................. 4-1
allocating file size........................................................... 3-16
alpha serial number prefix .............................................. 3-11
backup patterns & parameters.........................................3-53
baud rate
serial1 (host) port ......................................................3-18
serial2 port ................................................................3-34
BCC ................................................................................3-33
bidirectional printing
matrix symbols..........................................................2-26
bits setting
serial1 (host) port ......................................................3-18
serial2 port ................................................................3-34
block files
library......................................................................2-132
max size ....................................................................3-16
size allocation ...........................................................3-16
block objects ...................................................................2-92
boundary of mark..............................................................2-2
boxes...............................................................................2-78
buffer setup .......................................................................3-6
C
cautions................................................................................ v
changing
field parameters.......................................................2-113
mode, designer ............................................................2-9
mode, supervisor .........................................................3-1
pattern parameters...................................................2-113
print order ...............................................................2-115
character
ASCII-decimal-hexadecimal...................................... B-1
checksum ....................................................................2-8
control .........................................................................1-7
cross reference ........................................................... B-1
dimemsions .................................................................2-4
dot matrix....................................................................2-5
fonts, considerations ...................................................2-4
fonts, samples............................................................. A-1
fully-formed ................................................................2-5
ignore ..................................................................3-20, 35
matrix symbol, maximum .........................................2-25
MicroQR Code symbol, maximum ...........................2-47
QR code symbol, maximum......................................2-36
start .....................................................................3-20, 35
terminator............................................................3-20, 35
check code ......................................................................3-33
checksum flags..................................................................2-8
34700D.DOC
Index-1
TMC470 Controller Operation
circles ............................................................................. 2-81
coded data ........................................................................ 2-6
commands
goto .......................................................................... 2-96
input ....................................................................... 2-100
machine .................................................................. 2-108
output ..................................................................... 2-104
pause ........................................................................ 2-98
serial....................................................................... 2-105
communication formats............................................ 3-19, 26
configuring
default text settings................................................. 2-122
file size ..................................................................... 3-16
park position........................................................... 2-121
pattern instructions ................................................. 2-126
pattern serial number .............................................. 2-118
pin parameters ........................................................ 2-124
remote pattern selection.......................................... 2-131
system parameters ...................................................... 3-1
theta-axis ................................................................ 2-128
continuous mode printing................................................. 2-5
control characters ............................................................. 1-7
controller
keyboard..................................................................... 1-3
networked......................................................3-19, 26, 27
operation..................................................................... 1-1
overtemperature........................................................ 3-58
coordinates ....................................................................... 2-2
copying fields............................................................... 2-113
copyng patterns .............................................................. 2-13
copyright ............................................................................. ii
creating
arcs, 3pt .................................................................... 2-55
arcs, radius................................................................ 2-52
arctext, 3pt................................................................ 2-66
arctext, radius ........................................................... 2-58
block objects............................................................. 2-92
boxes ........................................................................ 2-78
circles ....................................................................... 2-81
ellipses, 3pt............................................................... 2-88
ellipses, radius .......................................................... 2-84
goto commands ........................................................ 2-96
input commands ..................................................... 2-100
lines .......................................................................... 2-72
lines, 2pt ................................................................... 2-75
machine commands ................................................ 2-108
matrix symbols ......................................................... 2-20
MicroQR Code symbols........................................... 2-41
new pattern ............................................................... 2-12
new pattern wizard ................................................... 2-10
output commands ................................................... 2-104
pattern instructions ................................................. 2-126
pause commands ...................................................... 2-98
QR code symbols ..................................................... 2-30
serial commands..................................................... 2-105
text fields.................................................................. 2-14
custom fonts
library ..................................................................... 2-132
customer support ................................................................ iii
cycle time ....................................................................... 1-18
Index-2
D
data
system-supplied ..........................................................2-6
user-supplied............................................................. 1-12
date codes
overview .....................................................................2-8
usage ...........................................................................3-7
date insertion.....................................................................2-8
debounce parameter ........................................................ 3-15
decimal characters ........................................................... B-1
default parameters, reset ................................................. 3-52
default text settings ....................................................... 2-122
defining
arcs, 3pt..................................................................... 2-55
arcs, radius ................................................................ 2-52
arctext, 3pt ................................................................ 2-66
arctext, radius............................................................ 2-58
block objects ............................................................. 2-92
boxes......................................................................... 2-78
circles........................................................................ 2-81
default text ............................................................. 2-122
ellipses, 3pt ............................................................... 2-88
ellipses, radius........................................................... 2-84
file size...................................................................... 3-16
goto commands......................................................... 2-96
input commands...................................................... 2-100
lines........................................................................... 2-72
lines, 2pt.................................................................... 2-75
machine commands................................................. 2-108
matrix symbols.......................................................... 2-20
MicroQR Code symbols ........................................... 2-41
mounting angle, theta-axis ........................................ 3-50
output commands.................................................... 2-104
park position ........................................................... 2-121
pattern instructions.................................................. 2-126
pattern serial number .............................................. 2-118
pause commands ....................................................... 2-98
pin parameters......................................................... 2-124
QR code symbols ...................................................... 2-30
query text .................................................................... 3-6
serial commands ..................................................... 2-105
speed, theta-axis........................................................ 3-49
speed, z-axis.............................................................. 3-47
system parameters.......................................................3-1
text fields .................................................................. 2-14
theta-axis, mounting angle ........................................ 3-50
zero offset, z-axis...................................................... 3-45
deleting
fields from patterns ................................................. 2-114
pattern instructions.................................................. 2-126
pattern, block, font files .......................................... 2-132
design
considerations ............................................................. 2-1
jog ...............................................................................2-3
mode ........................................................................... 2-9
designing
new pattern ............................................................... 2-12
new pattern wizard.................................................... 2-10
patterns, overview.......................................................2-1
diacritic symbols...............................................................1-7
diameter of part............................................................... 3-49
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
dimensioning characters ................................................... 2-4
disabling
keyboard/display ...................................................... 3-15
marker ........................................................................ 1-9
pin............................................................................. 3-42
theta-axis .................................................................. 3-48
z-axis ........................................................................ 3-43
display enable/disable..................................................... 3-15
displaying
menus ......................................................................... 1-4
patterns, block, font files ........................................ 2-132
print cycle time......................................................... 1-18
software version ....................................................... 1-18
dot-mode printing ............................................................. 2-5
downloading parameters................................................. 2-13
downloading patterns ..................................................... 2-12
drive air pressure .............................................................. 3-5
drop pin .......................................................................... 1-15
dryrun ............................................................................. 1-14
duplicating fields .......................................................... 2-113
E
echo feature .............................................................. 3-21, 36
edit keys ........................................................................... 1-6
editing
arcs, 3pt .................................................................... 2-55
arcs, radius................................................................ 2-52
arctext, 3pt................................................................ 2-66
arctext, radius ........................................................... 2-58
block objects............................................................. 2-92
boxes ........................................................................ 2-78
circles ....................................................................... 2-81
ellipses, 3pt............................................................... 2-88
ellipses, radius .......................................................... 2-84
goto commands ........................................................ 2-96
input commands ..................................................... 2-100
lines .......................................................................... 2-72
lines, 2pt ................................................................... 2-75
machine commands ................................................ 2-108
matrix symbols ......................................................... 2-20
MicroQR Code symbols ........................................... 2-41
output commands ................................................... 2-104
patterns ................................................................... 2-113
pause commands....................................................... 2-98
QR code symbols...................................................... 2-30
serial commands ..................................................... 2-105
text fields.................................................................. 2-14
ellipses
3 pt............................................................................ 2-88
radius ........................................................................ 2-84
enable
keyboard/display ...................................................... 3-15
marker ........................................................................ 1-9
pin............................................................................. 3-42
theta-axis .................................................................. 3-48
z-axis ........................................................................ 3-43
encoded data..................................................................... 2-6
encoding date/shift info .................................................... 2-8
English units................................................................... 3-41
enter
query text.................................................................. 1-13
user text.....................................................................1-12
EOT control character.......................................................1-7
erasing
fields from patterns .................................................2-114
pattern, block, font files ..........................................2-132
error
checking......................................................................2-8
correction, matrix symbols........................................2-23
correction, MicroQR Code symbols..........................2-44
correction, QR code symbols ....................................2-33
messages .....................................................................4-1
Ethernet communications................................................3-37
Ethernet-Merlin Interface................................................1-19
examples
extended protocol......................................................3-27
programmable protocol .............................................3-22
exercise test.....................................................................3-62
exit software....................................................................1-20
extended protocol
check code ................................................................3-33
examples ...................................................................3-27
message format .........................................................3-27
message types ...........................................................3-29
overview ...................................................................3-26
response format.........................................................3-28
F
fault messages...................................................................4-1
fields
available in patterns ..................................................2-14
changing parameters ...............................................2-113
copying ...................................................................2-113
deleting ...................................................................2-114
global move ............................................................2-116
moving ....................................................................2-115
file size allocation ...........................................................3-16
flags ..................................................................................2-6
font
11x16 ......................................................................... A-2
5x7 ............................................................................. A-1
considerations .............................................................2-4
OCR ........................................................................... A-1
standard...................................................................... A-1
force square dimensions
MicroQR Code symbols............................................2-46
QR code symbols ......................................................2-35
format
matrix symbols..........................................................2-22
MicroQR Code symbols............................................2-43
QR code symbols ......................................................2-32
function keys.....................................................................1-4
G
global field move ..........................................................2-116
goto commands ...............................................................2-96
GS control character .........................................................1-7
H
halt print..........................................................................1-14
34700D.DOC
Index-3
TMC470 Controller Operation
hexadecimal characters ....................................................B-1
home marker .................................................................... 1-9
homing options................................................................. 3-3
host communications...................................................... 3-18
hour codes ........................................................................ 3-7
I
ignore character........................................................ 3-20, 35
impact pin. See pin
input commands ........................................................... 2-100
input signal
options...................................................................... 3-15
tests .......................................................................... 3-58
inserting time/date ............................................................ 2-8
instructions for operator ............................................... 2-126
interactive jog................................................................... 2-3
interrupt print ................................................................. 1-14
IP address ................................................................. 3-37, 38
J
jogging
interactive design........................................................ 2-3
machine .................................................................... 1-15
theta-axis .................................................................. 1-17
x/y-axes .................................................................... 1-15
z-axis ........................................................................ 1-16
K
keyboard
control characters ....................................................... 1-7
diacritic symbols ........................................................ 1-7
edit keys ..................................................................... 1-6
enable/disable........................................................... 3-15
function keys .............................................................. 1-4
marker operation ........................................................ 1-5
navigation keys........................................................... 1-3
phonetic symbols........................................................ 1-7
special keys ................................................................ 1-7
L
labels, query text table...................................................... 3-6
library
block files............................................................... 2-132
custom fonts ........................................................... 2-132
patterns ................................................................... 2-132
user fonts ................................................................ 2-132
license agreement ................................................................ ii
limit switch, z-axis ......................................................... 3-44
limiting access.................................................................. 3-2
limiting file size.............................................................. 3-16
limits of mark ................................................................... 2-2
lines ................................................................................ 2-72
lines, 2pt ......................................................................... 2-75
listing
pattern, block, font files.......................................... 2-132
load pattern on startup .................................................... 3-14
load pattern....................................................................... 1-8
location of object in window ............................................ 2-2
look-up table
Index-4
date codes ...................................................................3-7
query text .................................................................... 3-6
shift codes ...................................................................3-9
M
machine
commands ............................................................... 2-108
home ........................................................................... 1-9
inoperative ................................................................ 3-58
jog ............................................................................. 1-15
movement tests ......................................................... 3-60
online/offline...............................................................1-9
park ........................................................................... 1-10
position verification .................................................. 3-62
pre-position ............................................................... 1-11
main menu ........................................................................1-4
maintenance tests ............................................................ 3-57
manage system parameters ...............................................3-1
managing
block files ............................................................... 2-132
custom fonts............................................................ 2-132
pattern files ............................................................. 2-132
user fonts................................................................. 2-132
marker
air pressure parameter .................................................3-5
home ........................................................................... 1-9
homing options ...........................................................3-3
inoperative ................................................................ 3-58
jog ............................................................................. 1-15
keyboard control .........................................................1-5
online/offline...............................................................1-9
parameters................................................................... 3-3
park ........................................................................... 1-10
pin return rate..............................................................3-5
pin selection ................................................................3-4
pre-position ............................................................... 1-11
pulse delay ..................................................................3-5
selection ......................................................................3-3
speed (max.)................................................................3-4
speed parameter ..........................................................3-3
stroke parameter..........................................................3-4
marking
area .............................................................................2-2
patterns...................................................................... 1-14
system overview .........................................................1-1
window .......................................................................2-2
mass field move ............................................................ 2-116
matrix symbol
maximum characters ................................................. 2-25
overshoot .................................................................. 2-26
overview ................................................................... 2-20
shape ......................................................................... 2-24
spacing/size............................................................... 2-23
matrix symbols
bidirectional printing................................................. 2-26
damage recovery ....................................................... 2-23
error correction ......................................................... 2-23
format ....................................................................... 2-22
max. speed ........................................................................3-4
menu
arcs, 3pt..................................................................... 2-55
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
arcs, radius................................................................ 2-52
arctext, 3pt................................................................ 2-66
arctext, radius ........................................................... 2-58
blocks ....................................................................... 2-92
boxes ........................................................................ 2-78
change mode, designer ............................................... 2-9
change mode, supervisor ............................................ 3-1
circles ....................................................................... 2-81
clock/calendar........................................................... 3-40
date codes ................................................................... 3-7
default text settings................................................. 2-122
ellipses, 3pt............................................................... 2-88
ellipses, radius .......................................................... 2-84
Ethernet communications ......................................... 3-37
extended protocol ..................................................... 3-26
goto commands ........................................................ 2-96
host communications ................................................ 3-18
input commands ..................................................... 2-100
input signal tests ....................................................... 3-58
jog machine .............................................................. 3-60
lines .......................................................................... 2-72
lines, 2pt ................................................................... 2-75
machine commands ................................................ 2-108
main............................................................................ 1-4
marker properties........................................................ 3-3
matrix symbols ......................................................... 2-20
Merlin communications............................................ 3-37
MicroQR Code symbols ........................................... 2-41
omni serial number setup.......................................... 3-11
output commands ................................................... 2-104
output signal tests ..................................................... 3-57
passwords ................................................................... 3-2
pattern park............................................................. 2-121
pattern serial number .............................................. 2-118
pause commands....................................................... 2-98
pin enable/disable ..................................................... 3-42
programmable protocol ............................................ 3-19
pulse solenoids ......................................................... 3-59
QR code symbols...................................................... 2-30
query text setup .......................................................... 3-6
serial commands ..................................................... 2-105
serial1 (host) port setup ............................................ 3-18
serial2 port setup ...................................................... 3-34
shift codes................................................................... 3-9
solenoid tests ............................................................ 3-59
startup properties ...................................................... 3-14
text fields.................................................................. 2-14
theta-axis setup......................................................... 3-48
units of measure........................................................ 3-41
z-axis setup............................................................... 3-43
Merlin
communications........................................................ 3-37
downloading parameters........................................... 2-13
downloading patterns ............................................... 2-12
interface.................................................................... 1-19
message flags ................................................................... 2-6
message format, extended protocol ................................ 3-27
message types, programmable protocol (all) ........... 3-20, 35
message types, extended protocol
1 – update/poll field.................................................. 3-29
G – start print............................................................ 3-29
O – place machine online ......................................... 3-30
P – load/poll pattern name ........................................3-30
Q – update query text buffer .....................................3-30
S – poll error status ...................................................3-31
V – update/poll user-text...........................................3-32
messages ...........................................................................4-1
metric units .....................................................................3-41
MicroQR Code symbol
maximum characters .................................................2-47
overshoot...................................................................2-48
overview ...................................................................2-41
spacing/size...............................................................2-44
MicroQR Code symbols
damage recovery .......................................................2-44
error correction .........................................................2-44
forced square.............................................................2-46
format........................................................................2-43
mode
matrix symbols..........................................................2-22
MicroQR Code symbols............................................2-43
QR code symbols ......................................................2-32
mode of operation
designer.......................................................................2-9
operator .......................................................................1-2
overview .....................................................................1-2
supervisor....................................................................3-1
month codes ......................................................................3-7
mounting angle, theta-axis
pattern parameter ....................................................2-129
system parameter ......................................................3-50
move
all fields ..................................................................2-116
fields .......................................................................2-115
machine.....................................................................1-15
theta-axis...................................................................1-17
to first field ...............................................................1-11
to home field ...............................................................1-9
to park position .........................................................1-10
x/y-axes.....................................................................1-15
z-axis.........................................................................1-16
multiple controllers ............................................. 3-19, 26, 27
N
names reserved for patterns...........................................2-131
naming patterns...............................................................2-13
navigation keys .................................................................1-3
network communications ................................................3-37
networked controller .................................................3-26, 27
networked controllers......................................................3-19
new pattern......................................................................2-12
new pattern wizard..........................................................2-10
O
object anchor.....................................................................2-2
objects in patterns ...........................................................2-14
OCR
check flags ..................................................................2-8
font............................................................................. A-1
omni serial number
overview ...................................................................3-11
reset options ..............................................................3-12
34700D.DOC
Index-5
TMC470 Controller Operation
omni vs. pattern serial number ......................................... 2-7
online at startup .............................................................. 3-14
online signal options....................................................... 3-15
online/offline .................................................................... 1-9
open pattern at startup .................................................... 3-14
open pattern...................................................................... 1-8
operation
marker keys ................................................................ 1-5
modes ......................................................................... 1-2
overview..................................................................... 1-1
operator-supplied data
data entry.................................................................. 1-12
setup parameters......................................................... 2-7
order of print .................................................................... 2-5
output commands ......................................................... 2-104
output signal tests........................................................... 3-57
overshoot setting
matrix symbol........................................................... 2-26
MicroQR Code symbol ............................................ 2-48
QR code symbol ....................................................... 2-37
overtemperature.............................................................. 3-58
overview
controller operation .................................................... 1-1
design considerations ................................................. 2-1
extended protocol ..................................................... 3-26
pattern design ............................................................. 2-1
pattern objects .......................................................... 2-14
pattern properties.................................................... 2-118
remote pattern selection.......................................... 2-131
theta-axis .................................................................. 3-48
z-axis ........................................................................ 3-43
P
parameters
arcs, 3pt .................................................................... 2-55
arcs, radius................................................................ 2-52
arctext, 3pt................................................................ 2-66
arctext, radius ........................................................... 2-58
backup ...................................................................... 3-53
block objects............................................................. 2-92
boxes ........................................................................ 2-78
circles ....................................................................... 2-81
downloading from Merlin ........................................ 2-13
ellipses, 3pt............................................................... 2-88
ellipses, radius .......................................................... 2-84
extended protocol ..................................................... 3-26
field, changing........................................................ 2-113
goto commands ........................................................ 2-96
input commands ..................................................... 2-100
lines .......................................................................... 2-72
lines, 2pt ................................................................... 2-75
machine commands ................................................ 2-108
matrix symbols ......................................................... 2-20
MicroQR Code symbols........................................... 2-41
output commands ................................................... 2-104
pattern, changing .................................................... 2-113
pause commands ...................................................... 2-98
programmable protocol ...................................... 3-20, 35
QR code symbols ..................................................... 2-30
restore....................................................................... 3-53
serial commands..................................................... 2-105
Index-6
system default reset................................................... 3-52
text field.................................................................... 2-14
parity
serial1 (host) port ...................................................... 3-18
serial2 port ................................................................ 3-34
park
defining position ..................................................... 2-121
during pattern load .................................................... 3-14
marker....................................................................... 1-10
parse flags .........................................................................2-6
part diameter
pattern setting.......................................................... 2-128
system setting............................................................ 3-49
password ...........................................................................3-2
pattern vs. omni serial number..........................................2-7
pattern, block, font files
deleting ................................................................... 2-132
patterns
abort print ................................................................. 1-14
adding objects ........................................................... 2-14
adjust....................................................................... 2-116
backup....................................................................... 3-53
changing parameters ............................................... 2-113
copy .......................................................................... 2-13
create new ................................................................. 2-12
data entry, setup ..........................................................2-7
data entry, usage ....................................................... 1-12
default text .............................................................. 2-122
design overview ..........................................................2-1
downloading from Merlin ......................................... 2-12
editing ..................................................................... 2-113
inserting time/date.......................................................2-8
instructions.............................................................. 2-126
library ..................................................................... 2-132
load on startup........................................................... 3-14
load .............................................................................1-8
max size .................................................................... 3-16
name ......................................................................... 2-13
objects....................................................................... 2-14
open ............................................................................1-8
output commands.................................................... 2-104
park on load .............................................................. 3-14
park position ........................................................... 2-121
pin parameters......................................................... 2-124
print........................................................................... 1-14
properties ................................................................ 2-118
remote selection ...................................................... 2-131
remote selection, debounce interval.......................... 3-15
remote selection, signal options ................................ 3-15
reserved names........................................................ 2-131
restore ....................................................................... 3-53
save ........................................................................... 2-13
sequence of printing....................................................2-5
serial number ...................................................... 2-7, 118
signal states/names cross reference......................... 2-131
size allocation ........................................................... 3-16
testing ..................................................................... 2-112
wizard ....................................................................... 2-10
pause commands............................................................. 2-98
phonetic symbols ..............................................................1-7
pin
drop feature............................................................... 1-15
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
enable/disable ........................................................... 3-42
parameter, pattern setting ....................................... 2-124
parameter, system setting ........................................... 3-4
pulse delay.................................................................. 3-5
return rate, overview................................................... 2-5
return rate, parameter setting ...................................... 3-5
test operation ............................................................ 3-59
pin selection ..................................................................... 3-4
pin stroke parameter ......................................................... 3-4
pin type selection.............................................................. 3-4
port address .............................................................. 3-37, 38
position verification tests................................................ 3-62
positioning objects in window.......................................... 2-2
power
off ............................................................................. 1-20
on................................................................................ 1-2
precautions ......................................................................... iv
prepare machine ............................................................... 1-9
pre-position .................................................................... 1-11
pressure parameters .......................................................... 3-5
preventing access.............................................................. 3-2
print
abort ......................................................................... 1-14
cycle time ................................................................. 1-18
dryrun ....................................................................... 1-14
hard vs. soft surfaces .................................................. 2-5
mode & considerations ............................................... 2-5
order ........................................................................... 2-5
order, changing....................................................... 2-115
patterns ..................................................................... 1-14
sequence ..................................................................... 2-5
simulation................................................................. 1-14
printing
matrix symbols, bidirectional ................................... 2-26
matrix symbols, unidirectional ................................. 2-26
processing order ............................................................... 2-5
programmable protocol
echo feature ........................................................ 3-21, 36
examples................................................................... 3-22
message types..................................................... 3-20, 35
overview................................................................... 3-19
parameter settings............................................... 3-20, 35
protocol
extended ................................................................... 3-26
programmable........................................................... 3-19
pulse
delay interval .............................................................. 3-5
solenoids................................................................... 3-59
Q
QR code symbol
maximum characters................................................. 2-36
overshoot .................................................................. 2-37
overview................................................................... 2-30
spacing/size .............................................................. 2-33
QR code symbols
damage recovery....................................................... 2-33
error correction......................................................... 2-33
forced square ............................................................ 2-35
format ....................................................................... 2-32
query text
data input ..................................................................1-12
setup parameters .........................................................3-6
R
rate of return, pin ..............................................................2-5
real-time data ....................................................................2-6
relocating fields.............................................................2-115
remote address ..........................................................3-37, 38
remote pattern selection
debounce interval ......................................................3-15
overview .................................................................2-131
signal options ............................................................3-15
removing
fields from patterns .................................................2-114
pattern instructions..................................................2-126
pattern, block, font files ..........................................2-132
reposition marker ............................................................1-15
reserved pattern names..................................................2-131
reset
omni serial number ...................................................3-12
system parameters.....................................................3-52
response format, extended protocol ................................3-28
restore default settings ....................................................3-52
restore patterns & parameters .........................................3-53
restricting access ...............................................................3-2
return air pressure .............................................................3-5
return rate
overview .....................................................................2-5
parameter setting.........................................................3-5
rotary drive mounting angle............................................3-50
RS control character..........................................................1-7
RS232
communications ........................................................3-18
selection ..............................................................3-19, 26
RS485
communications ........................................................3-18
selection ..............................................................3-19, 26
S
safety summary ................................................................... iv
saved
block files................................................................2-132
custom fonts............................................................2-132
patterns....................................................................2-132
user fonts.................................................................2-132
saving patterns ................................................................2-13
SEL_6 signal options ......................................................3-15
selecting marker................................................................3-3
sequence of priint..............................................................2-5
serial
commands ...............................................................2-105
communication settings.............................................3-18
serial number
alpha prefix ...............................................................3-11
omni (system) ...........................................................3-11
pattern .....................................................................2-118
pattern vs. omni...........................................................2-7
settling time ...........................................................2-127, 3-4
setup
remote pattern selection ..........................................2-131
34700D.DOC
Index-7
TMC470 Controller Operation
theta-axis ................................................................ 2-128
z-axis ........................................................................ 3-43
shift codes
overview..................................................................... 2-8
usage .......................................................................... 3-9
shutdown ........................................................................ 1-20
signals
input tests ................................................................. 3-58
output tests ............................................................... 3-57
simulate printing............................................................. 1-14
size allocation................................................................. 3-16
sizing characters ............................................................... 2-4
software
shutdown .................................................................. 1-20
startup......................................................................... 1-2
version...................................................................... 1-18
solenoid tests .................................................................. 3-59
special keys ...................................................................... 1-7
speed (max.) ..................................................................... 3-4
speed, theta-axis
pattern setting ......................................................... 2-129
system setting ........................................................... 3-49
speed, x/y-axes
pattern settings ....................................................... 2-127
system settings ........................................................... 3-3
speed, z-axis
pattern setting ......................................................... 2-130
system setting ........................................................... 3-47
square symbol, forced
MicroQR Code ......................................................... 2-46
QR code.................................................................... 2-35
standoff parameter............................................................ 3-4
start character ........................................................... 3-20, 35
startup options ................................................................ 3-14
startup............................................................................... 1-2
station ID.............................................................3-19, 26, 27
stop bits setting
serial1 (host) port ..................................................... 3-18
serial2 port................................................................ 3-34
stop print ........................................................................ 1-14
storing patterns ............................................................... 2-13
stroke parameter ............................................................... 3-4
subnet address .......................................................... 3-37, 38
supervisor mode ............................................................... 3-1
support................................................................................ iii
switch operating mode
designer ...................................................................... 2-9
supervisor ................................................................... 3-1
system
configuration .............................................................. 3-1
inoperative................................................................ 3-58
maintenance.............................................................. 3-57
messages..................................................................... 4-1
tests .......................................................................... 3-57
system parameters
calendar settings ....................................................... 3-40
clock settings............................................................ 3-40
communications ....................................................... 3-18
date codes ................................................................... 3-7
Ethernet .................................................................... 3-37
marker ........................................................................ 3-3
max file size ............................................................. 3-16
Index-8
Merlin ....................................................................... 3-37
omni serial number ................................................... 3-11
overview .....................................................................3-1
pin enable/disable ..................................................... 3-42
query text .................................................................... 3-6
reset to defaults ......................................................... 3-52
serial1 (host) port ...................................................... 3-18
serial1 port ................................................................ 3-18
serial2 port ................................................................ 3-34
shift codes ...................................................................3-9
startup properties....................................................... 3-14
theta-axis................................................................... 3-48
units of measure ........................................................ 3-41
z-axis......................................................................... 3-43
T
TCP/IP communications ................................................. 3-37
Telesis
fonts ........................................................................... A-1
support ..........................................................................iii
terminator character .................................................. 3-20, 35
test
exercise ..................................................................... 3-62
input signals .............................................................. 3-58
machine movement ................................................... 3-60
output signals ............................................................ 3-57
patterns.................................................................... 2-112
pin operation ............................................................. 3-59
position verification .................................................. 3-62
print pattern............................................................... 1-14
solenoids ................................................................... 3-59
theta-axis................................................................... 3-61
x-axis ........................................................................ 3-60
y-axis ........................................................................ 3-60
z-axis......................................................................... 3-61
text
entry into patterns ..................................................... 1-12
operator-supplied ........................................................2-7
text fields ........................................................................ 2-14
theta-axis
configuring................................................................ 3-48
enable/disable ........................................................... 3-48
jog ............................................................................. 1-17
mounting angle, pattern setting............................... 2-129
mounting angle, system setting................................. 3-50
overview ................................................................... 3-48
parameters, system.................................................... 3-48
part diameter, pattern setting................................... 2-128
part diameter, system setting..................................... 3-49
pattern parameters................................................... 2-128
speed, pattern setting............................................... 2-129
speed, stystem setting ............................................... 3-49
test............................................................................. 3-61
time insertion ....................................................................2-8
time to print .................................................................... 1-18
time to settling .......................................................2-127, 3-4
titles, query text table........................................................3-6
TMP1700/TMP1710 selection..........................................3-3
tool post limit switch ...................................................... 3-44
trademarks ............................................................................ i
troubleshooting .................................................................4-1
34700D.DOC
TMC470 Controller Operation
U
unidirectional printing
matrix symbols ......................................................... 2-26
units of measure ............................................................. 3-41
USB backup/Restore ...................................................... 3-53
user fonts
library ..................................................................... 2-132
user-supplied text
data entry .................................................................. 1-12
setup parameters ......................................................... 2-7
V
viewing
pattern, block, font files.......................................... 2-132
W
warnings ...............................................................................v
warranty .............................................................................. ii
waypoints ....................................................................... 2-97
window coordinates.......................................................... 2-2
window size...................................................................... 2-2
wizard for new pattern.................................................... 2-10
work shift codes ............................................................... 3-9
WYSIWYG interface ..................................................... 1-19
X
x-axis
speed, pattern setting .............................................. 2-127
speed, system setting .................................................. 3-3
test ............................................................................ 3-60
Y
y-axis
speed, pattern setting .............................................. 2-127
speed, system setting .................................................. 3-3
test ............................................................................ 3-60
year codes......................................................................... 3-7
Z
z-axis
enable/disable ........................................................... 3-43
jog............................................................................. 1-16
limit switch............................................................... 3-44
lower limit ................................................................ 3-45
overview................................................................... 3-43
speed, pattern setting .............................................. 2-130
speed, system setting ................................................ 3-47
test ............................................................................ 3-61
upper limit ................................................................ 3-44
zero offset................................................................. 3-45
34700D.DOC
Index-9
TMC470 Controller Operation
This page intentionally left blank.
Index-10
34700D.DOC